Upload
others
View
6
Download
0
Embed Size (px)
Citation preview
TRANSPORTATION MANAGEMENT EQUIPMENT SPECIFICATIONS
TMES
English
October 2, 2014
New York State Department of Transportation
Preface
This is the revised edition of the NYS DOT TMES August 5, 2013. This edition has
twenty-three chapters. The chapters are grouped according to functionality. This
specification, or any subsequent update, is available in Adobe Acrobat (.pdf) format on
the department’s web site at www.nysdot.gov/tmes.
Please forward all comments to:
Traffic Signal Coordinator or Traffic Signal Lab Supervisor
NYSDOT Traffic Signal Laboratory
16 Avis Drive
Latham, NY 12110
Phone : 518-783-7746
Fax : 518-783-7828
Note that this specification has all measurements converted to English (USCU)
standards. This conversion is a "soft" conversion to ensure consistency with previously
purchased equipment.
Acknowledgements
We would like to thank everyone who contributed to the creation of this specification manual, most
especially Mike Naumiec, MD Haque and Ben Thomas, and also: John Litteer, Guillermo Ramos,
Abdus Salam, Frank Malek, Victor Vitek, James Learnihan, Christine Dishon, Peg Scocca, Paulo
Villela, Robert Lang, Rufus Banks, Sandra Burgos and Jennifer Mustico
Page | - 1 -
NYS TMES – October 2, 2014
CHAPTER OVERVIEW
Chapter 1 General Requirements
Chapter 2
Microcomputer Requirements
Chapters 3 - 12 Peripheral Equipment Requirements
Chapters 13 - 16 Cabinet Requirements
Chapters 17
LED Modules & PED LED Countdown Timer
Chapters 18 - 23 (Miscellaneous)
Infrared Optical Preemption and Communication System Portable Solar Powered Traffic Signal Traffic Signal Electrical Service Disconnect / Generator Transfer
Switch ADA Solid State Pedestrian Push Button Assembly School Zone Flashing Sign Beacon Assembly Solar Powered Battery Back-Up System
Page | - 2 -
NYS TMES – October 2, 2014
Table of Contents
CHAPTER OVERVIEW .......................................................................................................................................... - 1 -
TABLE OF CONTENTS .................................................................................................................................................................. - 2 -
CHAPTER 1 ........................................................................................................................................................................ - 10 -
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR TRAFFIC SIGNAL CONTROL EQUIPMENT ................................................ - 11 -
1. Sample Qualification ........................................................................................................................................ - 12 -
2. Quality Assurance Procedures/ Quality Control Plan ...................................................................................... - 17 -
SECTION II PRODUCT ACCEPTANCE, TESTING AND GUARANTEES ......................................................................... - 20 -
1. Manufacturer Responsibilities .......................................................................................................................... - 20 -
2. Manufacturer Quality Control ........................................................................................................................... - 20 -
3. Quality Acceptance of Products during Normal Supply ................................................................................... - 21 -
4. Product Warranty/Guarantee ........................................................................................................................... - 29 -
5. Repair of Product under Warranty/Guarantee ................................................................................................. - 30 -
6. Required Environmental Testing (By Manufacturer) ........................................................................................ - 31 -
SECTION III GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ........................................................................................................................ - 36 -
1. Solid-State Design ........................................................................................................................................... - 36 -
2. Requirements ................................................................................................................................................... - 36 -
3. Manual Outline ................................................................................................................................................. - 36 -
SECTION IV OPERATIONAL REQUIREMENTS ............................................................................................................... - 37 -
1. Indicator Lights and Character Displays .......................................................................................................... - 37 -
2. Specifications ................................................................................................................................................... - 37 -
3. Quality Control ................................................................................................................................................. - 37 -
SECTION V ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS ................................................................................................................... - 38 -
1. Constancy of Intervals ...................................................................................................................................... - 38 -
2. Applied Power .................................................................................................................................................. - 39 -
3. Electrical Connections ...................................................................................................................................... - 40 -
4. Power Supply ................................................................................................................................................... - 41 -
5. Cabinet Wiring .................................................................................................................................................. - 42 -
SECTION VI COMPONENTS ............................................................................................................................................. - 42 -
1. Design .............................................................................................................................................................. - 42 -
2. Socket Requirements: ...................................................................................................................................... - 43 -
SECTION VII MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS ................................................................................................................ - 49 -
1. Metal Case ....................................................................................................................................................... - 49 -
2. Modular or Printed Circuit Design .................................................................................................................... - 49 -
3. Inspection ......................................................................................................................................................... - 49 -
4. Model Numbers ................................................................................................................................................ - 50 -
5. Tolerances ....................................................................................................................................................... - 50 -
6. Input Cards ....................................................................................................................................................... - 51 -
SECTION VIII MAINTENANCE .......................................................................................................................................... - 53 -
1. Design .............................................................................................................................................................. - 53 -
2. Test Points ....................................................................................................................................................... - 53 -
3. Installation and Maintenance ........................................................................................................................... - 53 -
SECTION IX ENGINEERING ............................................................................................................................................. - 54 -
Page | - 3 -
NYS TMES – October 2, 2014
1. Human Engineering ......................................................................................................................................... - 54 -
2. Design Engineering .......................................................................................................................................... - 54 -
3. Generated Noise .................................................................................................................................................. 55
SECTION X CONSTRUCTION OF PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS ......................................................................................... 55
1. Design, Fabrication and Mounting ....................................................................................................................... 55
2. Soldering .............................................................................................................................................................. 56
3. Definitions ............................................................................................................................................................ 57
4. Board tolerance .................................................................................................................................................... 57
SECTION XI NEW YORK STATE YEAR 2000 WARRANTY STANDARD ............................................................................. 57
Definitions................................................................................................................................................................. 57
Warranty Disclosure ................................................................................................................................................. 58
Warranty Statement ................................................................................................................................................. 58
SECTION XII BAR-CODING, LABELING AND ELECTRONIC DOCUMENTATION ............................................................... 59
CHAPTER 2 ................................................................................................................................................................ 66
MICROCOMPUTER REQUIREMENTS
CHAPTER 2 ............................................................................................................................................................................... 67
DETAILED SPECIFICATIONS FOR MODEL 2070E TRAFFIC SIGNAL .................................................................................................... 67
CONTROLLER AND COMPONENTS ................................................................................................................................................... 67
1. MAIN SPECIFICATIONS FOR MODEL 2070E AND COMPONENTS ...................................................................................................... 67
2. NYSDOT ADDITIONS AND EXCEPTIONS ...................................................................................................................................... 68
2.2 MODEL 2070-1E CPU ............................................................................................................................................................ 68
CHAPTERS 3 - 12 ....................................................................................................................................................... 69
PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS
CHAPTER 3 DETAILED SPECIFICATION ON DUAL LOOP VEHICLE DETECTOR MODULES MODEL 222 ..................... 70
SECTION I GENERAL DESCRIPTION .................................................................................................................................. 70
1. Vehicle Detector Modules .................................................................................................................................... 70
SECTION II FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS ....................................................................................................................... 71
1. Operational Specifications ................................................................................................................................... 71
3. Mode Selection Requirements ............................................................................................................................. 72
4.4 A minimum of seven sensitivity settings (not including "off") shall be provided for each channel. .................... 74
5. Response Timing ................................................................................................................................................. 74
SECTION III ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS....................................................................................................................... 74
1. Application of power ............................................................................................................................................. 74
2. Interference .......................................................................................................................................................... 74
3. Lightning Protection ............................................................................................................................................. 75
4. Tracking Rate ....................................................................................................................................................... 75
5. Tracking Range .................................................................................................................................................... 75
6. Temperature Change ........................................................................................................................................... 75
7. Board Edge Connector Pin Assignment .............................................................................................................. 75
8. Reset .................................................................................................................................................................... 76
CHAPTER 4 DETAILED SPECIFICATION ON MAGNETIC DETECTOR PROBE MODEL 231 AND DUAL MAGNETIC DETECTOR
AMPLIFIER MODULES MODEL 232 ............................................................................................................................... 76
SECTION I GENERAL DESCRIPTION .................................................................................................................................. 77
1. Design .................................................................................................................................................................. 77
Page | - 4 -
NYS TMES – October 2, 2014
SECTION II FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS ....................................................................................................................... 77
1. Magnetic detector amplifier requirements (Model 232) ....................................................................................... 77
2. Magnetic detector probe requirements (Model 231) ............................................................................................ 79
SECTION III CONNECTOR REQUIREMENTS ...................................................................................................................... 80
1. The Printed Circuit Board Edge Connector.......................................................................................................... 80
2. Connector Pin Assignments ................................................................................................................................. 80
CHAPTER 5 DETAILED SPECIFICATION ON DC DUAL ISOLATION MODULES MODEL 242 .............................................. 81
SECTION I GENERAL DESCRIPTION .................................................................................................................................. 81
1. Design .................................................................................................................................................................. 81
SECTION II FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS ....................................................................................................................... 82
1. Operational Specifications ................................................................................................................................... 82
2. Rack Enclosure .................................................................................................................................................... 82
SECTION III ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS....................................................................................................................... 83
1. Electrical input interface ....................................................................................................................................... 83
2. Isolation ................................................................................................................................................................ 83
3. Lightning Protection ............................................................................................................................................. 83
4. Board Edge Connector Pin Assignment .............................................................................................................. 83
CHAPTER 6 DETAILED SPECIFICATION ON DUAL AC ISOLATION MODULES MODEL 252 .............................................. 84
SECTION I GENERAL DESCRIPTION .................................................................................................................................. 84
1. Design .................................................................................................................................................................. 84
2.Isolation Module .................................................................................................................................................... 84
SECTION II FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS ....................................................................................................................... 85
1. Operational Specifications ................................................................................................................................... 85
SECTION III ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS....................................................................................................................... 86
1. Electrical Input Interface....................................................................................................................................... 86
2. Isolation ................................................................................................................................................................ 86
3. Board Edge Connector Pin Assignment .............................................................................................................. 86
4. Lightning Protection ............................................................................................................................................. 87
CHAPTER 7 DETAILED SPECIFICATION ON SOLID STATE FLASHER RELAY AND SOLID STATE SWITCH MODEL 204 ...... 87
SECTION I GENERAL DESCRIPTION ................................................................................................................................. 88
1. Design .................................................................................................................................................................. 88
SECTION II FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS ...................................................................................................................... 88
1. Capabilities ........................................................................................................................................................... 88
SECTION III ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS ...................................................................................................................... 89
1. Requirements ....................................................................................................................................................... 89
SECTION IV MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS .................................................................................................................... 90
1. Dimensions .......................................................................................................................................................... 90
2. Dimensions .......................................................................................................................................................... 91
3. Assembly .............................................................................................................................................................. 91
4. Caution ................................................................................................................................................................. 91
5. Handle or Gripping Device ................................................................................................................................... 92
SECTION V CONNECTOR.................................................................................................................................................... 92
1. Electrical Connections .......................................................................................................................................... 92
2.Mate ...................................................................................................................................................................... 92
Page | - 5 -
NYS TMES – October 2, 2014
CHAPTER 8 DETAILED SPECIFICATION ON SOLID STATE SWITCH MODEL 200 ....................................................... - 93 -
SECTION I SOLID-STATE SWITCH PACK (MODEL 200) ............................................................................................... - 93 -
1. Description ....................................................................................................................................................... - 93 -
2. Dimensions ...................................................................................................................................................... - 94 -
3. Indicator Lights ................................................................................................................................................. - 95 -
4. Load ................................................................................................................................................................. - 95 -
5. Safety ............................................................................................................................................................... - 95 -
6. Dimensions ...................................................................................................................................................... - 95 -
7. Conductor ......................................................................................................................................................... - 95 -
8. Waterproofing ................................................................................................................................................... - 96 -
SECTION II CONNECTOR ................................................................................................................................................. - 96 -
1. Electrical Connections ...................................................................................................................................... - 96 -
2. Connector ......................................................................................................................................................... - 96 -
3. Pin Assignments .............................................................................................................................................. - 96 -
CHAPTER 9 DETAILED SPECIFICATION ON 12 VOLT RACK MOUNTABLE AC POWER SUPPLY CARD ....................... - 98 -
SECTION I REQUIREMENTS ............................................................................................................................................ - 98 -
1. General Technical Requirements .................................................................................................................... - 98 -
2. Electrical Requirements ................................................................................................................................... - 99 -
3. Manufacturer Operations ............................................................................................................................... - 100 -
CHAPTER 10 DETAILED SPECIFICATION ON MICROWAVE VEHICLE DETECTORS ................................................... - 102 -
SECTION I REQUIREMENTS .......................................................................................................................................... - 102 -
1. General Technical Requirements .................................................................................................................. - 102 -
2. Functional Requirements ............................................................................................................................... - 103 -
3. Mechanical Construction Requirements ........................................................................................................ - 103 -
4. Environmental Operation Requirements ........................................................................................................ - 104 -
5. Manufacturer Operations ............................................................................................................................... - 104 -
CHAPTER 11 DETAILED SPECIFICATION ON ULTRASONIC VEHICLE PRESENCE DETECTORS .................................. - 104 -
SECTION I REQUIREMENTS .......................................................................................................................................... - 105 -
1. General Technical Requirements .................................................................................................................. - 105 -
2. Functional Requirements ............................................................................................................................... - 105 -
3. Mechanical Construction Requirements ........................................................................................................ - 106 -
4. Environmental Operation Requirements ........................................................................................................ - 106 -
5. Manufacturer Operations ............................................................................................................................... - 106 -
CHAPTER 12 DETAILED SPECIFICATION ON MODEL 210NYR CONFLICT MONITOR WITH RED MONITORING OPTION - 107
-
1. General Requirements .............................................................................................................................. - 107 -
2. Monitor Operation ...................................................................................................................................... - 107 -
3. Programming Card ......................................................................................................................................... - 116 -
4. Physical Dimensions ................................................................................................................................. - 116 -
CHAPTER 12A DETAILED SPECIFICATION ON MODEL 210NYRIP CONFLICT MONITOR WITH RED MONITORING OPTION ... - 118 -
Page | - 6 -
NYS TMES – October 2, 2014
CHAPTERS 13 - 16 ............................................................................................................................................... - 119 -
CABINET REQUIREMENTS
CHAPTER 13 DETAILED SPECIFICATION FOR MODEL 330SR POLE MOUNTED TRAFFIC SIGNAL CABINET ........... - 120 -
SECTION I CABINETS AND HOUSING .......................................................................................................................... - 120 -
1. Cabinets and Housings .................................................................................................................................. - 120 -
SECTION II PERIPHERAL HARDWARE ............................................................................................................................. 131
1. Rack ................................................................................................................................................................... 131
2. Swing Out D.C. Power Supply ........................................................................................................................... 131
3. Detector Rack (Input File) .................................................................................................................................. 133
4. Power Distribution Assembly ............................................................................................................................. 134
5. Conflict Monitor Module Rack ............................................................................................................................ 142
6. Load Rack (Output File – Switchpacks 1 – 14 and Flasher) .............................................................................. 144
7.0 LOAD RACK (OUTPUT FILE –SWITCHPACKS 15 AND 16) ............................................................................................................ 144
8.0 FLASH TRANSFER RELAY ....................................................................................................................................................... 146
9.0 FLASHER PROGRAMMING ....................................................................................................................................................... 148
10.0 SWITCHPACK -- FLASHER INTERCONNECTION ......................................................................................................................... 149
11. Red Conflict Monitor Interface ......................................................................................................................... 150
1. Harness Wiring ................................................................................................................................................... 151
2. Terminal Blocks .................................................................................................................................................. 153
4. Pull-out Drawer .................................................................................................................................................. 154
6. Cabinet Line Diagrams ....................................................................................................................................... 155
7. Conflict Monitor Reset Line ................................................................................................................................ 155
8. Relay Transient Protection ................................................................................................................................. 155
9. Cabinet Rack Removable Access Panel Cover ................................................................................................. 155
10. C1 Connector Harness Wiring ......................................................................................................................... 156
11. Shelf Cover ...................................................................................................................................................... 157
12. Shipping Pallet Lag Screws: ............................................................................................................................ 160
The cabinet shall be fastened, with lag screws, to the shipping pallet no longer than two inches wider than the cabinet, measured from any side. .......................................................................................................................... 160
CHAPTER 14 DETAILED SPECIFICATION ON FLASHER CABINET ............................................................................... 174
1. Flasher Receptacle and Harness Assembly ...................................................................................................... 175
Fig – 14.1 Harness Assembly to Flasher Receptacle Wiring ................................................................................. 175
2. Cabinet ............................................................................................................................................................... 176
3. Miscellaneous .................................................................................................................................................... 178
CHAPTER 15 DETAILED SPECIFICATION ON MODEL 330SR CABINET BASE ........................................................... 178
1. Description ......................................................................................................................................................... 179
2. Material Requirements ....................................................................................................................................... 179
CHAPTER 16 DETAILED SPECIFICATION ON AUXILIARY INPUT CABINET .................................................................... 181
1. ENCLOSURE ..................................................................................................................................................... 181
2. REMOVABLE BACK PLATE ............................................................................................................................. 182
3. ELECTRICAL ..................................................................................................................................................... 183
4. LABELING .......................................................................................................................................................... 183
Page | - 7 -
NYS TMES – October 2, 2014
CHAPTERS 17 .......................................................................................................................................................... 190
LED MODULES &
PED LED COUNTDOWN TIMER
CHAPTER 17 DETAILED SPECIFICATION FOR LED TRAFFIC SIGNAL MODULES ......................................................... 191
2. LED ARROW (SINGLE AND BI-MODAL) SPECIFICATIONS ............................................................................................................ 192
3. LED PEDESTRIAN SIGNAL MODULES (SINGLE AND BI-MODAL) AND COUNTDOWN PEDESTRIAN SIGNAL SPECIFICATIONS ................ 192
4.0 ADDITIONS AND EXCEPTIONS TO SPECIFICATIONS FOR ALL MODULES ..................................................................................... 193
6.0 PRODUCTION TESTS & INSPECTIONS ....................................................................................................................................... 198
7. MISCELLANEOUS .................................................................................................................................................................... 199
CHAPTERS 18 – 23 .................................................................................................................................................. 200
INFRARED OPTICAL PREEMPTION AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
PORTABLE SOLAR POWERED TRAFFIC SIGNAL
TRAFFIC SIGNAL ELECTRICAL SERVICE DISCONNECT / GENERATOR TRANSFER SWITCH
ADA SOLID STATE PEDESTRIAN PUSH BUTTON ASSEMBLY
SCHOOL ZONE FLASHING SIGN BEACON ASSEMBLY SOLAR POWERED
BATTERY BACK-UP SYSTEM
CHAPTER 18 DETAILED SPECIFICATION FOR VEHICLE IDENTIFYING INFRARED OPTICAL PREEMPTION AND
COMMUNICATION SYSTEM ........................................................................................................................................ 201
CHAPTER 19 DETAILED SPECIFICATION FOR PORTABLE SOLAR POWERED TRAFFIC SIGNAL .................................... 211
CHAPTER 20 DETAILED SPECIFICATION FOR TRAFFIC SIGNAL ELECTRICAL SERVICE DISCONNECT / GENERATOR
TRANSFER SWITCH .................................................................................................................................................. 216
CHAPTER 21 DETAILED SPECIFICATION FOR ADA SOLID STATE PEDESTRIAN PUSH BUTTON ASSEMBLY ................. 219
CHAPTER 22 DETAILED SPECIFICATION FOR SCHOOL ZONE FLASHING SIGN BEACON ASSEMBLY – SOLAR POWERED
............................................................................................................................................................................... 220
CHAPTER 23 SPECIFICATION FOR BATTERY BACK-UP SYSTEM FOR TRAFFIC SIGNALS UTILIZING LIGHT EMITTING
DIODES (LED)TRAFFIC SIGNAL MODULES ................................................................................................................. 224
GENERAL .............................................................................................................................................................. 224
1. OPERATION ...................................................................................................................................................... 225
2. FUNCTIONALITY, DISPLAYS AND CONTROLS .............................................................................................. 227
3.0 INTERCONNECTING WIRING ........................................................................................................................ 232
3.1 BATTERY HARNESS ............................................................................................................................................ 233
4.0 MOUNTING / CONFIGURATION ..................................................................................................................... 233
5.0 COMMUNICATIONS ........................................................................................................................................ 234
6.0 WARRANTY ..................................................................................................................................................... 235
7.0 QUALITY ASSURANCE ................................................................................................................................... 235
GLOSSARY ........................................................................................................................................................... - 245 -
Page | - 8 -
NYS TMES – October 2, 2014
Summary of Changes Since June 2012 Edition
1) The following was added to Chapter 1, Section I, Item #1.6.2.6 “Sample Submission Milestones” (week #24) : “Original sample unit shall not be changed/modified during resubmission without NYSDOT’s approval.”
2) Model code “BB” (Battery Backup System) was added to the list of model codes in Chapter
1, Section XII, Item #2.
3) Chapter 1, Section II, Item 4.1.1 was re-written.
4) The following was added to Chapter 13, Section I, Item #1.19: “3.0 amp MDL series time delay fuse in series with the 24VDC Access terminals.”
5) Figure 13.10.1 (“330SR Cabinet Details”) revised. A fuse was added under the 24VDC
terminal block (TB9).
6) Added paragraph 11.2 to Chapter 13, Section III. This refers to the addition of a section of foam pipe insulation surrounding the signal cabinet’s C1 harness cable to prevent the cable from falling in between the cabinet rack and the cabinet housing.
7) A sentence was added to paragraph 4.11 of Chapter 13, Section II which states that the
SSR IND SW shall be vertically aligned with SSR IND.
8) Item #1.4.2 of Chapter 13, Section I was revised to state that the NYSDOT Signal Lab will specify the key bitting pattern Corbin “#2A”.
9) A description of a permanent tag with manufacturer’s information (eg: date of mfg, serial
number, etc) shall be attached to the inside wall of the cabinet, was added to Section I, paragraph 1.2 of Chapter 13.
10) “White vinyl” was added as a preferred insulating material to paragraph 1.2 of Section III,
Chapter 13.
11) A new chapter (Chapter 24) will be added to describe a Double Conversion Battery Backup System (BBS) - provides primary DC power to signal, but can be manually switched to allow AC power as backup power or to recharge system’s batteries.
12) Two sentences regarding the 3.0 amp MDL Time Delay fuse was added to paragraph 1.19
of Section 1, Chapter 13.
13) Two sentences regarding the standard ribbon cable for the Red Conflict Monitor Interface were added to paragraph 11.2 of Section 2, Chapter 13.
14) Paragraph 4.1.14 was added to Section 2, Chapter 13.
Page | - 9 -
NYS TMES – October 2, 2014
15) Paragraph 4.11 was removed from Section 2, Chapter 13. Paragraph 4.1.14 (recently added) replaces paragraph 4.11.
16) Reference to an opaque insulating material was added to paragraph 11.2.1 in Section
II, Chapter 13.
17) Reference to an opaque insulating material was added to paragraph 4.9 in Section II, Chapter 13.
18) PDA1, Pin 12 changed from “CC3-9” to “NC” in Section II, Chapter 13
19) The Red Enable connection was changed in Section II, paragraph 11.1, Chapter 13
20) Wiring diagrams 13.16 and 13.17 (Chapter 13) were revised by moving the connection of the SSR IND SW from the load side of the signal head circuit breakers to the line side of the circuit breakers. The designation “FR” was added to the Flash Relay Coil and Flash Relay Contact.
21) Paragraph 1.7.6 (Section 1) previously mentioned a “series RC network consisting of
400V 0.01 MF capacitor and a 100 ohm 2 watt resistor”.
22) Paragraph 8.1 (Section 3) was changed by adding “AC voltage rating of at least 400 Vrms”
23) Paragraph 1.6 (Section 3) was changed by adding polyethylene foam pipe insulation
to prevent the C1 connector from falling between cabinet rack and cabinet housing.
24) Paragraph 1.7.3 (Section 1) was changed by revising temperature range for thermostat turn on from between 90 deg F and 150 deg F to between 32 deg F and 140 deg F. A specific thermostat ID number (or equal) was also added to the paragraph.
25) Added slot dimensions to bracket detail in Figure 13.14 (Chapter 13)
26) Added the following sentence to Ch. 1, Section XII, Item 2.0: “The barcode label shall contain the NYSDOT equipment ID number for each item of equipment that has a manufacturer’s original serial number.”
27) Removed following sentence from Ch. 1, Section XII, Item 3.0: “All Barcode labels used
by the manufacturer must be approved by the NYS Traffic Signal Equipment Lab prior to use.”
28) Added the following sentence to Ch. 1, Section XII, Item 2.0 (Serial Numbers): “Must
be original manufacturer’s serial number from manufacturer’s standard equipment label, unique to that equipment model manufactured.”
29) Revised cabinet door lock specs for Auxiliary Cabinet and Flasher Cabinet . Both locks were keyed to Corbin #2 lock.
Page | - 10 -
NYS TMES – October 2, 2014
NEW YORK STATE DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
TRANSPORTATION MANAGEMENT EQUIPMENT
SPECIFICATIONS (TMES)
Chapter 1
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Page | - 11 -
NYS TMES – October 2, 2014
Chapter 1 General Requirements for Traffic Signal Control Equipment
This specification defines the minimum general technical requirements
applicable to discrete electronic components, mechanical and
electrical design and construction, and the auxiliary and associated
electronic apparatus. These requirements shall apply in all cases to
solid-state electronic equipment used in traffic signal controls and
the testing of the end product. The intent of this specification is
to set forth the general product qualifications, quality assurance
guidelines, ambient conditions within which the equipment must
operate satisfactorily and reliably, the general material, details by
the means by which equipment as a whole shall be tested to determine
whether it shall so operate.
Page | - 12 -
NYS TMES – October 2, 2014
SECTION I
QUALIFICATION
1. Sample Qualification
Samples may be submitted to the procuring agency at any time by mutual
written agreement between the manufacturer wishing to have his samples
placed on the Qualified Products List (QPL) and the NYS DOT Traffic
Signal Laboratory. Except in response to an Office of General Services
(OGS) Bid Advertisement, DOT may have to limit the submittal of samples
depending upon its Laboratory workload. Samples shall not be submitted
during the period between bid advertisement by the Office of General
Services and bid award for a particular product, except as directed by
the Office of General Services.
1.1 Unless otherwise directed a minimum of two (2), maximum of five (5),
samples of the product, together with the appropriate number of
copies of the Operation and Maintenance Manual, as described herein,
shall be submitted in accordance with the preceding.
1.2 Samples shall be submitted to:
NYSDOT Traffic Signal Laboratory
16 Avis Drive
Latham, New York 12110
1.3 Appointments for product submittal may be arranged by calling the NYS
DOT Traffic Signal Laboratory at (518)-783-7746 between the hours of
9:00 A.M. and 3:00 P.M. Monday through Friday, except State holidays.
1.4 Upon written request by the NYSDOT Traffic Signal Laboratory, except
between bid advertisement and award by the Office of General
Services, samples submitted shall be removed, at the expense of the
manufacturer, from the Traffic Signal Laboratory, within ten (10)
calendar days. Upon expiration of this period, the samples shall be
deemed abandoned by the NYSDOT Traffic Signal Laboratory and the
deserted product shall be disposed of in the best interests of the
State.
1.5 Upon acceptance of a certain product, the manufacturer shall furnish
the State thirty-three (33) additional copies of the operation and
maintenance manual and/or provide the state eleven (11) copies of the
manual on electronic media such as a CD ROM.
A preliminary draft of the manual shall be submitted to the
Engineer for approval prior to final printing.
Page | - 13 -
NYS TMES – October 2, 2014
1.6 The procuring agency shall be responsible for determining whether or
not a particular sample meets the requirements of these
specifications. As such samples shall be required to demonstrate
their ability to meet the requirements and tests specified herein.
Samples having successfully passed shall be placed on the "Qualified
Products List". All equipment furnished under these specifications
must be listed on the "Qualified Products List".
1.6.1 Product Additions to the Qualified Products List
Any manufacturers, who want their assemblies or units tested so as
to be added to the QPL, should submit a written request to the
Traffic Signal Coordinator. This will begin the product
evaluation process.
1.6.2 Evaluation of Product
1.6.2.1
The Traffic Signal Laboratory staff will evaluate the application
provided by the manufacturer. The timeframe for this evaluation
will be solely based on NYSDOT Signal Lab workload and personnel
availability.
1.6.2.2
A meeting may be scheduled in Albany to meet with the principals of
the manufacturer to discuss quality control and quality assurance.
1.6.2.3
A minimum of two, maximum of five samples, will be tested by
Department’s laboratory to assure conformance to the specification.
At no cost to the Department, manufacturers may choose third party
testing and submit all test documentation from an independent third
party quality control laboratory for NYSDOT review. If a third
party laboratory is used, the credentials shall be provided for
consideration to the Traffic Signal Coordinator. All laboratories
certified by UL, ETL or NEMA will be considered acceptable after
review of their test documentation. Please note: NYSDOT reserves
the right to do its’ own testing.
1.6.2.4
The manufacturer’s third-party laboratory test results will be
provided to the Traffic Signal Laboratory for evaluation to assure
conformity with the specifications and reasonable uniformity to
each other. Upon request, the Traffic Signal Laboratory’s test
results will be provided to the manufacturer’s quality control
representative.
Page | - 14 -
NYS TMES – October 2, 2014
1.6.2.5
NYSDOT reserves the right to send a representative to visit the
manufacturing facility to verify that the quality control plan,
provided by the manufacturer (see item 2 below), is administered as
stated in their quality control, quality assurance documentation.
In particular NYSDOT suggests the following guidelines.
1.6.2.5.1
Random audits may be performed by Department representatives to
verify the product quality is being determined and properly
documented in conformance with the approved quality control
plan. Note: If the manufacturer is routinely audited by a
certifying agency, the Department may consider reviewing the
results of that audit in lieu of an audit by Department
representatives.
1.6.2.5.2
The Department’s representative, performing the audit, may
select a sample of certified products at the time of the audit.
The selected sample(s) will be used to perform laboratory
testing to assure reasonable uniformity with the manufacturer’s
results (if testing is required in the QC plan) and verification
of specification compliance.
1.6.2.5.3
Audit findings will be reported to the manufacturer’s quality
control representative upon written request.
1.6.2.5.4
All audit findings not in conformance with the quality control
plan and/or product specifications must be investigated by the
manufacturer immediately to assure continued appearance on the
Qualified Products List.
1.6.2.6
The sample submission by the manufacturer shall conform to the
following milestones (Suggested completion dates for each task is
as follows and is based on NYSDOT Signal Lab workload and personnel
availability):
Page | - 15 -
NYS TMES – October 2, 2014
SAMPLE SUBMISSION MILESTONES
Week 0 NYSDOT receives written request to be added to QPL 1
Week 2
Manufacturer supplies documentation regarding
qualifications, Quality Assurance Procedures, and attends
meeting with NYSDOT to discuss product and sample
evaluation process. NYSDOT provides manufacturer with
product diagnostic test software if available 2
Week 8 Manufacturer submits preliminary equipment schematics
Week 9 NYSDOT provide comments on preliminary schematics 3
Week 10 Manufacturer submits final schematics
Week 12 NYSDOT provides comments on final schematics 3
Week 20 Manufacturer submits complete prototype for complete sample
evaluation including environmental test 4
Weeks 20-24 NYSDOT conducts final acceptance testing, and notifies
manufacturer of deficiencies as appropriate.
Week 24
If the sample passes acceptance testing, NYSDOT notifies
manufacturer of such. If the sample has not completely
passed acceptance testing, NYSDOT notifies manufacturer of
the reasons for rejection. The manufacturer is then
allowed to resubmit the sample until it passes acceptance
testing. Original sample unit shall not be
changed/modified during resubmission without NYS DOT’s
approval.
Weeks 24-32
Manufacturers passing the laboratory test may be placed on
the Qualified Products List, pending completion of a field
test. NYSDOT may ask the vendor for a minimum of two,
maximum of five, samples to be placed in the field for up
to an 8 week test. If there are no field problems, NYSDOT
will place the product on its QPL and notify the
manufacturer. If the sample(s) fails in the field, the
manufacturer is then allowed to resubmit the sample(s)
until it passes field testing.
1 REQUIRED WRITTEN REQUEST DOCUMENTATION – The submission of the
following documentation to the satisfaction of NYSDOT shall include
the following:
a. Product name (if different from NYSDOT part number)
b. Supplier/manufacturer name and address
c. Contact person (name and telephone number) and e-mail address
d. Manufacturer name (when different from supplier’s name)
e. Address of actual manufacturing location(s) proposed for
supply to NYSDOT
Page | - 16 -
NYS TMES – October 2, 2014
f. NYSDOT specification number (if applicable)
g. Product data sheet and any safety related data sheet
h. Product label (if used)
i. Supporting test data relevant to NYSDOT specifications and
test methods
j. Identify the marketing plan for supply to Department projects
and a list of your primary customers with any customer
contact names that you may have.
2 CONTRACTOR’S QUALITY ASSURANCE PROCEDURES – The manufacturer shall
submit to NYSDOT in writing or in electronic form, quality control
and factory test procedures for the products that you provide to the
State of New York. In particular please submit your Quality Control
plan, any quality control plan certifications from outside
organizations and assurance methods/frequency of verification,
certifications and/or accreditations of individuals directly
responsible for QC at the plant, and any records to support
Certification of processes. These procedures will require approval
from NYSDOT prior to the item being placed on the QPL. Refer to
Chapter 1 Section 1 of this Specifications for NYSDOT requirements.
3 NYSDOT comments on manufacturer’s schematics, drawings and diagrams
are provided for manufacturer convenience only. They will not
constitute approval, nor will they in any way alleviate the
manufacturer from complying with any and all aspects of the
specification. The ultimate acceptance of the sample will be based
upon its meeting the specifications and passing the final acceptance
and field testing.
4 At the appropriate time, a minimum of two (2), maximum of five (5)
samples of the Item, complete as per the specifications and including
schematics and operator's manuals, must be submitted to the address
listed below:
NYS Department of Transportation
Traffic Signal Laboratory
16 Avis Drive
Latham, NY 12110
Attn: Signal Lab Supervisor
1.7 Products furnished to these specifications shall be the same as
and equal to the samples tested and placed on the "Qualified
Products List", and shall be exact duplicates of the particular
sample purchased by the procuring agency upon placement on the
"Qualified Products List". This shall not exclude the use of like
discrete components.
1.8 NYSDOT shall have the right to retain and purchase the sample of
Page | - 17 -
NYS TMES – October 2, 2014
the unit tested and accepted for placement on its Qualified
Products List. The purchase price for the sample unit shall not
exceed the latest DOT procurement price for a similar product as
bid by OGS.
1.9 Qualification of all equipment for placement on the New York State
Traffic Signal Qualified Products List shall include a laboratory
test to determine compliance with this hardware specification. In
addition up to an eight (8) week field test will be required as
directed by NYSDOT. Manufacturers passing the laboratory test may
be placed on the Qualified Products List, pending completion of a
field test. In order to obtain sufficient sample exposure during
the field test, the manufacturer may be required, upon written
request by NYSDOT to supply up to five (5) sample devices for
field testing.
1.10 Each manufacturer will be required to submit their Quality
Assurance Procedures/ Quality Control Plan for each item that they
have listed on the QPL for review and approval. These procedures
will be requested in writing for all new items added to the QPL
and periodically, at the request of NYSDOT, for existing QPL
items. Failure to submit these Quality Assurance Procedures or
failure of these procedures to be approved by NYSDOT will result
in the removal of the item from the QPL. See item 2 below for
further details.
1.11 Each manufacturer is responsible for re-submitting, to NYSDOT, the
Quality Assurance Procedures for their products in this QPL when
ever they are revised. Failure to submit these Quality Assurance
Procedures or failure of these procedures to be approved by NYSDOT
will result in the removal of the item from the QPL.
1.12 Failure of a manufacturer to perform satisfactorily on purchase
orders by failing to meet delivery schedules or maintain a high
rate of acceptance as depicted in the specification will result in
the item being removed from the QPL.
2. Quality Assurance Procedures/ Quality Control Plan
2.1 Manufacturer Quality Control Plan Application. Each manufacturer
shall provide a quality control (QC) plan for any product purchased
by NYSDOT which conforms to these specifications. Updates to the
plan shall be transmitted when changes occur. An annual letter
shall be sent to the Department (to the Traffic Signal Coordinator,
unless otherwise directed) assuring the manufacturer’s commitment
in following the QC plan as submitted. The QC plan must be
resubmitted in its entirety at least once every two years. The QC
plan shall contain the following minimum information:
Page | - 18 -
NYS TMES – October 2, 2014
a. Name and location of the manufacturing and/or supply
location(s)
b. Identify any certifications to support the evaluation of the
manufacturer’s ability to manufacture and control the quality
of the finished product (i.e. ISO, UL, ETL, etc.) Note: If
certifying agencies require a quality control plan for review
and approval prior to certification, the Department may
consider the transmission of those plans as satisfactorily
complying with the Department’s requirements for a QC plan.
This is contingent on identifying the entries with the
corresponding requested response as detailed herein.
c. The name, telephone number, FAX number and e-mail address of
the manufacturer’s primary contact responsible for the product
quality at their location.
d. An organization chart showing the person responsible for
quality control and identification of the authority and
managerial relationship with other principals of the
manufacturer, particularly as it relates to production
management.
e. The specific processes used to control the quality of the
provided product and assurances of the continued acceptability
from component and/or raw material supply, manufacture, storage
and transport to end use.
f. Identify the location (and name if different from the
manufacturer) of the laboratory used to control the quality
and/or to assure the acceptability of the product.
g. Identify the assurance methods (i.e. specific test
procedures) and frequency of verification of laboratory
performance directly related to the test for certification of
the finished product. This may include an inter-laboratory
round robin testing program and/or inspection and verification.
h. Identify the person, by name and title responsible, for the
review and evaluation of the laboratory’s performance and the
authority to take prompt corrective action.
i. Identify any certifications or accreditations awarded to
individuals directly related to assuring the quality and
certification of the finished product. Include the certifying
agency, date of the certification and expiration date.
Page | - 19 -
NYS TMES – October 2, 2014
j. Identify the specific basis (testing, in process inspection,
automated controls, etc.) to certify conformance of the
finished product.
k. Identify the location of records to support the certification
of the product.
l. Identify the process to assure communication relating to the
quality of the finished product to the individual(s)
responsible to prepare and complete a certification of
compliance.
m. Identify the process used to investigate, document, notify
and/or recall products supplied based upon certification and
subsequently found to be unsatisfactory. (i.e. This may be the
result of a communication breakdown between production and
clerical staff, subsequent findings of laboratory deficiencies
that may have been present prior to certification, notification
of certified component material improperly certified, etc.)
- 20 -
NYS TMES – October 2, 2014
SECTION II PRODUCT ACCEPTANCE, TESTING AND GUARANTEES
1. Manufacturer Responsibilities
Unless otherwise directed by NYSDOT, all items purchased by NYSDOT,
as per these specifications, shall conform to the quality testing,
quality control, quality assurance, product acceptance, testing
requirements and guarantees described in this chapter. Model and
Serial Numbers must be provided on each item as per the details in
Section VII, paragraph 4 of this chapter.
All equipment provided by the manufacturer to NYSDOT shall be tested
by the manufacturer prior to shipping according to the Quality
Assurance and Control Plan submitted to and approved by the
Department. See Section I of this chapter for further details on
Quality Plans and Paragraph 6 of this section for specific
manufacturer test requirements for all controller units.
2. Manufacturer Quality Control
The measures listed below shall be taken by the manufacturer during
the production process to insure a high standard of quality. As
stated Section I of this chapter, the manufacturer shall provide
NYSDOT a quality assurance plan which provides the guidelines and
responsibilities in effect, to ensure the delivery of products that
meet or exceed the New York State Specifications. In particular:
2.1 Components. All components shall be lot sampled to assure a
consistent high conformance standard to the design specification
of the unit.
2.2 Sub assembly or module
A. Visual inspections shall be performed on all modules, printed
circuits and sub assemblies to determine any physical defects such
as cracking, scaling, poor fastening, incorrect component values,
etc.
B. Complete electrical testing shall be performed on each module,
printed circuit or sub assembly to determine its compliance to the
manufacturer's design function.
C. Housing, chassis, and connection terminals shall be inspected for
mechanical sturdiness and harnessing to sockets shall be
electrically tested for proper wiring sequence.
Page | - 21 -
NYS TMES – October 2, 2014
2.3 Units
A. The completely assembled unit shall be submitted to a full
cycling and a timing test (where applicable).
B. The unit shall be visually inspected to assure proper placement,
mounting, and compatibility of sub assemblies.
2.4 Pre-delivery Repair. The procedures listed below shall be
followed in repair of equipment before shipment.
A. Any defects or deficiencies found in the internal inspection
system involving general mechanical structure and general harness
wiring shall be fed back through the manufacturing process (or
special repair process) for correction.
B. Defects in printed circuit boards or electronic circuit
components shall be specially treated as follows:
i. A printed circuit board may be flow soldered a second time
if copper runs and joints are not satisfactorily coated on
the first run. Care shall be taken to observe Section IX
2.2f.
ii. Under no circumstances shall a printed circuit board be
flow soldered more than twice.
iii. Hand soldering using the technique of wicking away excess
solder with a stranded wire may be used for printed circuit
repair.
iv. Unacceptable solder peaks and uncoated copper runs may be
corrected using hand soldering techniques.
3. Quality Acceptance of Products during Normal Supply
Once NYSDOT receives any product from the manufacturer, it will
verify it via auditing the manufacturer quality control process as
well as sample testing the product for proper operation as discussed
below.
3.1 Verification of Product
A verification process is required to assure that manufacturers
appearing on the Qualified Products List properly evaluate, supply
and certify the product as approved in the application process and as
specified. This is accomplished by auditing the quality control
process and/or actively monitoring the quality of the finished
product by inspection and/or sampling for test.
Page | - 22 -
NYS TMES – October 2, 2014
3.1.1 Manufacturer auditing (Quality Assurance Procedures/
Quality Control Plan) is described in Section I paragraph
1.6.2.5 of this chapter.
3.1.2 Sample Testing (Monitoring) Samples
The Traffic Signal Laboratory will actively monitor the quality
of the finished product to verify the manufacturer is
controlling the quality of the product as certified and the
product’s quality remains as specified at the time of use or
installation. While the Department reserves the right to test
all delivered products, the Department expects to ordinarily
test the products by sample testing a limited portion of the
products upon manufacture and delivery. Therefore, random
samples may be taken during the audit as detailed in 3.1.1 above
and/or at the Traffic Signal Laboratory or any NYSDOT regional
location. The size of the sample will be based on the ANSI
Z1.4/MIL STD-105E Lot Random Sampling requirements. The NYSDOT
Sampling Plan Chart is shown on Table 1.2 below. NOTE: Due to
the public safety requirements of all equipment specified in
this document, NYSDOT will strictly follow the Critical Sampling
Requirements noted in the NYSDOT Sampling Plan Chart.
3.1.2.1
After the Traffic Signal Laboratory or NYSDOT Regional location
receives a lot of units from the manufacturer, sample(s) will be
tested by NYSDOT (normally by the Traffic Signal Laboratory
staff).
3.1.2.2
The test results will be evaluated to confirm specification
compliance.
3.1.2.3 Test results
3.1.2.3.1
Any test that results in other than normal and expected
operation shall be considered a test failure. The manufacturer,
distributor, or their authorized representative shall be
permitted to repair or replace products up to the AQL limit of
failures (refer to the Table 1.2: NYSDOT Sampling Plan Chart).
The repair or replacement must follow the warranty/guarantee
procedures defined in items 4 and 5 at the end this section. The
repairer shall document the repairs made and submit this
documentation with the equipment to be retested. Repaired items
will be retested by the Department.
Page | - 23 -
NYS TMES – October 2, 2014
3.1.2.3.2 If the percentage of product failures exceeds the AQL (refer to
the Table 1.2: NYSDOT Sampling Plan Chart), sample testing on
the lot will cease and the entire lot shall be sent back to the
manufacturer for repair or replacement at their facility before
the lot is resubmitted for additional tests. The manufacturer
shall reimburse NYSDOT for any shipping costs and retesting
required during reacceptance. Please refer to the NYSDOT
Estimated Reimbursement Table 1.1 below.
3.1.2.3.3
If a lot of a given product is installed in the field and
subsequently a failure or failures from that lot occur during
the warrantee period due to design or quality problems, NYSDOT
may choose to sample the lot according to Table 1.2: NYSDOT
Sampling Plan Chart, by removing units from the field and
testing them. If the sample has a number of failures greater
than the Acceptance Level (ACC), NYSDOT shall be reimbursed by
the vendor for the costs of sampling and testing the existing
lot, otherwise NYSDOT will absorb this cost. If the products in
the problem lot must be removed and replaced from its field
installation, based on test results that prove product failure,
the manufacturer shall reimburse NYSDOT for such removal and
replacement as defined in the warranty/guarantee procedures
defined in items 4 and 5 at the end this section. The cost for
replacement will be calculated on a per unit cost which is
based on the estimated time and operating costs required to
perform the work. Please refer to Table 1.1: NYSDOT Estimated
Reimbursement Table below.
TABLE 1.1: NYSDOT ESTIMATED REIMBURSEMENT TABLE
The manufacturer will reimburse NYSDOT for each unit that is tested,
replaced and/or removed by the NYSDOT Laboratory, Regional Staff or
its representatives when products fail based on these specifications.
The cost to the manufacturer will solely be based on the per unit
cost listed below. That cost was calculated by assessing the time
and charges incurred by NYSDOT or its representatives.
THE COST TO THE MANUFACTURER FOR NYSDOT SERVICES IS:
50% of NYSDOT's purchase price of the unit
up to a maximum of $150.
Page | - 24 -
NYS TMES – October 2, 2014
Top of the Document
AQL - Acceptable Quality Level. This is the maximum acceptable percentage failure of units
within a lot.
ACC - Acceptable Units. This is the maximum number of failed units allowed to accept lot.
REJ - Rejected Units. This is the minimum number of unit failures to reject lot.
NYSDOT (Based on ANSI Z1.4/Mil-Std-105E Lot Random Sampling -
Sampling Plan Chart Revision 3, September 2000)
Item Lot size or Testing Sample Critical Sampling
Shipment size Size for Acceptance Testing
SET 1 AQL ACC REJ
(Maximum % failures (Maximum number of (Minimum number of
within a lot) failures to accept Lot) failures to reject lot)
2-8 2 1 0 1
Model 170, Model 179, 9-15 3 1 0 1
Model 200, Model 204, 16-25 5 1 0 1
Model 210, Model 215 26-50 8 1 0 1
PDA, 24 VDC, 51-90 13 1 0 1
Model 416, LED Signals, 91-150 20 1 0 1
Model 2070, Model 330, 151-280 32 1 1 2
Flasher Cab. 281-500 50 1 1 2
SET 2 2-8 2 4 0 1
9-15 3 4 0 1
Model 400, Model 222, 16-25 5 4 0 1
Model 224, Model 231, 26-50 8 4 1 2
Model 232, Model 242, 51-90 13 4 1 2
Model 252, 91-150 20 4 2 3
151-280 32 4 3 4
281-500 50 4 5 6
501-1200 80 4 7 8
1201-3200 125 4 10 11
Model 200, Model 204, ,
Model 210NYR, Model
2070E, Model 2070-1E,
Model 2070-2A, Model
2070-2E, Model 2070-6B,
Model 2070-7A, Model
2070-3B, Model 2070-4A,
LED Modules, Model 330SR,
Flasher cabinet, Transfer
Switch,
PDA 24V, Aux Cabinet
Model 222, Model 232,
Model 242, Model 252.
TABLE 1.2: NYSDOT Sampling Plan Chart
(Based on ANSI/ASQ Z1.4-2003 Sampling Procedures and Tables for Inspection by Attributes)
Page | - 25 -
NYS TMES – October 2, 2014
3.1.3 Disqualification of Manufacturer
Test results found to be outside the Accepted Quality Level
(AQL) listed in Table 1.2: NYSDOT Sampling Plan Chart above may
result in the rejection of the product as per the procedures
listed below. If rejected, the product shall be removed from the
Qualified Products List and be replaced with an acceptable
product from another manufacturer at no additional cost to the
Department, i.e. the current supplier/manufacturer will accept
responsibility of reimbursing the Department for any cost
difference between products. The following describes the process
that NYSDOT will follow.
3.1.3.1 Notification.
When the verification process results in unsatisfactory
findings, the Traffic Signal Laboratory will provide written
notification of the findings to the manufacturer.
3.1.3.2 Required Action.
The manufacturer shall conduct a prompt investigation into
the findings. The results of the investigation and identified
corrective action shall be provided to the Traffic Signal
Laboratory, in writing, within 15 days of the notification.
Alternately, the manufacturer may dispute the unsatisfactory
findings. Within 5 days of the Department’s notification to
the manufacturer of the unsatisfactory findings, the
manufacturer shall provide written notification of the intent
to dispute those findings. The letter shall include the
intended approach as detailed below:
The manufacturer shall provide evidence supporting the
manufacturer’s position. The manufacturer may arrange for and
provide “third party” laboratory test results to provide
technical support. If a third party laboratory is used, the
credentials shall be provided for consideration to the Traffic
Signal Coordinator. All laboratories certified by UL, ETL or
NEMA for the specific test properties will be considered
acceptable once NYSDOT reviews the test documentation.
Due consideration will be provided based upon presentations
and/or laboratory test results by the Department’s testing,
the manufacturer’s testing and third party laboratory results
if provided. The Traffic Signal Coordinator or designee will
be the final arbitrator of disputes.
Page | - 26 -
NYS TMES – October 2, 2014
3.1.3.3 Resolution of Unsatisfactory Verification Findings.
The Department will evaluate the manufacturer’s investigation
findings and any corrective actions and/or dispute supporting
data. At the completion of this evaluation the manufacturer
will be notified, in writing, of the Department’s resolution
to the unsatisfactory verification findings. Resolution will
typically be one of the following:
3.1.3.3.1
The data supports the need for the manufacturer to further
investigate the problem and/or make modifications to the
quality control processes (see Section IV). As a result, at
the discretion of the Traffic Signal Coordinator, routine
Department supply can continue in accordance with the quality
control plan and any approved revisions.
3.1.3.3.2
The manufacturer’s name and location are removed from the
Department’s Qualified Products List. When removed from the
Qualified Products List, supply must cease immediately and the
Department will replace the product with an acceptable product
from another manufacturer at no additional cost to the
Department, i.e. the current supplier/manufacturer will accept
responsibility of reimbursing the Department for any cost
difference between products. The following identifies factors
that shall result in the removal of a manufacturer’s name from
the Qualified Products List:
A. Serious fraudulent infractions, which may include
falsifying records or deliberate shipment of noncompliant
product.
B. Failure to provide a timely response to notifications of
unsatisfactory findings. Typically investigative reports in
excess of 30 days, subsequent to Department notification as
identified in the Department’s letter of notification, will
be considered delinquent.
C. Repetitious unsatisfactory findings without appropriate
corrective action.
D. Samples tested which have consistent deficiencies shall be
removed from the Qualified Products List. Only a product
which has passed both acceptance and field testing and has no
deficiencies will be placed on the permanent Qualified
Products List. Deficiencies may include but are not limited
to any of the following examples:
Page | - 27 -
NYS TMES – October 2, 2014
- Physical dimensions not in accordance with the
specifications.
- Input or output connectors and/or keying not in compliance
with the specifications.
- Operational or timing sequence which does not meet minimum
specification requirements.
- Improper Input Output voltage or current levels.
- User programming switches or push buttons or
potentiometers not in accordance with the specification.
- Indicator lights or character displays not in accordance
with the specification.
- Circuit components not of the quality and/or construction
called for in the specification.
-Failure as a result of specified temperature and/or humidity
tests.
- Failure as a result of line voltage, transient or
lightning tests.
- User programming switches or push buttons or
potentiometers which cannot be readily manipulated by the
ungloved human hand.
- Inadequate cabinet ventilation and weatherproofing.
- Failure as a result of physical tests such as shock or
vibration.
- Unacceptable quality assurance/control procedures.
E. Failure to Reimburse NYSDOT for the cost of replacement of
equipment.
3.1.3.4 Reinstatement of Product to the Qualified Products List.
The Traffic Signal Coordinator or designee will give
consideration for manufacturers that appeared on the Qualified
Products List that have been removed and may give them an
opportunity to be reinstated on the Qualified Products List
after the deficiencies are resolved. Product reinstatement
Page | - 28 -
NYS TMES – October 2, 2014
will be based on NYSDOT laboratory staff workload and
personnel availability. The attempt to reinstate the vendor
will be provided to give the manufacturer the opportunity to
maintain previous relationships with the Department while
reestablishing quality control. Products manufactured prior to
date of manufacturer removal from the Qualified Products List
will not be considered acceptable without specific technical
basis provided by the manufacturer and written approval by the
Traffic Signal Coordinator or designee. The requirements for
reinstatement are as follows:
3.1.3.4.1
Application. A formal application shall be provided to the
Traffic Signal Coordinator seeking reinstatement. The
application shall include details of the “Quality Control
Plan” modifications and “Supplemental Evaluation Resource” as
detailed below.
3.1.3.4.2
Quality Control Plan. When certified products are found not to
conform to the specification requirements, either the approved
quality control plan was not followed as required or the
approved quality control plan does not sufficiently address
the problems found. Prior to consideration for reinstatement,
the following must be accomplished:
A. Identify the portion of the quality control plan that was
not followed or not followed sufficiently to assure the
product conforms to the specification or provide
modifications to the approved quality control plan to provide
assurance that the problems found are unlikely to occur
again. A review of current test procedures must be included.
B. Provide written confirmation assuring the implementation of
the modifications identified above. The document shall
include the specific date of implementation.
3.1.3.4.3
Supplemental Evaluation Resource.
The Qualified Products List manufacturer must provide an
interim evaluation resource to adequately satisfy the
Department that corrective measures to the quality control
plan, as detailed above, are adequate to assure the product’s
specification conformance. The supplemental evaluation
resource(s) shall openly communicate with Department
representatives. This includes free access to all
Page | - 29 -
NYS TMES – October 2, 2014
documentation related to the services provided. Examples of
supplemental evaluation resources follow:
A. Additional testing, either by in-house staff or by a third
party laboratory, to test and verify specification conformance
as well as the adequacy of the modifications to the QC plan.
If a third party laboratory is used, the credentials of the
laboratory and the proposed frequency of test shall be
provided to the Traffic Signal Coordinator for review and
approval. All costs for the laboratory services will be the
manufacturer’s responsibility.
B. Additional inspection team, either in-house staff or a
third party inspection manufacturer to verify specification
conformance as well as the adequacy of the modifications to
the QC plan. The credentials of the inspection manufacturer
and the proposed evaluation process shall be provided to the
Traffic Signal Coordinator for review and approval. All costs
for the inspection services will be the manufacturer’s
responsibility.
3.1.3.4.4
Department’s Role. The Department will continue to provide
quality assurance as administered by the Traffic Signal
Laboratory. The verification process (es) detailed in this
procedure will continue to be used. If quality problems
continue to persist, the approval to supply may be immediately
rescinded by the Traffic Signal Coordinator or designee and
the product will be removed from the Qualified Products List.
3.1.3.4.5
Restoration of the product to the Qualified Products List. The
Traffic Signal Coordinator will consider requests to restore
the manufacturer’s Qualified Products List status when
evidence is provided and confirmed by the Department that the
cause for the action has been corrected and is unlikely to
occur again.
4. Product Warranty/Guarantee
4.1 The following paragraphs, 4.1.1 to 4.1.5 define the minimum
detailed Warranty/Guarantee requirements for all Traffic Management
Equipment specified in this specification.
4.1.1 The manufacturer shall Warranty/Guarantee the product for a
minimum of twenty-four (24) months, commencing with the date the
equipment is delivered to NYSDOT, but shall never be less than
Page | - 30 -
NYS TMES – October 2, 2014
twenty-one (21) months from the date the equipment has been tested
and approved. Exceptions to the twenty-four month
Warranty/Guarantee are for LED Traffic Signal Modules and
Pedestrian LED Countdown Timer Modules. These modules shall have a
Warranty/Guarantee of sixty (60) months commencing with the date
the modules are delivered to NYSDOT, but shall never be less than
fifty-seven (57) months from the date the modules have been tested
and approved.
4.1.2 All units which fail during the warranty period due to faulty
design, quality issues, component failures or failure to meet any
of the detailed specifications for that unit shall be repaired or
replaced by the manufacturer in a timely manner. Shipping
arrangements and costs for the return of any equipment under
warranty are the responsibility of the manufacturer.
4.1.3 If a unit fails during the warranty period due to faulty
design, quality issues, component failures or failure to meet any
of the detailed specifications for that unit during the warranty
period NYSDOT shall be reimbursed by the manufacturer for its
services to test, remove and replace the item. The cost for
replacement will be based on the estimated time and operating costs
required to perform the work. Please refer to Table 1.1: NYSDOT
Estimated Reimbursement Table above for details. In addition the
manufacturer shall reimburse NYSDOT for any shipping costs incurred
to repair the equipment.
4.1.4 If a manufacturer fails to Reimburse NYSDOT for the cost of
replacement of equipment NYSDOT shall remove them from its QPL.
4.1.5 NYSDOT will render the final determination to the nature of
the failure, if a unit fails during the warranty period.
5. Repair of Product under Warranty/Guarantee
5.1 The following paragraphs, 5.1.1 to 5.1.4, define the minimum
detailed Repair requirements for all Traffic Management Equipment
specified in this specification.
5.1.1 A printed circuit board may be factory repaired not more than
two (2) times during the warranty period of the unit that contains
the board. A third failure shall result in the replacement of the
entire unit with a new unit at no cost to NYSDOT. The warranty for
the replacement unit shall be equivalent to the remainder of the
warranty period of the replaced unit or 12 months, whichever is
Page | - 31 -
NYS TMES – October 2, 2014
greater.
5.1.2 A unit where a printed circuit board component/s,
conductors/traces are damaged while undergoing warranty repair
shall be replaced by an entirely new unit at no cost to NYSDOT. The
warranty for the replacement unit shall be equivalent to the
remainder of the warranty period of the replaced unit or 12 months,
whichever is greater.
5.1.3 Factory repairs shall be described and reported in detail on
a form to be furnished by the State.
5.1.4 Agency performance records of equipment shall be accepted
for determinations involving questions concerning but not limited
to the number of factory repairs rendered to a given unit.
6. Required Environmental Testing (By Manufacturer)
The following Environmental Test procedures are required to be done by the
manufacturer for all controller units purchased by NYSDOT. NYSDOT
reserves the right to require these tests for all other items described in
these specifications. NYSDOT will notify the manufacturer prior to
procurement if these tests are required for those products.
6.1 Each controller unit specified shall be environmental tested by the
manufacturer to ensure proper operation over the full range of
environmental conditions. During the test each unit is run at high,
normal and low line voltage while subjected to temperatures ranging
from 165 to -30 degrees Fahrenheit.
A comprehensive diagnostic test program shall test each controller
unit, as to memory and input/output circuits. Finally, the system
maintains a printed log of test results.
6.2 The test system consists of four (4) major subsystems:
an environmental chamber whose temperature can be controlled
automatically
a diagnostic test program,
an auto-transformer to regulate the AC line voltage supply for the
test units and
A printer may be used to log detailed information regarding all
test errors and failures or said errors and failures may be logged
manually for the controller under test.
Summary printouts and test certifications for units which have passed
all tests shall be recorded by the manufacturer and passed onto the
NYSDOT Traffic Signal Laboratory for review.
Page | - 32 -
NYS TMES – October 2, 2014
6.3 The internal diagnostic program to be run on each controller shall
be comprehensive on both RAM and PROM memory and on the unit's
inputs and outputs. The contractor shall submit his diagnostics for
approval if other than NYS approved diagnostics is used.
6.4 The final component in the test system is an auto-transformer to
regulate the AC line voltage supply for the test units. It
stabilizes the line voltage within 0.5 volt of the level commanded
by the data collector or contractor. It can supply up to 3 amperes
per controller unit.
6.5 Environmental Test Cycle (By Manufacturer)
6.5.1 Room Temperature. Each controller unit shall be tested using
Acceptance Test software, approved by the Agency, at room
temperature for a minimum of 100 hours. This test may be
performed before or after the High/Low temperature cycling
tests. Successful testing will result in all equipment
continuing its intended operation after being subjected to the
following minimal testing requirements:
6.5.2 High/Low Temperature Cycling Tests. Each controller unit
shall go through a minimum of 50 hours of temperature cycling
as outlined below. Also refer to the Fig-1.1 at the end of this
section.
6.5.2.1 High Temperature Test.
A. With the item functioning (i.e. running diagnostic software)
in its intended operation at an operational line voltage of 120
+/- 3 VAC, the ambient temperature shall be raised from room
temperature (70 degrees F) to 165 degrees F at a rate of not
more than 32 degrees F per hour.
B. The item shall operate at 165 degrees F for a minimum of 12
hours up to a maximum of 24 hours. Except for the power down
test, each unit shall be powered on and operating under the
control of the Diagnostic test program. At the maximum
temperature, the unit shall be operated for a minimum of two
hours at a line voltage of 98 VAC and a minimum two hours at a
line voltage of 135 VAC. Throughout this voltage variation test
section, the unit should be examined to insure that the unit
diagnostic software is operating properly and error free. This
includes such diagnostic tests as:
i. The time clock functioned properly
Page | - 33 -
NYS TMES – October 2, 2014
ii. Data in RAM was retained
iii. IO wraparound tests functions properly
iv. Communications tests functions properly
C. After returning the unit to the normal operational voltage
(120 +/-3 VAC), the high temperature test shall conclude with
each unit being subjected to a two hour power down test where
power is removed from the unit. When power is restored, the
unit should be examined to insure the following:
i. The unit started up properly
ii. The down time clock functioned properly
iv. Data in RAM was retained
D. The temperature shall then be lowered to 20 degrees C at the
rate of not more than 18 degrees C per hour.
6.5.2.2 Room Temperature Test.
A. Once at room temperature (70 degrees F), the item shall
operate for a minimum of 8 hours at an operating line voltage of
120 +/-3 VAC. Each unit shall remain powered on and operating
under the control of the Diagnostic test program. Throughout
this section, the unit should be examined to insure that the
unit diagnostic software is operating properly and error free.
This includes such diagnostic tests as:
i. The time clock functioned properly
ii. Data in RAM was retained
iii. IO wraparound tests functions properly
iv. Communications tests functions properly
6.5.2.3 Low Temperature Test Cycle.
A. With the item functioning in its intended operation (i.e.
running diagnostic software) at an operational line voltage of
120 +/-3 VAC, the ambient temperature shall be lowered from
room temperature (70 degrees F) to -35 degrees F at a rate of
not more than 64 degrees F per hour.
B. The item shall operate at -35 degrees F for a minimum of 12
hours up to a maximum of 24 hours. Except for the power down
test, each unit shall be powered on and operating under the
control of the Diagnostic test program. At the minimum
temperature, the unit shall be operated for a minimum of two
hours at a line voltage of 98 VAC and a minimum two hours at a
line voltage of 135 VAC. Throughout this voltage variation test
Page | - 34 -
NYS TMES – October 2, 2014
section, the unit should be examined to insure that the unit
diagnostic software is operating properly and error free. This
includes such diagnostic tests as:
i. The time clock functioned properly
ii. Data in RAM was retained
iii. IO wraparound tests functions properly
iv. Communications tests functions properly
C. After returning the unit to the normal operational voltage
(120 +/-3 VAC), the low temperature test shall conclude with
each unit being subjected to a two hour power down test where
power is removed from the unit. When power is restored, the
unit should be examined to insure the following:
i. The unit started up properly
ii. The down time clock functioned properly
iii. Data in RAM was retained
D. The temperature shall then be raised to 70 degrees F at the
rate of not more than 32 degrees F per hour.
6.5.2.4 Final Room Temperature Test.
A. Once at room temperature (70 degrees F), the item shall
operate for a minimum of 8 hours at an operating line voltage
of 120 +/-3 VAC. Each unit shall remain powered on and
operating under the control of the Diagnostic test program.
Throughout this section, the unit should be examined to insure
that the unit diagnostic software is operating properly and
error free. This includes such diagnostic tests as:
i. The time clock functioned properly
ii. Data in RAM was retained
iii. IO wraparound tests functions properly
iv. Communications tests functions properly
6.6 Summary printouts and test certifications for each controller
unit documenting all above tests shall be recorded by the
manufacturer and passed onto the NYSDOT Traffic Signal Laboratory for
review.
Page | - 35 -
NYS TMES – October 2, 2014
Temperature Cycling Test chart
-50
0
50
100
150
200
0 10 20 30 40 50
Time in Hours
Te
mp
era
tu
re
in
De
gre
es
F
Note during both High and low Temperature Soaking :
Lower the line voltage to 98VAC for two hours
minimum , then raise the voltage to 135 VAC for 2
hours minimum. Verufy unit throughout voltage
variations . Then return the unit to normal
operational voltage . Verify unit. Two hours prior to
the end of the soaking period , power off the unit.
After two hours, power up the unit and verify unit.
Fig -1.1: Temperature Cycling Test Chart
Page | - 36 -
NYS TMES – October 2, 2014
SECTION III GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
1. Solid-State Design
All equipment furnished under these specifications shall be of the
solid-state design. The use of vacuum or gaseous tubes or
electromechanical devices within the equipment will not be acceptable
unless otherwise indicated.
2. Requirements
Requirements outlined in Chapter 1 are applicable to auxiliary and
associated solid-state electronic field apparatus whether or not set
forth in a detailed specification.
3. Manual Outline
Operation and Maintenance Manuals shall be supplied for all items
required under Departmental contract. Operation and Maintenance Manuals
shall include the following:
A. Table of Contents
B. Glossary
C. General Description
D. General Characteristics
E. Installation
F. Adjustments
G. Theory of Operation
i. Systems Description (include block diagram).
ii. Detailed Description of Circuit Operation.
H. Maintenance
i. Preventive Maintenance.
ii. Trouble Analysis. (Field and Bench)
iii. Trouble Shooting Sequence Chart.
iv. Wave Forms.
v. Voltage Measurements with Charts.
vi. Alignment Procedures.
I. Parts List (include circuit and board designation, part type and
class, power rating, component manufacturer, mechanical part
manufacturer, data specification sheets for special design
components and original manufacturer's part number).
J. Electrical Interconnection Details & Drawings.
K. Schematic and Logic Diagram.
L. Assembly Drawings and a pictorial diagram showing physical
locations and identification of each component or part.
M. The date, serial numbers and revision numbers of equipment covered
by the manuals shall be printed on the front cover of the manuals.
Page | - 37 -
NYS TMES – October 2, 2014
4. The design of all equipment shall incorporate only those pins which
have a pre-designated function as per the connector assignment in the
detailed specification.
SECTION IV OPERATIONAL REQUIREMENTS
1. Indicator Lights and Character Displays
1.1 Indicator lights and character displays are associated with the
processor and auxiliary equipment.
1.2 All Indicators in character displays shall have a cone of visibility
of +/- 45 degrees from an axis perpendicular to the front panel. The
indicator shall be readily visible at a radius of up to 4 ft within
the cone of visibility when the indicator is subjected to 9000 ft-
candles of white light equivalent to bright sunlight) at 45 degrees
to the front panel. The following indicator types are acceptable:
1.2.1 Indicator lights may be light emitting diodes (LEDs) or neons
with a design life of 250,000 hours per bit of information.
1.2.2 Indicator lights may be the commercially available incandescent
type, with a design life of 5000 hours per bit of information.
All incandescent indicator lamps shall be replaceable from the
front of the equipment. Character displays shall be socket
mounted and easily replaceable.
2. Specifications
All contact material shall be silver/cadmium alloy, gold alloy, or gold
plate for dry circuit operation. For contact load level exceeding 20
volts and 1 ampere, contact material shall be cadmium, silver, platinum,
or rhodium plated.
3. Quality Control
Equipment will be tested by the State to all applicable parts of this
specification, and notation will be made of passage or failure. A log
of each and every deficiency will be kept by the State.
Page | - 38 -
NYS TMES – October 2, 2014
SECTION V ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
1. Constancy of Intervals
1.1 All equipment shall be designed so that the length of any timed
period shall be within the maximum allowable timing deviations. As
the applied line voltage varies between 95 and 135 volts, and ambient
temperature within the cabinet housing the equipment varies between
-35"F and +165"F, and the humidity varies between 5 and 95%, this
performance shall include cold and hot starts, and shall be obtained
without the use of any heating or cooling elements.
1.1.1 Humidity - The relative humidity shall not exceed 95 percent
non-condensing over the temperature range of -35 degrees F to
+165 degrees F. Above +115 degrees F, constant absolute humidity
shall be maintained. This will result in the relative humidity
shown below for dynamic testing.
TABLE 1.3: AMBIENT TEMPERATURE VERSUS RELATIVE HUMIDITY AT
BAROMETRIC PRESSURES (29.92 In. Hg.) (NON-CONDENSING)
Ambient Temperature/
Dry Bulb (in degrees
F.)
Relative Humidity
(in percent)
Ambient Temperature/
Wet Bulb (in degrees
F.)
-35.0 to +35 10 -1 to +109
+35 to +115 95 +109
+120 70 +109
+130 50 +109
+140 38 +109
+150 28 +109
+160 21 +109
+165 18 +109
1.1.2 The storage temperature range of all specified equipment shall
be from -49 degrees F to +185 degrees F.
Page | - 39 -
NYS TMES – October 2, 2014
2. Applied Power
2.1 All circuits shall be functionally operational with regard to the
following parameters:
2.1.1 Frequency of 57 to 63 hertz.
2.1.2 Applied voltage of 95 to 135 volts single phase.
2.1.3 Ambient temperature of -35" to +165
" Fahrenheit.
2.1.4 Humidity of 5 to 95% (as per Table-1.3 given in this section).
2.2 All circuits shall commence operation on or before 100 volts as
the applied voltage is brought from 50 to 100 volts at a rate of 2
(+/- 0.5) volts per second.
2.3 All equipment when housed within a Model 330SR Cabinet shall be
unaffected by transient voltages normally experienced on commercial
power lines. Equipment, both normally supplied with the cabinet and
purchased separately from it, will be tested for compliance as
specified in paragraphs 2.3.1 thru 2.3.3
2.3.1 With the equipment under test housed in a Model 330SR Cabinet
with surge protection specified herein, a 25 microfarad
capacitor charged to +\- 2000 volts shall be discharged onto the
AC line of the cabinet at its Main breaker. The capacitor shall
be discharged at the specified voltage, a total of 50 times, at
a rate of once every 10 seconds. The equipment, under test to be
in compliance, will function normally during and after the test.
Applied line voltage for this test shall be 120 +\- 12 VAC.
2.3.2 With the equipment under test housed in a Model 330SR Cabinet
with it surge protectors removed, a transient voltage of +\- 300
volts shall be synchronously applied to the AC line of the
cabinet at its Main breaker. The transient voltage shall be
moved uniformly over the full AC waveform once every second. The
transient voltage may also be applied constantly at any point on
the AC waveform. The transient voltage shall have a peak noise
power of 5 kilowatts with a pulse rise time of 500 ns. The
applied line voltage for this test shall be 120 +\- 12 VAC. The
equipment that is being tested to be in compliance will function
normally during and after the test.
2.3.3 Equipment housed indirectly in the cabinet such as the Model
400 modem, will be housed, when tested, in the equipment that
they are designed to operate in.
Page | - 40 -
NYS TMES – October 2, 2014
2.4 All equipment shall be capable of normal operation following rapid
opening and closing of contacts in series with the applied line
voltage for any number of occurrences.
2.5 All equipment shall be capable of normal operation having been in a
dry cold state when a minimum of 100 volts is applied. A dry cold
state is here defined as having been placed in a state of -35 degrees
Fahrenheit and less than 10% humidity for a period of at least five
(5) hours without applied power.
3. Electrical Connections
Electrical connections to and from all equipment shall be in accordance
with the detailed specification.
3.1 All connectors, with the exception of the Model 210NYR Conflict
Monitor cabinet connector, shall be keyed (molded keys for edge
connectors) to prevent accidental insertion of the wrong connector or
printed circuit card.
3.2 All cable connectors shall have cable hoods or shields and strain
relief clamps.
3.3 Printed circuit card edge connectors shall have bifurcated gold-
plated contacts and shall be keyed to prevent accidental insertion of
the wrong printed circuit card.
3.3.1 The printed circuit connector shall meet or exceed the following:
Operating Voltage: 600 VAC (RMS) at sea level
Current rating: 5 amperes
Insulation resistance: 5000 mega ohms
Contact material: copper alloy plated with 0.00005” of nickel
and 0.000015” or greater of gold on top of
nickel
Contact resistance: 0.006 ohms
3.4 All pin and socket connectors furnished shall utilize the same
contact insertion tool, contact extraction tool and contact crimping
tool.
3.5 Pin and socket contacts shall be beryllium copper construction sub
plated with 0.0.00005” nickel and plated with 0.00003” gold. Pin
diameter shall be 0.062”.
Page | - 41 -
NYS TMES – October 2, 2014
4. Power Supply
4.1 An integral and regulated power supply shall be designed to generate
all DC voltages required for operation of all equipment when
necessary. This power supply shall provide the internal and external
voltage and current requirements for normal operation of the
equipment supplied.
4.2 The maximum DC voltage generated within any and all equipment shall
not exceed 45 volts except when used for indicator displays.
4.3 The primary side of all power supply circuits used within the
equipment supplied shall be fused with an MDL type time delay fuse.
The secondary side of the power supply circuits may be fused with
either MDL or AGC type fuse.
4.4 Transient Voltage Protection shall be added to the inputs and outputs
of all solid-state voltage regulation devices found within the power
supply as shown in Fig-1.2. The devices used shall have
specifications equal to or exceeding the specification of the JEDEC
IN6267-IN6303A series of transient suppressors. The particular device
used for the regulator outputs shall have a maximum breakdown voltage
of no more than 1.5 times the maximum voltage specified for that
supply. The particular device used for the input to the regulator
devices shall have a maximum breakdown voltage of no more than twice
that of the maximum voltage expected at a line voltage of 135 VAC.
Fig-1.2: AC line surge protector for 24V power supply
mov
mov
mov
To
Equipment
Transformer.0.68mf
600vac
Chassis
Ground.
Chassis
Ground.
0.5 ohm 10 watt
Wirewound.
0.5 ohm 10 watt
Wirewound.
+AC
-AC
MOV=V150LA20
Page | - 42 -
NYS TMES – October 2, 2014
5. Cabinet Wiring
All wiring within the cabinet shall be neat and firm and shall be
color coded or have numbered leads and terminals. Insulation parts
and wire insulation shall be of suitable materials and insulated for
a minimum of 600 volts and shall conform to Military Specification,
MIL-W-16878D, Type B or D, Vinyl-Nylon Jacket, or Irradiated
cross-linked polyvinyl chloride, or UL Type THHN. Wire size shall be
no smaller than No. 14 AWG stranded copper conductor, except that
circuits carrying less than 0.25 - amperes shall be No. 26 AWG or
larger stranded copper conductor. The four wires terminating at
connector C1P pins 1, 14, 92 and 104 shall each have a No. 14 AWG
stranded copper conductor.
SECTION VI COMPONENTS
1. Design
No component shall be of such design, fabrication, nomenclature, or
other identification as to preclude the purchase of said component from
any wholesale electronics distributor, or from the component
manufacturer, except as noted.
1.1 Except as noted in paragraph 1.2 below, when integrated circuits are
provided, which are of such special design or programming that they
preclude the off-the-shelf purchase of identical components from any
wholesale electronics distributor or component manufacturer, one (1)
exact duplicate integrated circuit shall be furnished with every
twenty (20) integrated circuits provided.
1.1.1 When address decoding is accomplished using a manufacturer
programmed address decoder a GO/NO-GO means of testing the address
decoder shall be supplied. In addition a written copy of the code
housed within the address decoder shall be provided.
1.1.2 When any MPU is supplied as part of a manufacturers equipment, the
manufacturer shall provide separate diagnostic firmware and a
source listing of the firmware used to run that MPU. This
diagnostic firmware shall continuously run to determine if the MPU
is functioning properly.
1.2 Whenever Model 222/224 Dual/Quad Loop Vehicle Detectors are supplied
which include special integrated circuits as described in paragraph
1.1 above, one (1) exact duplicate integrated circuit shall be
furnished for every twenty (20) integrated circuits provided.
Page | - 43 -
NYS TMES – October 2, 2014
2. Socket Requirements:
2.1 Any electronic component having more than one (1) lead shall not be
socket mounted except as noted in the following paragraph.
2.2 Components classified as CPU shall be mounted in an AMP Type 2-
641606-2 or equal. Components classified as EPROM or NOV RAM shall be
mounted in an AMP Type 2-641605-2 or equal. These sockets shall have
the following minimum features:
Dual leaf gold plated wiping contacts
Anti-stress walls
Large Target area for easy insertion
2.2.1 The socket contact receptacles shall meet or exceed the
following:
Operating Voltage: 600 VAC (RMS) at sea level
Current rating: 0.5 amperes
Insulation resistance: 500 mega ohms
Contact material: Beryllium/copper plated with 0.000030” or
greater of gold
Contact resistance: 0.01 ohms or less
Contacts, when closed, shall grip the smooth, flat side of the IC
legs.
3. All circuits shall be designed for reliability and maximum performance.
Electrolytic capacitors shall not be used when capacitance values are less
than 1.0 microfarad. Components shall be arranged so they are easily
accessible for testing and maintenance.
4. All components, such as resistors, capacitors, diodes, transistors and
integrated circuits, shall be individually replaceable.
5. All components shall be down rated by 20% with regard to applied
voltage and power dissipation so material shortening of life or shift in
values is minimized.
6. Component Design Life
6.1 No component shall be provided where the manufactured date is three
years older than the contract award date.
6.2 The design life of all components, under twenty-four (24) hours a day
operating condition in their circuit application, shall be a minimum
of fifteen (15) years.
Page | - 44 -
NYS TMES – October 2, 2014
7. The circuit reference symbol for each component part shall be clearly
marked.
8. High quality electronic components shall be used.
8.1 The State, at its option, may require the equipment manufacturer to
submit detailed engineering technical data on any component part. A
signed letter from the component manufacturer may be submitted with
the detailed engineering data when the proposed application of the
component alters the technical data. The letter certifies that the
component application meets specification requirements.
9. Capacitors
9.1 The DC and AC voltage ratings as well as the dissipation factor of a
capacitor shall meet the worst case design parameters of the
circuitry.
9.2 The effect of change in capacitance due to environmental changes
shall not cause circuit malfunctions.
9.3 A capacitor which may be damaged by shock or vibration (see Section
XI) shall be supported mechanically by a clamp or fastener.
9.4 The capacitor encasement shall be resistant to cracking, peeling and
discoloration due to humidity and temperature changes.
9.5 Capacitors used shall be of the best quality industrial grade,
available for the application and shall have a design life of at
least fifteen (15) years.
9.6 All capacitors must operate continuously at a temperature of -35 to
+165 degrees Fahrenheit.
9.7 All capacitors shall be insulated and shall be marked with their
capacitance value, working voltage and when applicable indicate
polarity.
10. Potentiometers
10.1 Potentiometers with power ratings of from one (1) to two (2) watts
shall be the commercial equivalent of Military Type RV4.
10.2 Potentiometers (excluding trimmer type potentiometers) of less than
one (1) watt power rating shall not be used.
10.3 The power rating of any potentiometer used shall be at least 100%
Page | - 45 -
NYS TMES – October 2, 2014
greater than the maximum power requirements of the circuit.10.4
Potentiometers used shall be the best quality industrial grade, and
shall have a design life of at least fifteen (15) years.
10.5 Potentiometers used, except those used for the Front Panel
adjustments of the various input modules, shall be 10 turn minimum
type pots.
10.6 All potentiometers used on the Controller Front Panel must be
recessed so that they do not protrude more than 1/8”.
11. Resistors
11.1 Fixed carbon film, deposited carbon, or composition insulated
resistors shall be used conforming to the performance requirements
of MIL-R-11 or MIL-R-22684.
11.1.1 All resistors shall be insulated and shall be marked with their
resistance value. Resistance values may be indicated by the
Electronics Industries Association (EIA) color codes.
11.2 Resistors used shall be of 10% tolerance or less.
11.3 The value of the resistors shall not vary by more than 5% between
the ranges of -35 and +165 degrees Fahrenheit.
11.4 No resistors of a power rating exceeding two (2) watts shall be
used unless special ventilation or heat sinking is provided. When
used, they shall be insulated from the printed circuit.
11.5 Resistors used shall be of the best quality industrial grade, and
shall have a design life of at least fifteen (15) years.
12. Semiconductor Devices
12.1 All power, as well as forward and reverse current and voltage
ratings of semiconductor devices used shall be at least 20% greater
than the actual maximum design requirements of the circuit with
regard to the parameter specified in Section IV-2.
12.2 Semiconductor devices used shall be the best quality industrial
grade, available for the application and shall have a design life of
at least fifteen (15) years.
12.3 The Integrated Circuit manufacturer fan-out rating shall not be
exceeded.
Page | - 46 -
NYS TMES – October 2, 2014
12.4 All solid-state devices shall be of the silicon type, except as
noted in paragraph 12.6 below.
12.5 All transistors, integrated circuits, and diodes, when used, shall
be equal to a standard type listed by EIA (Electronic Industries
Association) and clearly identifiable to this standard.
12.6 Germanium diodes will be permitted only when a low forward voltage
drop is required in logic circuit applications. Justification of
this use must be furnished.
12.7 Pin 1 location of all LSI sockets shall be properly marked on the
board adjacent to the socket.
12.8 Any integrated circuit, except for those specified below, that is
directly connected to the 24 VDC supply of the cabinet shall be
protected from transient surge voltages. Protection devices include,
but are not limited to, devices such as transorbs and zener diodes.
Devices that may be connected to cabinet 24 VDC supply without
protection are:
- Devices designed for isolation purposes such as opto-couplers
- Devices use for voltage regulation
- Devices with open collector outputs that are used as buffers may
have these collectors tied to the 24 VDC line with the proper
current limiting.
13. Transformers and Inductors
13.1 Transformers shall have the manufacturer's part number clearly and
legibly printed on the case or frame. All leads of the transformer
shall be color coded with approved RETMA color code or numbered in a
manner so as to facilitate proper installation.
13.2 All inductors and transformers shall have their windings insulated
and shall be impregnated to exclude moisture. All wire leads shall be
numbered marked, or color coded.
14. Circuit Breaker
Page | - 47 -
NYS TMES – October 2, 2014
14.1 Circuit breakers shall be approved and listed by UL. The trip and
frame size shall be plainly marked. They shall be magnetic type
breakers with their overload trip points unaffected by temperature.
Breakers shall have a short trip delay characteristic unless
otherwise noted in this specification. Contacts shall be silver alloy
and enclosed in an arc-suppressing chamber. Minimum interrupting
capacity shall be 5000 Amperes, RMS.
14.2 Multi-pole circuit breakers shall be the common-trip type
15. Component Grade
It is recommended that all manufacturers consider the use of military
or industrial grade components or component which have been
prescreened to ensure proper operation through the temperature range
of -35 to +165 degrees Fahrenheit.
16. Batteries
The use of batteries to perform any power function shall hereby be
precluded from all designs specified herein, unless encapsulated
within a component such as a Dallas 1228 NOV RAM.
17. Make-and-Break Device
Resistor Capacitor snubber networks shall be placed across the fan
thermostat and all AC relay coils. Diodes shall be placed across all
DC relay coils.
18. Front Panel Mounted Fuses
Fuse holders to be mounted on the exterior of equipment shall be a
low profile type holder.
19. Ribbon Cables
Ribbon connectors may be used between any two (2) boards providing
they have at least 0.1” between pins. These connectors must comply
with Chapter 1 gold plating (Section 5, paragraph 3.3.1) and have
twice the current carrying capability required by the circuit design.
Page | - 48 -
NYS TMES – October 2, 2014
20. Jumpers
Two (2) pin jumpers are required. A slide-on jumper between two adjacent
pins shall complete or bypass the circuit. Pins shall also be required
for each jumper that may need storage during its useful field life.
Page | - 49 -
NYS TMES – October 2, 2014
SECTION VII MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
1. Metal Case
1.1 All equipment shall be enclosed in a sheet metal case with a
protective finish. The case shall be designed to provide convenient
access to the entire interior assembly and permit the removal of
printed circuit boards or modules without the use of special tools.
2. Modular or Printed Circuit Design
2.1 Module or printed circuit assemblies shall incorporate plug-in
techniques, and be easily replaceable. To facilitate
interchangeability a guide or track shall be provided for each
assembly. All assemblies shall be mechanically secured so as to
retain the assemblies in their proper position under conditions of
shock and vibration.
2.2 Assemblies shall be provided with two (2) guides for each plug-in
printed circuit board or associated device except relays. The guides
shall extend to within ¾” from the face of either the socket or
connector.
2.3 Where less than 0.25” lateral separation is provided between the
printed circuit board and any metal surface, a 0.0625” (+/- 0.005”)
plastic cover shall be provided to protect the printed circuit board.
2.4 Each printed circuit board connector shall be chamfered at 30 degrees
from the board side planes. The key slots shall also be chamfered so
that the connector key shall not be extracted upon removal of the
board or jammed upon insertion.
2.5 Each printed circuit board shall be conformal coated with a UV
tracer. This coating shall conform to the configuration of this
object coated, applied on the completed board assembly.
3. Inspection
3.1 An inspection, both physical and visual, shall include mechanical
dimensions and assembly conformance to all parts of this
specification. Workmanship shall be in accordance with the highest
industry standards.
Page | - 50 -
NYS TMES – October 2, 2014
4. Model Numbers
4.1 The manufacturer's model number, serial number, circuit issue or
revision number, and date of shipment (month and year) shall appear
in an easily visible location on all equipment and modules supplied.
4.2 Except for the Model 330SR Cabinet, in addition to any assignment
of model numbers by the manufacturer, model numbers (NYSDOT suggests
a minimum of 4 digits, NYSDOT model number and Manufacturer ID) shall
be displayed on the front panel in bold type, at least 3/8” high.
NYSDOT assigned model numbers are supplied in the Table-1.4.
For the Model 330SR Cabinet, seven (7) digits shall be displayed on
the inside of the front door, at least 3/8” high. The first three (3)
digits are "330SR". Four (4) additional digits can be assigned by the
State or manufacturer at such time as a particular sample is
qualified as acceptable.
4.3 All like items, provided by the manufacturer, shall be
electrically and mechanically interchangeable as to their printed
circuit assembly irrespective of the time of manufacture.
5. Tolerances
5.1 The following tolerances shall be adhered to unless specifically
noted elsewhere in these specifications:
Sheet metal: +/- 0.0525”
PC Board: +0, -0.010”
Edge guides +/- 0.0150”
Page | - 51 -
NYS TMES – October 2, 2014
6. Input Cards
6.1 All input cards designed to be used in the Model 330SR detector
rack (input file) shall be mounted on an edge-connected, printed
circuit board of the following dimensions:
1.1 "
0.475 "
PC
BOARD
0.125 "
6.50 "
6.875 "
DETECTOR
MODULE
SIDE VIEW
NOT TO SCALE
ALL DIMENSIONS ARE (+/-) 0.02 " EXCEPT AS NOTED
0.1 " 0.0625 "
4.5 "3.5 "
Figure-1.3: Model 330SR detector rack (Input card)
6.2 To avoid interference with the detector rack card guides, there
shall be a 0.1” minimum clearance between the entire top and bottom
of the PC board and any protruding hardware such as washers, screws,
Front Panel mounting brackets or circuit components.
Page | - 52 -
NYS TMES – October 2, 2014
TABLE 1.4: MODEL NUMBER ASSIGNMENT TABLE
MODEL DESCRIPTION MODEL NO
NUMBER
200 Solid-State Switch pack
204 Solid-State Flasher
210 Solid-State Monitor
210NYR NY Red Conflict Monitor
215 Solid-State Current Monitor
222 Dual Loop Vehicle Detector Module
232 Dual Magnetic Detector Amplifier Module
242 Dual Isolation Module (DC)
252 Dual Isolation Module (AC)
330 Pole Mounted Cabinet with wiring harness
330R Pole Mounted Red Monitor Cabinet with wiring harness
330SR Pole Mounted Red Monitor Stretch Cabinet with wiring
--------- harness allowing mercury and Solid State switch
2070 68360 Based Controller Unit
2070L 2070 Lite
2070E 2070E
1E 2070E CPU Module
1B 2070L CPU Module (LITE)
2A Field I/O Module
3A 2070 Front Panel Interface
3B 2070 Front Panel Interface
4A 2070-4A Power Supply Unit
6A Modem Card (Async/Modem Serial Comm Module- Baud Rate 300
to 1200)
6B Modem Card (Async/Modem Serial Comm Module-Baud Rate 0 to
9600)
7A 2070 RS-232 Card (EIA-232 Serial Port)
Page | - 53 -
NYS TMES – October 2, 2014
SECTION VIII MAINTENANCE
1. Design
Equipment shall be designed for field maintenance (isolation of
malfunctions to particular modules of printed circuit cards) by non-
engineering personnel working under difficult conditions.
1.1 Isolation of a fault (soft failure) within the microcomputer
system shall take place during normal program cycling. Sequential
self-test of the microcomputer shall take place within normal
programming. These isolation tests shall be used for the diagnosis of
a fault within the following subsystems:
a) Vehicle sensors
b) Communications interface
2. Test Points
Test points shall be provided for monitoring all power supply
voltages. All test points shall be readily accessible when equipment
is opened in service position.
3. Installation and Maintenance
The equipment shall be designed so that it can be easily installed
and maintained. Fault location, accessibility and serviceability
features which will lead to simplified maintenance shall be a prime
consideration. Modules or components which are found to be not
accessible under simulated field maintenance conditions shall be
reason for non-acceptance.
Page | - 54 -
NYS TMES – October 2, 2014
SECTION IX ENGINEERING
1. Human Engineering
To the highest practicable degree, the unit shall be engineered for
simplicity and ease of human operation and maintenance. This shall
include the following specific points:
1.1 No more than two (2) potentiometers may be mounted concentrically.
Knobs for such mountings shall have diameters in a ratio of 2:1 lower
to upper. The lower knob shall have a diameter of at least 1”.
1.2 Tuning knobs shall be of large enough diameter (at least 0.5”
diameter) and of great enough separation (at least 0.5” edge to edge)
to assure ease of adjustment without disturbance of adjacent knobs.
1.3 All fuses shall be easily accessible and shall be replaceable
without the use of any tools.
1.4 Modules shall slide smoothly in their tracks while being inserted
into or removed from the frame and shall fit snugly into the plug-in
printed circuit connectors.
1.4.1 Modules shall require a force of no less than 5 lbs and no
greater than 50lbs for insertion or removal.
2. Design Engineering
The following practices shall be employed in the design of solid-
state equipment circuitry.
2.1 The design shall be inherently temperature compensated to prevent
excessive drifting in the detector circuits or controller timing
circuits (see Section IV Electrical Requirements).
The circuit design shall include such compensation as is necessary to
overcome adverse effects due to temperature in the specified
environmental range.
2.2 For reasons of personal safety, personnel shall be protected from
all potentially dangerous voltages.
Page | -55-
NYS TMES October 2, 2014
2.3 Any component called for the circuit design which has special or
unique characteristics (except temperature variation of value) which
would limit that component to certain manufacturers or suppliers
shall be made available by the bidder, so as to facilitate rapid
field repair of a unit.
3. Generated Noise
No item or subassembly supplied on these specifications shall emit
audible noise greater than 40 db (A).
SECTION X CONSTRUCTION OF PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS
1. Design, Fabrication and Mounting
1.1 All printed circuit solid-state component boards shall incorporate
gold plated connector tabs.
1.2 Printed circuit design shall be such that components shall be removed
and replaced without permanent damage to boards or tracks.
1.3 Fabrication of printed circuit boards shall be in compliance with
MIL-P-13949 (latest revision at time of bid opening) with the
following changes:
1.3.1 Only NEMA G-10 glass cloth base epoxy resin copper clad
laminates 1/16” minimum thickness shall be used. Intercomponent
wiring shall be by laminated copper clad track having a minimum
weight of 2.0 ounces per square ft with an adequate cross-
section for current to be carried. All copper tracks shall be
plated or soldered to provide complete coverage of all exposed
copper track.
1.3.2 Section 3.3.3. of MIL-P-13949 shall read "Pits and Dents. Grade
of pits and dents shall be of Grade B quality (3.3.3.2) or
better.
1.3.3 Section 3.3 of MIL-P-13949 shall be omitted.
1.3.4 Section 3.4 of MIL-P-13949 shall read "Warp or Twist. Class of
permissible warp or twist shall be Class A (Table II) or
better."
Page | -56-
NYS TMES October 2, 2014
1.3.5 Sections 4.2 through 6.6 of MIL-P-13949 (inclusive) shall be
omitted except as referenced in previous sections of this
specification.
1.4 The design and fabrication of Printed Circuit and the mounting of
parts and assemblies thereon shall conform to MIL-STD-275 (latest
revision) except as follows:
1.4.1 All semiconductor devices required to dissipate more than 250
milliwatts or any case temperature that is 52 degrees Fahrenheit
above ambient shall be mounted with spacers or transipads to
prevent direct contact with the printed circuit board.
1.4.2 When completed, all residual flux shall be removed from the
Printed Circuit Board.
1.4.3 The resistance between any two (2) isolated, independent conductor
paths shall be at least 100 mega ohms when a 500 VDC potential is
applied.
1.4.4 Where less than 0.25” lateral separation is provided between the
printed circuit board and any metal surface, a 0.0625” (+/- 0.005”)
thick plastic cover shall be provided to protect the printed
circuit board.
1.5 Printed circuit board connector edge shall be chamfered at 45 degrees
from board side planes. The key slots shall also be chamfered so that
the connector keys shall not be extracted upon removal of board or
jammed upon insertion. The key slots shall be 0.045” (+/-0.005”) for
0.1” spacing and 0.055” (+/-0.005”) for 0.156” spacing.
2. Soldering
2.1 Hand soldering shall comply with the MIL-P-55110.
2.2 Automatic flow soldering shall conform to the following conditions:
a) Constant speed conveyor system.
b) Conveyor speed shall be the optimum to minimize solder peaks or
points which form at component terminals.
c) Temperature control shall be within +/- 10 degree Fahrenheit the
optimum range.
d) The soldering process shall result in the complete coverage of
Page | -57-
NYS TMES October 2, 2014
all copper runs, joints and terminals with solder except that which
is covered by an electroplating process.
e) Wherever clinching is not used, a method of holding the
components in the proper position for the flow process shall be
provided.
f) If exposure to the temperature bath is of such a
time-temperature duration as to come within 80% of any component's
maximum specified time-temperature exposure, that component shall
be hand soldered to the printed circuit board AFTER the flow
process has been completed.
3. Definitions
Definitions for the purpose of this specification shall be taken from
MIL-STD-429 as amended.
4. Board tolerance
Board tolerance shall be +/-0.005”.
SECTION XI NEW YORK STATE YEAR 2000 WARRANTY STANDARD
Definitions
For purposes of this warranty, the following definitions shall apply:
a) “Product’ shall include, without limitation: any piece or
component of equipment, hardware, firmware, middleware, custom
or commercial software, or internal components or subroutines
therein which perform any date/time data recognition function,
calculation, comparing or sequencing. Where such services are
being furnished, e.g. consulting, systems integration, code or
data conversion or data entry, the term ‘Product’ shall include
resulting deliverables.
b) “Vendor’ Product” shall include all Product delivered under this
Agreement by Vendor other than Third Party Product.
c) “Third Party Product” shall include all product manufactured or
Page | -58-
NYS TMES October 2, 2014
developed by a corporate entity independent from Vendor and
provided by Vendor on a non-exclusive licensing or other
distribution agreement with the third party manufacturer. “Third
Party Product” does not include product where Vendor is: a) a
corporate subsidiary or affiliate of the third party
manufacturer/developer; and/or b) the exclusive re-seller or
distributor of product manufactured or developed by said
corporate entity.
Warranty Disclosure
At the time of bid or Product quote, Vendor is required to disclose
the following information in writing to the Authorized User:
a) For Vendor Product and for Products (including, but not limited
to, Vendor and/or Third Party Products and/or Authorized User’s
Installed Product) which have been specified to perform as a
system: Compliance or non-compliance of the Products
individually or as a system with the Warranty Statement set
forth below; and
b) For Third-Party Product Not Specified as Part of a System: Third
Party Manufacturer=s statement of compliance or non-compliance
of any Third Party Product being delivered with Third Party
Manufacturer/Developer=s Year 2000 Warranty. If such Third Party
Product is represented by Third Party Manufacturer/Developer as
compliant with Third Party Manufacturer/Developer’s Year 2000
Warranty. Vendor shall pass through said Third Party Warranty
from the Third Party Manufacturer to the Authorized User but
shall not be liable for the testing or verification of Third
Party=s compliance statement.
Warranty Statement
Year 2000 warranty “compliance” shall be defined in accordance with
the following warranty statement:
Vendor warrants that Product(s) furnished pursuant to this agreement
shall, when used in accordance with the Product documentation, be
able to accurately process date/time data (including, but not limited
to, calculating, comparing, and sequencing) from, into, and between
the twentieth and twenty-first centuries, and the years 1999 and
2000, including leap year calculations. Where a purchase requires
that specific Products must perform as a package or system, this
Page | -59-
NYS TMES October 2, 2014
warranty shall apply to the products as a system.
In the event of any breach of this warranty, Vendor shall restore the
Product to the same level of performance as warranted herein, or
repair or replace the Product with conforming Product so as to
minimize interruption to Authorized User’s ongoing business
processes, time being of the essence, at Vendor’s sole cost and
expense. This warranty does not extend to Authorized User=s errors in
data entry or data conversion.
This warranty shall survive beyond termination or expiration of the
agreement. Nothing in this warranty shall be construed to limit any
rights or remedies otherwise available under this agreement.
SECTION XII BAR-CODING, LABELING and ELECTRONIC DOCUMENTATION
1.0 The following items detailed in this Specification shall be bar-coded:
Model 2070E Controller and all sub-components of the Model 2070E assembly
that are either supplied with the Model 2070E or supplied separately:
Model-4A Power Supply; Model-1E CPU; Model-3B Front Panel Assembly; Model-
2A Field I/O; Models 6A and 6B Modems; and Model 7A Serial Card.
Model 330SR Cabinet and all sub-components of the Cabinet assembly that
are supplied with the model 330SR cabinet : Model 24 VDC Power Supply; and
PDA unit of Cabinet.
Model 210NYR Red Conflict Monitor
Auxiliary Input cabinet
Flasher Cabinet
LED Traffic Signal Modules
Pedestrian LED Countdown Timer
Page | -60-
NYS TMES October 2, 2014
2.0 Bar-coding Requirements.
All equipment, specified in this paragraph shall be bar-coded using
Barcode type 128. Barcodes shall be printed on Simon 15026 or approved
equal quality polyester label where the print on the label and the
adhesion qualities of the label shall be weather, UV and temperature
resistant. Size of the label shall be 0.5 inches wide by 1.75 inch long
minimum. All barcodes printed must be printed entirely on the label,
centered on the label and be completely legible and readable by the all
barcode readers used by NYSDOT. Text of the barcode information shall also
be legibly printed on the label underneath the barcode.
The barcode label shall contain the NYSDOT equipment ID number for each
item of equipment that has a manufacturer’s original serial number.
Information on the barcode shall be separated into the following four
parts and printed on the label in the order shown and without spaces:
Model Number - 2 digits assigned
02 - Assigned to Model 2070L Controller/Chassis
20 –Assigned to Model 2070E Controller/Chassis
4A -Assigned to Model 2070-4A 10A Power supply Unit -
7A - Assigned to Model 2070-7A Communications Module -
6A - Assigned to Model 2070-6A Modem
6B - Assigned to Model 2070-6B Modem
6D - Assigned to Model 2070-6D Fiber Optic Modem
LT - Assigned for VDSL Cu over Ethernet Modem LT-300
NT - Assigned for VDSL Cu over Ethernet Modem NT-300
RP - Assigned for VDSL Cu over Ethernet Modem RP-300
1E - Assigned to Model 2070-1E CPU Module
1B - Assigned to Model 2070-1B CPU Module
2A - Assigned to Model 2070-2A FIO Module
2E - Assigned to Model 2070-2E FIO Module
3B - Assigned to Model 2070-3B Front Panel Module
05 - Assigned to Model 330 Cabinet
09 – Assigned to Model 330S Cabinet
Page | -61-
NYS TMES October 2, 2014
04 - Assigned to Model 215 Current Monitor
07 - Assigned to 24 VDC Power Supply
06 - Assigned to PDA unit of Cabinet
03 - Assigned to Model 210 Conflict Monitor
13 - Assigned to Model 210NYR Red Conflict Monitor
15 - Assigned to 330R Red Monitor Cabinet
25 - Assigned to Auxiliary Cabinet
35 - Assigned to Flasher Cabinet
45 - Assigned to 330SR Red Monitor Stretch Cabinet allowing both ------------- -mercury and solid state switch
55 - Assigned to 330SR Red Monitor Stretch Cabinet allowing only
------------- -mercury switch
R8 - Assigned to 8" (200 mm) Red Ball
G1 - Assigned to 12" (300 mm) Green Ball
G8 - Assigned to 8" (200 mm) Green Ball
Y1 - Assigned to 12" (300 mm) Yellow Ball
Y8 - Assigned to 8" (200 mm) Yellow Ball
RA - Assigned to 12" (300 mm) Red Arrow
R1 - Assigned to 12" (300 mm) Red Ball
GA - Assigned to 12" (300 mm) Green Arrow
YA - Assigned to 12" (300 mm) Yellow Arrow
YG - Assigned to 12" (300 mm) Bi-Modal Arrow
H1 - Assigned to 12'’ X 12" (305 Mm X 305 Mm)
Single Pedestrian–Hand Only
WP - Assigned to 12" X 12" (305 mm X 305 mm) - -
Single Pedestrian-Walking Person Only
CS - Assigned to 12" X 12" (305 mm X 305 mm) -
Bi-Modal Pedestrian
CL - Assigned to 16" X 18" (410 mm X 450 mm) -
Bi-Modal Pedestrian
CT - Assigned to Pedestrian LED Countdown Timer
WM - Assigned to WAN Modem
WS - Assigned to WAN Modem and Switch
Page | -62-
NYS TMES October 2, 2014
SS- Assigned to Serial server
RT - Assigned to Router
BB – Assigned to Battery Backup Systems (BBS)
Manufacturer - 2 digits assigned
See current NYS APL/QPL Manufacturer address (www.nysdot.gov/tmes)for
listing of these Manufacturer codes. These codes are assigned upon Product
Qualification.
Date of Manufacture - 4 digits assigned
First two digits represent Month of Manufacture, and second two digits
represent Year of Manufacture
Serial Number - minimum 6 digits assigned, to maximum 10 digits assigned.
Must be original manufacturer’s serial number from manufacturer’s standard
equipment label, unique to that equipment model manufactured.
An example of the information printed on a barcode label for a Model 2070L
controller/chassis manufactured in June of 2008 with a serial number of
01833567 by a company whose manufacturers= code is XX would be:
02XX060801833567.
Another example of the information printed on the barcode label for a
NYSDOT STANDARD 12"(300mm) Red Ball LED module manufactured in June of
2005 and received by NYSDOT in June of 2006 with a serial number of 000183
by a company whose manufacturers’ code is XX would be R1XX0605000183.
3.0 Samples and Locations of Barcode Labels on Equipment.
Samples of the physical label with barcode information printed on the
label must be submitted to the Traffic Signal Equipment Lab prior to use.
Any subsequent changes of this label must also get approval before use.
Location or placement of the Barcode Labels on the equipment specified in
this paragraph is determined by NYSDOT.
Location and Sample information of Barcode Labels can be obtained from the
Supervisor, NYSDOT Traffic Signal Equipment Lab at 518-783-7746.
Page | -63-
NYS TMES October 2, 2014
4.0 Barcode Labels on Shipping Boxes.
Model 2070E Shipping Box - Barcode labels, identical to the ones placed on
the 2070E controller and its sub-components, shall also be placed on the
outside of the 2070E shipping box. The labels shall be located on the
upper right hand corner on the wide side of the box and placed in a column
in the following order:
Model 2070E Controller/Chassis Barcode Label
Model-4A 10 Amp Power Supply Barcode Label
Model-1E CPU Barcode Label
Model-2A Field I/O Barcode Label
Model-3B Front Panel Assembly
Model 330SR Cabinet Protective Shipping Cover - Barcode labels, identical
to the ones placed on the Cabinet and sub-components of the cabinet shall
also be placed on the outside of the cabinet protective shipping cover.
The barcodes shall be located on the side of the cover that protects the
left side of the cabinet. The barcodes shall be placed in a column in the
following order:
Model 330SR Barcode Label
24 VDC Power Supply Barcode Label
PDA Unit Barcode Label
Model 210NYR Conflict Monitors – Barcode labels, meeting the same
requirements of the labels specified in this section for these items,
shall be placed on the outside of any box that may contain an individual
Conflict Monitor. Barcode labels shall also be placed on all shipping
boxes that contain multiple Monitors. For example, if a shipping box
contains 20 individual monitors, barcode labels for all of the 20 modules
shall be affixed to the outside of the box. The labels shall also be
grouped together so that they can be easily and quickly scanned by a
barcode reader.
LED Traffic Signal Modules & Pedestrian LED Countdown Timer - Barcode
labels, meeting the same requirements of the labels specified in this
section for these items, shall also be placed on the outside of all
Page | -64-
NYS TMES October 2, 2014
shipping boxes. Example: Should the shipping box contain six LED modules,
individual barcode labels for all of the six modules inside the box shall
be affixed to the outside of the box. The labels shall also be grouped
together so that they can be easily and quickly scanned by a barcode
reader.
Auxiliary Input and Flasher Cabinet – Barcode Labels, meeting the same
requirements of the labels specified in this section for these items,
shall be placed on the outside of any shipping box that may contain these
items.
5.0 Electronic Documentation
An electronic file, Excel Spreadsheet, shall be provided for all
deliveries of equipment that are specified in this Section and purchased
by NYSDOT. This electronic file shall be supplied to the NYSDOT Traffic
Signal Equipment Lab. Information on the recipient of this file can be
obtained by contacting the NYS DOT Traffic Signal Equipment Lab at the
phone number listed in this Section.
Individual components not included in a Model 2070E, Model 330SR assembly
and shipped on any NYSDOT Purchase Order shall have the following AField@
format for its spreadsheet:
Field 1 - NYSDOT=s PO Number
Field 2 - Region No. of Region receiving shipment (1 thru 10). For
shipments to the Signal Equipment Lab, these shall be noted as
Lab in the Region No field. Note: Region numbers can usually be
found on the distribution schedule that accompanies each issued
Purchase Order
Field 3 – Assigned 2 Digit Model Number as listed herein
Field 4 - NYSDOT=s Barcode ID number. This number is the AText of the
Barcode Information@ as specified in this paragraph
Units classified as Assemblies, Model 2070E, Model 330SR shipped on any
NYSDOT Purchase Order shall have the following AField@ format for its
spreadsheet:
Model 2070E with Model-4A, Model-1E, Model-3B and Model-2A
Page | -65-
NYS TMES October 2, 2014
Field 1 -NYSDOT=s PO Number
Field 2 -Region No. of Region receiving shipment (1 thru 10). For
shipments to the Signal Equipment Lab, these shall be noted as Lab
in the Region No. field. Note: Region numbers can usually be found
on the distribution schedule that accompanies each issued Purchase
Order
Field 3 -Assigned 2 Digit Model Number as listed herein for the Model
2070E controller/Chassis
Field 4 -NYSDOT=s Barcode ID number for the Model 2070E
Controller/Chassis. This number is the AText of the Barcode
Information@ as specified in this paragraph
Field 5 -Assigned 2 Digit Model Number as listed herein for the Model-4A
10 Amp Power Supply
Field 6 -NYSDOT=s Barcode ID number for the Model-4A 10 Amp Power Supply.
- This number is the AText of the Barcode Information@ as specified
- in this paragraph
Field 7 -Assigned 2 Digit Model Number as listed herein for the Model-2A
FIO unit
Field 8 -NYSDOT=s Barcode ID number for the Model-2A FIO
Field 9 -Assigned 2 Digit Model Number as listed herein for the
Model- 1E CPU
Field 10 -NYSDOT=s Barcode ID number for the Model-1E CPU
Field 11 -Assigned 2 Digit Model Number as listed herein-for the
Model-3B FPA
Field 12 -NYSDOT=s Barcode ID number for the Model-3B FPA
Model 330SR, 24 VDC Power Supply and PDA unit
Field 1 - NYSDOT=s PO Number
Field 2 - Region No. of Region receiving shipment (1 thru 10). For
shipments to the Signal Equipment Lab, these shall be noted as
Lab in the Region No. field. Note: Region numbers can usually be
found on the distribution schedule that accompanies each issued
Purchase Order
Field 3 - Assigned 2 Digit Model Number as listed herein for the Model
Page | -66-
NYS TMES October 2, 2014
- 330SR
Field 4 - NYSDOT=s Barcode ID number for the Model 330R or 330SR Cabinet.
This number is the AText of the Barcode Information@ as
specified in this paragraph
Field 5 - Assigned 2 Digit Model Number as listed herein for the 24 VDC
Power Supply
Field 6 - NYSDOT=s Barcode ID number for the 24 VDC Power Supply
Field 7 - Assigned 2 Digit Model Number as listed herein for the PDA unit
Field 8 - NYSDOT=s Barcode ID number for the PDA unit
NEW YORK STATE DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
TRANSPORTATION MANAGEMENT EQUIPMENT
SPECIFICATIONS (TMES)
Chapter 2
MICROCOMPUTER REQUIREMENTS
Page | -67-
NYS TMES October 2, 2014
CHAPTER 2
Detailed Specifications for Model 2070E Traffic Signal
Controller and Components
This specification defines the requirements of the Model 2070E Traffic
Signal Controller, its individual components and auxiliary modules.
This specification shall supplement the General Technical Requirements
within Chapter 1 for Microcomputer Traffic Signal Control Equipment
and in the case of conflict this detailed specification shall govern.
1. Main Specifications for Model 2070E and Components
1.1 The Model 2070E Traffic Controller is an enhanced version of the
Model 2070L Traffic Controller and includes the following modules: 2070-
1E CPU, 2070-2E FIO, 2070-3B Front Panel Assembly and 2070-4A Power
Supply. Model 2070L’s that were purchased in the past by NYSDOT were
based on Caltrans TEES specifications dated August 16, 2002 and
addenda’s applicable to that specification. The Model 2070L is no
longer supported by current Caltrans Traffic Controller specifications
and it has been superseded by the model 2070E. Following are some of the
differences between the Model 2070E and Model 2070L:
- 2070-1E CPU Module provides for a dedicated Network
switch for improved network performance.
- 2070-1E CPU Module has a larger amount of memory for the
/R2 drive. Increased from the 1 Mbytes specified for
the Model 2070-1B to 2 Mbytes.
Page | -68-
NYS TMES October 2, 2014
- 2070-1E CPU Module provides two RJ-45 Jacks on the Front
Plate.
- 2070-3B Front Panel Assembly with an additional C50J
Jack.
- 2070-2E Field I/O Module - provides serial port LED
indicators for Tx an Rx on its front plate.
1.2 All Model 2070E controllers, its included components listed in
item 1.1 above, and its auxiliary modules: 2070-1C, 2070-6A, 2070-6B,
and 2070-7A modules, built and purchased to this specification shall
adhere to the latest CALTRANS Transportation Electrical Equipment
Specifications (TEES) and all related errata, and to the NYSDOT
additions/exceptions to the TEES specifications defined in this
Chapter.
2. NYSDOT Additions and Exceptions
2.1 Model 2070-2E FIO
Upon power up, the Model 2070-2E FIO firmware shall begin toggling of
the Watchdog Output Pin (Pin 103 of connector C1) On/Off within 0.750
seconds. The firmware shall also turn on all 16 switchpack Red outputs
of the C1 connector within 0.750 seconds. These outputs are listed in
Table 13.1 of the Model 330SR Traffic Signal Cabinet specification
herein. FIO firmware shall continue the toggling of the Watchdog
Output and outputting of the Red outputs until control is turned over
for these outputs by established communications with the user-supplied
software running on the CPU module of the 2070E. The maximum time for
establishing communications and control with user supplied software
shall be 10 seconds. Should communications or control not be
established within this time with the user supplied software, the FIO
firmware shall stop toggling the Watchdog Output and turn off the
switchpack Red outputs
2.2 Model 2070-1E CPU
A file named Startup shall be include on the /f0 directory of the
Model 2070-1E CPU. This file shall include the following text program:
/f0/sys/startspf
ifconfig enet0 10.20.70.51 netmask 0xffffff00 broadcast 10.20.70.255
shell -l <>>>/sp4 &
Page | -69-
NYS TMES October 2, 2014
2.3 Model 2070-3B Front Panel
The display of the Model 2070-3B Front Panel shall be supplied with a
LED backlight.
2.4 Miscellaneous
2.4.1 Model 2070E‘s supplied to this specification shall have the
chassis openings for any unused Motherboard connectors covered with
the appropriate cover plates so that the entire rear of the controller
is covered and closed.
NEW YORK STATE DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
TRANSPORTATION MANAGEMENT EQUIPMENT
SPECIFICATIONS (TMES)
Chapters 3 - 12
PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS
Page | -70-
NYS TMES October 2, 2014
CHAPTER 3 Detailed Specification on Dual Loop Vehicle Detector Modules Model 222
This specification defines the minimum detailed requirements applicable to
dual loop vehicle detector modules. The intent is to set forth the
electrical and mechanical design parameters, the requirements within which
the equipment shall operate, and the means by which the equipment shall be
tested to determine whether it shall so operate. This specification shall
supplement the General Technical Requirements within Chapter 1 for Traffic
Signal Control Equipment, and, in case of conflict, this detailed
specification shall govern.
SECTION I GENERAL DESCRIPTION
1. Vehicle Detector Modules
The dual loop vehicle detector modules are units containing two (2)
detector channels. The modules shall be compatible with and mate to the
cabinet input files. The detector channels working independently will
produce output signals when vehicles pass over or remain within wire loops
embedded in the roadway.
The vehicle detector module is of purely solid-state design. The method of
detection shall be based upon a design philosophy that shall render
reliable detection when a conductive metallic mass entering a loop causes
a 0.01% or greater change in detector input inductance.
Page | -71-
NYS TMES October 2, 2014
SECTION II FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS
1. Operational Specifications
1.1 Each detector channel shall be capable of detecting all types of
licensed motor vehicles except mopeds at a distance of up to 800 feet
from the loop to the detector module.
1.2 The detector module shall be mounted on an edge-connected,
printed circuit board of the following dimensions (see Fig – 3.1
below):
1.2.1 To avoid interference with the detector rack card guides,
there shall be a 0.1” minimum clearance between the entire top
and bottom of the PC board and any protruding hardware such as
washers, screws, Front Panel mounting brackets or circuit
components.
Fig – 3.1 : Detector Module dimensions
1.12" 0.47"
PC
BOARD
0.125" MAXIMUM
6.50"
6.875"
DETECTOR
MODULE
SIDE VIEW
NOT TO SCALE
ALL DIMENSIONS ARE (+/-) 0.02" EXCEPT AS NOTED
0.10"
0.062"
4.5"3.56"
1.5" Maximum"
Page | -72-
NYS TMES October 2, 2014
1.3 Each detector channel shall not draw more than 100 milliamperes
from the +24 VDC cabinet power supply for its operating power.
1.4 The detector module front panel shall be provided with a hand
pull to facilitate insertion and removal from the input file.
1.5 Each detector channel shall have a front panel-mounted indicator
to provide visual indication of each vehicle detection.
1.6 Detector tuning may be automatic, self-tuning. Only front panel
controls shall be used in the manual tuning operation.
1.7 The detectors shall be capable of operating in compliance with
all performance requirements herein specified when connected to an
inductance (loop plus lead-in) of from 50 to 1000 microhenrys with a
Q-parameter as low as five (5) at the detector operating frequency.
Each detector shall be capable of providing reliable detection
information when connected to loops which are shorted or leaky to
ground.
1.8 Each detector channel output shall be an Opto-isolated NPN open
collector capable of sinking 50 milliamperes at 30 volts. This output
shall be compatible with the controller unit inputs (see Chapter 2).
Each output line shall have blocking diodes installed to prevent the
sensor unit from "sourcing" power into the controller inputs.
1.9 Loop inputs to each channel shall be transformer isolated.
2. Tuning
The vehicle detector circuits shall be so designed that drift which occurs
with regard to the environment and applied power shall not cause an
actuation.
3. Mode Selection Requirements
3.1 Each detector channel shall have two selectable modes of
detection - Pulse and Presence.
3.2 Pulse Mode
3.2.1 In pulse mode, each new vehicle presence within the zone of
detection shall initiate a detector channel output pulse of 125
(+/- 25) milliseconds in duration.
Page | -73-
NYS TMES October 2, 2014
3.2.2 Should a vehicle remain in a portion of the zone of detection
for a period in excess of two seconds, the detector channel shall
automatically "tune out" the presence of said vehicle. The channel
shall then be capable of detection of another vehicle entering the
same zone of detection. This response time between the first
vehicle pulse and channel capability to detect another vehicle
shall be three (3) seconds maximum.
3.3 Presence Mode
3.3.1 In presence mode, the detector channel shall recover to
normal sensitivity within one (1) second after termination of
vehicle presence in the zone of detection regardless of the
duration of the presence.
3.3.2 With the detector channel in its most sensitive setting, the
presence of a vehicle in the zone of detection shall be detected a
minimum of three (3) minutes for a vehicle causing 0.02 percent
inductance change and a minimum of ten (10) minutes for a vehicle
causing 0.60 percent inductance change.
3.3.3 The detector channel in the lowest sensitivity setting (OCC)
shall indicate the continuous presence for four (4) minutes minimum
of a vehicle causing 1% or more inductance change.
4. Sensitivity
4.1 Each detector channel shall be equipped with panel selectable
sensitivity setting(s) in both presence and pulse modes to
accomplish the following under operational and environmental
requirements of this specification:
4.1.1 Each detector channel shall respond to an inductance change
of 0.02% while connected to the following three turn loop
configurations.
(1)Single 6 feet by 6 feet loop with 50 feet lead in
(2)Single 6 feet by 6 feet loop with 800 feet lead in
(3)Four 6 feet by 6 feet loops connected in series/parallel
with 250 feet lead in
(4)Four 6 feet by 6 feet loops connected in series with
800 feet lead in
4.1.2 Shall respond to Occupancy (OCC) setting(s) to a nominal
change in inductance between 0.15% to 0.4% while connected to the
above loop configurations. This setting shall not respond to an
Page | -74-
NYS TMES October 2, 2014
inductance change of less than 0.1%.
4.2 The detector channel shall not detect vehicles, moving or stopped
at distances 3 feet or more from any loop perimeter.
4.3 All sensitivity settings shall not differ more than +/- 40% from
the nominal value chosen.
4.4 A minimum of seven sensitivity settings (not including
"off") shall be provided for each channel.
5. Response Timing
5.1 Response time of the detector channel for the OCC setting shall
be less than 20 milliseconds. That is, for any negative inductive
change which exceeds its sensitivity threshold, the channel shall
output a ground true logic level within 20 milliseconds. When such
change is removed, the output shall become an open circuit within 20
milliseconds. For test purposes, the negative change of inductance
will be maintained for a minimum of 100 milliseconds and a maximum of
600 milliseconds after it is applied. When the difference between the
length of time the inductance change is applied, and the
corresponding ground true output time are averaged over ten (10)
trials, the value that average difference shall not exceed 10
milliseconds.
5.2 The response time of the detector channel for the most sensitive
setting shall be less than 250 milliseconds for a 1.0% inductance
change.
SECTION III ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
1. Application of power
1.1 The detector channels shall begin normal operation within thirty
(30) seconds after the application of power or the reset signal.
2. Interference
2.1 The separate channels contained within a given module shall
include means to prevent cross-talk with one another.
Page | -75-
NYS TMES October 2, 2014
2.2 Each module shall include means to prevent cross-talk with other
modules. If the prevent means is manual the control for it shall be
located on the front panel of the unit. No additional external wiring
shall be required to implement the prevent means.
3. Lightning Protection
Lightning protection shall be installed across all input pairs of the
detector/input card. The protection shall be designed to enable the
device to withstand a 10mF capacitor, charged to +/- 1000 VDC, being
placed, for a period of one (1) second, directly across the input pins
or between either input pin and Chassis Ground of the detector/input
card with no load present.
4. Tracking Rate
4.1 The detector shall be capable of compensating or tracking for an
environmental change up to 1 x 10% change in inductance per second.
This requirement must be met within two (2) hours after initial
application of operating power.
5. Tracking Range
5.1 The detector shall be capable of normal operation as the input
inductance is changed +/- 5.0% from the quiescent tuning point
regardless of internal circuit drift.
5.2 The detector shall be capable of normal operation as the input
resistance is changed +/- 0.5% from the quiescent tuning point
regardless of internal circuit drift.
6. Temperature Change. 6.1 The operation of the detector module shall not be affected by
changes in the inductance of the loop caused by environmental changes
with the rate of temperature change not exceeding 1 1/2 degrees
Fahrenheit per three (3) minutes. The opening or closing of the
controller cabinet door with a differential temperature of 30 degrees
Fahrenheit between the inside and outside shall not affect the proper
operation of the detector.
7. Board Edge Connector Pin Assignment
PIN FUNCTION PIN FUNCTION PIN FUNCTION
A DC Ground J Loop #2 Input S NA
B +24 VDC K Loop #2 Input T NA
Page | -76-
NYS TMES October 2, 2014
C Detector Reset L Chassis Ground U NA
D Loop #1 Input M AC- V NA
E Loop #1 Input N AC+ W Loop #2 Output(C)
F Loop #1 Output(C) P NA X Loop #2 Output(E)
H Loop #1 Output(E) R NA Y NA
Z NA
__ = Slotted for Keying
(C) = Collector
(E) = Emitter
NA = Not Assigned
8. Reset
8.1 The detector module shall respond to a ground reset signal of 15
microseconds and begin normal operation within thirty (30) seconds after
the reset command.
CHAPTER 4 Detailed Specification on Magnetic Detector Probe Model 231 and Dual Magnetic Detector Amplifier Modules Model 232
This specification defines the minimum detailed requirements applicable to
magnetic detector amplifier probes and to dual magnetic detector amplifier
modules. The intent is to set forth the requirements within which the
equipment shall operate, and the means by which the equipment shall be
tested to determine whether it shall so operate. This specification shall
supplement the General Technical Requirements with Chapter 1 for
Microcomputer Traffic Signal Control Equipment, and, in case of conflicts,
this detailed specification shall govern.
Page | -77-
NYS TMES October 2, 2014
SECTION I GENERAL DESCRIPTION
1. Design
The dual magnetic detector modules are units that contain two (2) magnetic
detector channels, which plug into the rack enclosure. The detectors,
working independently, while associated with their magnetic detector
probe, will produce signals when vehicles pass over the magnetic detector
probe embedded in the roadway.
The magnetic detector module is of purely solid-state design. The method
of detection shall be based upon a design philosophy that shall render
reliable detection when any licensed vehicle enters the field of the
probe.
SECTION II FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS
1. Magnetic detector amplifier requirements (Model 232)
1.1 The magnetic detector module shall be mounted on an
edge-connected printed circuit board whose dimensions are the same as
those found within the dual loop vehicle detector module.
1.1.1 The magnetic detector module shall be directly
interchangeable with a loop detector module (magnetic probe must be
used with magnetic detector module).
1.2 Each magnetic detector channel shall not draw more than 60
milliamps from the +24 VDC supply for its operating power.
1.3 The detector module front panel shall be provided with a hand
pull to facilitate insertion and removal from the rack enclosure.
1.4 Each detector channel shall have a front panel mounted indicator
to provide visual indication of each vehicle detection.
1.5 All controls required for tuning, including sensitivity shall be
readily adjustable and front panel mounted.
1.6 The detector modules shall be capable of operating in compliance
with all performance requirements herein specified. When connected to
a magnetic detector probe with 1000 feet of lead-in cable, they shall
detect a 'Honda 100' passing within 18” of the sensing element
installed 18” below the top of the pavement at all speeds between 3
Page | -78-
NYS TMES October 2, 2014
and 80 miles per hour.
1.7 Each detector channel output shall be an NPN open collector
capable of sinking 50 milliamperes at 30 volts. The output shall be
compatible with the inputs for the processor specification. Each
output shall have blocking diodes installed to prevent the sensor
unit from sourcing power into the processor input. The output shall
indicate the passage of a vehicle by saturating the NPN transistor or
optical isolator, with no more than 0.6 VDC across the output
circuit. It shall remain saturated for no less than 100 nor more than
150 milliseconds.
1.8 The magnetic detector amplifier module shall:
a) Operate with substantially no change in gain or frequency
response within a range of 10% (+/-) from rated power line
voltage
b) Operate on a single cycle of 0.10 hertz sine wave with an
amplitude of 5 millivolts
c) Operate on a single cycle of a sine wave between 0.25 hertz
and 1.0 hertz inclusive with an amplitude of 2 millivolts
d) Not operate with a sinusoidal 60 hertz wave applied to the
input having an amplitude of 1.0 volt
e) Not give multiple pulses of output from single input voltage
cycles
1.9 A momentary switch shall be provided to place a call on each
channel on an individual basis
1.10 Lightning protection shall be installed across all input pairs
of the detector/input card. The protection shall be designed to
enable the device to withstand a 10mF capacitor, charged to +/- 1000
VDC, being placed, for a period of one (1) second, directly across
the input pins or between either input pin and Chassis Ground of the
detector/input card with no load present.
1.11 The magnetic detector amplifier shall include a switch to allow
the user to set a minimum of four timed periods between 0.25 and 2.0
seconds following an output pulse during which the ability to issue
subsequent output pulses would be inhibited. The purpose of this
switch is to eliminate the issuance of multiple calls from one
vehicle.
Page | -79-
NYS TMES October 2, 2014
The switch shall be marked over a range of 0 to 3 3/4 seconds in 1/4
second increments. A separate switch shall be provided for each
channel and shall be located on the amplifier printed circuit board.
The switch shall be prominently labeled as to its function, channel
and timing settings.
2. Magnetic detector probe requirements (Model 231)
2.1 Each magnetic detector probe shall be designed for installation
in a 3” PVC conduit. The bottom of the conduit shall be placed 18”
below the top of the pavement.
2.2 The case of the probe shall be constructed of nonferrous material
suitable for use in the environment in which it will operate and
shall be sealed to prevent the entrance of moisture. No moving parts
or active components, i.e. transistors, shall be contained in the
probe.
2.3 Each probe shall be designed for ease of installation,
repositioning and removal. It shall be no larger than 2.25” in
diameter and shall have no sharp edges along its length. The overall
length shall not exceed 18”.
2.4 Each probe shall be supplied with a minimum of 75 feet of two
conductor PVC jacketed cable. The conductors shall consist of 18 AWG
stranded, PVC coated wire rated at 300 V. The cable shall be designed
for operating over a temperature range of -4 degrees through 180
degrees Fahrenheit.
2.5 The passage of a 'Honda 100' motorcycle within 75 feet of the
sensing element, at speeds from 3 to 80 miless per hour, shall
provide a sufficient signal to operate a Model 232 amplifier with
1000 feet of lead-in cable between the amplifier and the sensing
element.
2.6 The magnetic detector probe shall be moisture proof and capable
of withstanding exposure to high concentrations of salt in water and
earth without degradation of leakage resistance. Leakage resistance
shall be a minimum of 10 megohms when tested with a 400 VDC between
lead wires and the fluid of a salt water bath after the unit,
including lead wire entrance, has been entirely immersed in the salt
water for a period of twenty-four (24) hours.
Page | -80-
NYS TMES October 2, 2014
SECTION III CONNECTOR REQUIREMENTS
1. The Printed Circuit Board Edge Connector shall mate with the Cabinet Input Files as called out under Chapter 3 and Chapter 13.
2. Connector Pin Assignments are as follows:
PIN FUNCTION PIN FUNCTION
A DC Ground N 115V AC+
B +24 VDC P NA
C NC R NA
D Detector #1 Probe S NA
E Detector #1 Probe T NA
F Detector #1 Output (C) U NA
H Detector #1 Output (E) V NA
J Detector #2 Probe W Detector #2 Output(C)
K Detector #2 Probe X Detector #2 Output(E)
L Chassis Ground Y NA
M AC- Z NA
__ = Slotted For Keying
(C) = Collector
(E) = Emitter
NA = Not Assigned
Page | -81-
NYS TMES October 2, 2014
CHAPTER 5 Detailed Specification on DC Dual Isolation Modules Model 242
This specification defines the minimum detailed requirements applicable to
dual isolation modules. The intent is to set forth the electrical and
mechanical design parameters, the requirements within which the equipment
shall operate, and the means by which the equipment shall be tested to
determine whether it shall so operate. This specification shall supplement
the General Technical Requirements within Chapter 1 for Microcomputer
Traffic Signal Control Equipment, and in case of conflict, this detailed
specification shall govern.
SECTION I GENERAL DESCRIPTION
1. Design
The dual isolation modules are units which contain two (2) isolation
channels, which plug into the detector rack. Each isolation channel,
working independently, shall provide isolation between electrical contacts
external to the module (pedestrian push-buttons, preemption, etc.) and the
microcomputer input.
The isolation module is of purely solid-state design. The method of
isolation shall be based upon a design philosophy which shall render
reliable operation.
Page | -82-
NYS TMES October 2, 2014
SECTION II FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS
1. Operational Specifications
1.1 The isolation module shall be mounted on an edge-connected
printed circuit board (see Chapter 3 Fig-3.1 for dimensions).
1.2 Each isolation channel shall not draw more than 400 milliamperes
from the 24 VDC cabinet supply for its operating power.
1.3 The isolation module front panel shall be provided with a
hand-pull to facilitate insertion and removal from the rack
enclosure.
1.4 The isolation channel shall have a front panel mounted indicator
to provide visual indication of each electrical contact closure and a
test switch to place an input to the isolation channel. Both
indicator and switch shall be on the input side of the optical
coupler. Test switch shall be a single pole-double throw, three (3)
position switch; momentary ON, OFF and one (1) maintained ON
positions. The contacts shall be either silver or coin silver with
gold over nickel plate rated for 5 ampere at 115 VAC.
1.5 Each isolation channel output shall be an opto-isolated NPN open
collector capable of sinking 50 milliamperes at 30 volts. This output
shall be compatible with the Model 2070 Controller Unit (see Chapter
2s). Each isolation channel shall present ground true logic to the
Controller Unit inputs.
1.6 Front panel of module shall be labeled as to model number and
titled "DC DUAL ISOLATION MODULE".
2. Rack Enclosure
2.1 See Chapter 3 and Chapter 13, for details on Detector Rack
Enclosure wiring.
Page | -83-
NYS TMES October 2, 2014
SECTION III ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
1. Electrical input interface
1.1 Each isolation channel input shall be turned on (true) when the
resulting contact closure causes an input voltage less than 8 VDC, and
shall be turned off (false) when the resulting contact opening causes
the input voltage to exceed 12 VDC. Each input shall deliver no less
than 15 nor more than 20 milliamperes to an electrical contact closure
or short from the internal 24 volt supply.
2. Isolation
2.1 The minimum isolation shall be 1 billion ohms and 2500 VDC from
input to output.
3. Lightning Protection
Lightning Protection shall be installed across all input pairs of the
detector/input card. The protection shall be designed to enable the
device to withstand a 10mF capacitor, charged to +/- 1000 VDC, being
placed, for a period of one (1) second, directly across the input pins
or between either input pin and Chassis Ground of the detector/input
card with no load present.
4. Board Edge Connector Pin Assignment
PIN FUNCTION PIN FUNCTION
A DC Ground M --
_B + 24 VDC N --
C -- P NA
D Input #1 R --
E -- S NA
F Output #1 (C) T NA
H Output #1 (E) U NA
J Input #2 V --
K -- W Output #2 (C)
L Chassis Gnd X Output #2 (E)
Y NA
Z NA
-- = Slotted For Keying
(C) = Collector, (E) = Emitter , NA = Not Assigned
Page | -84-
NYS TMES October 2, 2014
CHAPTER 6 Detailed Specification on Dual AC Isolation Modules Model 252
This specification defines the minimum detailed requirements
applicable to dual AC Isolation Modules. The intent is to set forth
the electrical and mechanical design parameters, the requirements
within which the equipment shall operate, and the means by which the
equipment shall be tested to determine whether it shall so operate.
This specification shall supplement the General Technical
Requirements within Chapter 1 for Microcomputer Traffic Signal
Control Equipment, and in the case of conflict, this detailed
specification shall govern.
SECTION I GENERAL DESCRIPTION
1. Design
The dual AC Isolation Module is a unit that contains two (2) isolation
channels, which plug into the detector rack (see Chapter 5). Each
isolation channel, working independently, shall provide isolation
between 120 VAC input circuits and the microcomputer input.
2.Isolation Module
The isolation module is of purely solid-state design. The method of
isolation shall be based on a design philosophy that shall render
reliable operation.
Page | -85-
NYS TMES October 2, 2014
SECTION II FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS
1. Operational Specifications
1.1 The isolation module shall be mounted on an edge-connected
printed circuit board. (See Chapter 13 Fig-3.13 for dimensions).
1.2 Each isolation channel shall not draw more than 2.5 watts of
power from the 24 VDC cabinet supply.
1.3 The isolation module front panel shall be provided with a hand
pull to facilitate insertion and removal from the input rack
enclosure.
1.4 Each isolation channel shall have a front panel-mounted indicator
to provide visual indication of an output to the controller unit, and
a test switch to simulate a valid input. The test switch shall be a
single pole-double throw, three-position switch; momentary ON, OFF
and maintained ON positions. The contacts shall be either silver or
coin silver with gold over nickel plate rated for 5 amperes at 120
VAC.
1.5 Each isolation channel output shall be an opto-isolated NPN open
collector capable of sinking 50 milliamperes at 30 volts. This output
shall be compatible with the Traffic Controller Unit. Each isolation
channel shall present ground true logic to the controller unit
inputs. A switch to invert each isolation channel logic to a ground
false logic shall be provided on the printed circuit card.
1.6 Front panel of the isolator unit shall be labeled as to the model
number and titled "AC ISOLATION MODULE".
1.7 A valid input to the isolation channel shall cause a channel
output of 100 (+/- 50) milliseconds minimum duration. The channel
shall reset within 100 (+/- 50) milliseconds after the input signal
decays below the valid input level or the opening of the test switch.
Page | -86-
NYS TMES October 2, 2014
SECTION III ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
1. Electrical Input Interface
1.1 Each isolation channel input shall be capable of accepting input
voltages of up to 135 VAC.
1.2 Each isolation channel input shall have a turn on (true) voltage
of 80 (+/- 5) VAC. If a voltage equal to or greater than the turn on
voltage is applied to the channel input, the isolation module will
present a ground at its output 100 (+/- 50) milliseconds after this
voltage was applied.
1.3 Each isolation channel input shall be designed so that for all
voltages less than 75 VAC, the isolation module will be turned off
(false). Upon application of an AC voltage to turn the device off,
the output of the device will remain turned on for a period of 100
(+/- 50) milliseconds before turning off.
1.4 The input impedance of each input shall not be less than 6000
ohms nor greater than 15,000 ohms at 60 hertz.
2. Isolation
2.1 The minimum isolation shall be 1000 megohms between the input and
output terminals at 500 VAC applied voltage.
3. Board Edge Connector Pin Assignment
PIN FUNCTION PIN FUNCTION PIN FUNCTION
A DC Ground J Input #2 S NA
B +24 VDC K Input #2 Common T NA
C NA L CHASSIS Gnd U NA
D Input #1 M AC- V NA
E Input #1 Common N AC+ W Output #2(C)
F Output #1 (C) P NA X Output #2(C)
H Output #1 (E) R NA Y Output #2(E)
Z NA
Page | -87-
NYS TMES October 2, 2014
__ = Slotted for Keying
(C) = Collector
(E) = Emitter
NA = Not Assigned
4. Lightning Protection
Lightning Protection shall be installed across all input pairs of the
detector/input card. The protection shall be designed to enable the
device to withstand a 10mF capacitor, charged to +/- 1000 VDC, being
placed, for a period of one (1) second, directly across the input pins
or between either input pin and Chassis Ground of the detector/input
card with no load present.
CHAPTER 7 Detailed Specification on Solid State Flasher Relay and Solid State Switch Model 204
This specification defines the minimum detailed requirements
applicable to solid-state Flasher Relays. The intent is to set forth
the electrical and mechanical design parameters, the requirements
within which the equipment shall operate, and the means by which the
equipment shall be tested to determine whether it shall so operate.
This specification shall supplement the General Technical
Requirements within Chapter 1 for Microcomputer Traffic Signal
Control Equipment, and in case of conflict, the detailed
specification shall govern.
Page | -88-
NYS TMES October 2, 2014
SECTION I GENERAL DESCRIPTION
1. Design
A solid-state Flasher Relay is a plug-in device containing a flasher
control circuit and two switches of solid-state design. This shall be
used for alternate opening and closing connections between the applied
power and the lamps required for flashing operation.
SECTION II FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS
1. Capabilities
1.1 The solid-state Flasher Relay shall be supplied as required with
each wiring harness.
1.2 The Model 204 shall have an internal power supply for logic and
control.
1.3 The unit shall commence flashing operation when AC power is
applied to the input terminals.
1.4 The Flasher Relay shall provide fifty (50) to sixty (60) flashes
per minute with a 50% duty cycle.
1.5 There shall be a Cinch-Jones connector, Type #P-406-SB on the
relay, an AC plus, an AC common, a flasher output #1, a flasher
output #2, a signal ground and a chassis ground.
1.6 The flasher shall be capable of operating as a single or dual
flasher.
Page | -89-
NYS TMES October 2, 2014
SECTION III
ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
1. Requirements
1.1 The solid-state Flasher Relay shall draw all of its power from
the input AC Line and internal circuitry shall be run from this
source through a suitable power supply internal to the unit.
1.2 The solid-state output switch of the unit shall have an off state
dv/dt rating of 200 volts per microsecond or better.
1.3 The output switch shall be capable of withstanding a peak inverse
voltage of 500 volts.
1.4 Each output switch shall be capable of switching any current from
0.2 to 15 amperes of tungsten lamp load at 120 volts, 60 hertz, or 15
amperes at a power factor of 0.85.
1.5 Each output switch shall turn on within +/- 5 degrees of the zero
voltage point of the AC sinusoidal line, and shall turn off within
+/- 5 degrees of the zero current point of the alternating current
sinusoidal line. The zero voltage turn on may be within +/- 10
degrees of the zero voltage point only during the first half cycle of
line voltage during which an input control signal is applied.
1.6 The output switches shall have a mean time between failure of 30
million operations or greater when switching a tungsten filament load
of 2000 watts, 1000 watts per switch.
1.7 The output switches shall have a one (1) cycle surge rating of
175 amperes RMS or 247.5 amperes peak and a one (1) second surge
rating of 40 amperes RMS.
1.8 The output switches shall have isolation between input and output
of 2000 VDC or better and 10,000 million ohms DC. The unit shall also
have 50 million ohms DC resistance from output to ground.
1.9 There shall be mounted on the flasher unit a visual indication to
indicate when each output is on and off.
Page | -90-
NYS TMES October 2, 2014
1.10 A MOV, Harris V150LA20B or equal shall be provided between +AC
(pin 11) and Flashing Out (pins 7 & 8).
Recurrent peak voltage 212 volts
Energy rating maximum 20 joules
Power dissipation, average 0.85 watts
Peak current for pulses 2000 amperes less than
6 6 microseconds
Stand by current less than 1 milliamp
1.11 All printed circuit boards used in the Flasher Assembly shall be
covered with a waterproof/dielectric coating or encapsulated in a
potting compound suitable for use with electronic components.
1.12 The impedance of the switch in the off state shall be a minimum
of 15,000 ohms at 60 hertz.
1.13 To improve the thermal conductivity of the Flasher Assembly, a
thermally conductive substance, such as heat sink compound, shall be
applied between all surfaces that are used as a heat sink.
SECTION IV MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
1. Dimensions
The overall dimensions of the solid-state Flasher Relay shall comply
with the following drawing (Fig-7.1)
Page | -91-
NYS TMES October 2, 2014
Fig 7.1-Solid State Flasher relay Dimensions
2. Dimensions
The flasher shall be so constructed that its lower surface will be 2.1
inch to 2.05 inch below the centerline and that no part will extend more
than 0.85 inch to the left and 1.05 inch to the right of the centerline
of the connector configuration.
3. Assembly
All electrical parts of the Flasher Assembly shall be enclosed and
protected against physical damage by either a dust resistant metal
enclosure or a suitable potting compound.
4. Caution
When the unit is in place, no electrically energized parts will be
exposed, thereby preventing shock hazards.
7.375"
4.2"
1.9"
ALL DIMENSIONS ARE MAXIMUMS
Page | -92-
NYS TMES October 2, 2014
5. Handle or Gripping Device
A handle or gripping device shall be provided on the front panel of the
Flasher Unit.
SECTION V CONNECTOR
1. Electrical Connections
All electrical connections into and out of the solid-state Flasher Relay
shall be through a multi-terminal connector, Cinch-Jones type #P-406-SB
or equal. The connector shall be rigidly fixed to the rear or base of
the flash relay.
2.Mate
The solid state Flasher Relay shall mate with a Cinch Jones type #S 406
SB or equal socket as follow ( Fig-7.2)
PIN NO. CIRCUIT
7
8
9
10
11
12
LOAD CKT #1
LOAD CKT #2
CHASSIS GND
AC COMMON
+AC
NOT CONNECTED
8
10
12
7
9
11
Fig – 7.2 Front View of Flasher Mating Socket
Page | - 93 -
NYS TMES – October 2, 2014
CHAPTER 8 Detailed Specification on Solid State Switch Model 200
This specification defines the minimum detailed requirements
applicable to solid-state switch. The intent is to set forth the
electrical and mechanical design parameters of the modules and
their rack enclosures, the requirements within which the equipment
shall operate, and the means by which the equipment shall be
tested to determine whether it shall so operate. This
specification shall supplement the General Technical Requirements
within Chapter 1 for Microcomputer Traffic Signal Control
Equipment and in case of conflict the Detailed Specification shall
govern.
SECTION I SOLID-STATE SWITCH PACK (MODEL 200)
1. Description
A solid-state switch pack is an assembly containing three channels
of solid-state switch outputs with each output controlled by a DC
voltage input. The switch outputs are used for opening and closing
connections between applied power and the traffic signals. Both
vehicle and pedestrian traffic signals are controlled.
1.1 Each channel shall be designed so that the switch output
shall be on when an input voltage of between 16 and 26 VDC is
applied to the input terminals of that channel (i.e.. pins 6
and 9 for the Red channel). The switch output shall be off when
a voltage of between 0 and 6 VDC is applied.
Page | - 94 -
NYS TMES – October 2, 2014
1.2 Each channel's switch output shall have the following
characteristics
1.2.1 Each switch shall have a minimum capability of switching
any current from 0.05 to 10 amperes of tungsten lamp load at
120 volts, 60 hertz, or 10 amperes at a power factor of 0.85.
1.2.2 Each switch shall not draw more than 20 milliamps DC when
an input of between 16 and 26 volts is applied across the input
terminals. Each switch shall turn on within +/- 5 degrees of
the zero voltage point of the AC wave-form. However, after a
power restoration the zero voltage turn-on may be within +/- 10
degrees of the zero voltage point only during the first half-
cycle of line voltage during which an input signal is applied.
Each switch shall turn off within +/- 5 degrees of the zero
current point of the AC wave-form. Both the turning on and off
of the switch shall occur within 8.33 ms following application
of the proper input levels to do either.
1.2.3 Each switch shall have a mean time between failure of 30
million operations or greater while switching a tungsten
filament load of 1000 watts. Each switch shall have a one (1)
cycle surge rating of 175 amperes RMS (247.5 amperes peak) and
a one (1) second surge rating of 40 amperes RMS.
1.2.4 Each switch shall have isolation between input and output
of 2000 VDC, or better, and 10,000 million ohms DC.
1.2.5 The input circuit of each switch shall have reverse
polarity protection.
1.2.6 Each switch shall have an off state dv/dt rating of 100
volts per microsecond. Each switch shall be capable of
withstanding a peak inverse voltage of 500 volts.
1.2.7 The output of each switch, when open, shall be 15,000
ohms. minimum "at 60 Hertz".
1.3 Both the turning on and off of the switch output shall
occur within 8.3 msec. following application of the proper
input levels to do either.
2. Dimensions
The overall physical dimensions of the switch pack case shall be 7
3/8” +/- 1/8” from the panel surface holding the mating connector
to the front of the switch pack. The switch pack shall be no wider
than 1.90” and no higher than 4.20” . The switch pack shall be
provided with a connector Cinch-Jones, type #P2412-SB or
Page | - 95 -
NYS TMES – October 2, 2014
equivalent and mate with Cinch-Jones, type #S2412-SB or
equivalent.
2.1 All electrical parts of the switch pack shall be enclosed
and protected against physical damage by either a dust
resistant metal enclosure or a potting compound suitable for
use with electronic components.
3. Indicator Lights
The front panel of the module assembly shall be provided with
three (3) indicator lights to indicate the exercise of controller
circuits "Red, Yellow, and/or Green". Indicator lights shall be
labeled or color coded and mounted as follows: "Red" at top,
"Yellow" in the middle, and "Green" at bottom.
3.1 While an intersection is in the flash mode, the indicator
lights on the solid-state switch pack shall display the
controllers output status.
3.2 Each switch pack shall have reverse polarity protection.
3.3 Each channels input shall not draw more than 20 milliamps
DC when an input voltage of between 16 and 26 VDC is applied
across the input terminals of that channel.
4. Load
Not more than one (1) circuit, solid-state switch output, shall be
simultaneously energized at any one time within any module
assembly unless the combined load current on the energized
circuits does not exceed 10 amperes.
5. Safety
Each switch pack shall be so designed that persons inserting or
removing the assembly will not be exposed to any parts having live
voltage, and shall not be required to insert hands or fingers into
any loading rack housing other modular assemblies. A handle or
gripping device shall be attached to the front of each switch
pack.
6. Dimensions
The switch pack shall be so constructed that its lower surface
will be between 2.10 and 2.05 in below the centerline and that no
part will extend more than 0.9 in to the left and 1.10 in to the
right of the centerline of the connector configuration.
7. Conductor
A thermally conductive substance, such as heat sink compound,
Page | - 96 -
NYS TMES – October 2, 2014
shall be applied between any surfaces in the unit that and are
intended to transmit heat between each other.
8. Waterproofing
All printed circuit boards used in the Flasher assembly shall be
coated with a waterproof coating, or encapsulated in a potting
compound suitable for use with electronic components.
SECTION II
CONNECTOR
1. Electrical Connections
All electrical connections into and out of the solid-state switch
pack shall be through a multi-terminal connector, Cinch-Jones type
#P-2412-SB or equal. The connector shall be rigidly fixed to the
rear or base of the switch pack.
2. Connector
The mating female connector, #S-2412-SB or equal shall be at the
rear of the load rack housing the switch packs. The Front View of
Male Mating Connector is shown in Fig -8.1
3. Pin Assignments
All pins designated as spare shall be assigned and fixed as to the
operating parameters and functions on or before approval.
PIN FUNCTION LEVEL TO OPERATE
1 +115 VAC, 60 Hz 115 VAC
2 Chassis Ground Gnd
3 A Output (R, DW) 115 VAC
4 Spare
5 B Output (Y) 115 VAC
6 A Input (R, DW) Gnd
7 C Output (G, W) 115 VAC
8 B Input (Y) Gnd
9 +24 VDC +24 VDC
10 C Input (G, W) Gnd
11 Spare
Page | - 97 -
NYS TMES – October 2, 2014
12 Spare
Fig - 8.1 Front View of Male Mating Connector
2
4
6
8
10
12 11
9
7
5
3
1
Page | - 98 -
NYS TMES – October 2, 2014
CHAPTER 9 Detailed Specification on 12 Volt Rack Mountable AC Power Supply Card
This specification describes the requirements for a 12 volt Rack Mountable AC Power Supply which is used for Microwave Detector Card Combination Unit. This card will be installed in a Model 330SR Traffic Control Cabinet Detector Rack.
SECTION I REQUIREMENTS
1. General Technical Requirements
1.1 The components on this card shall be mounted on an edge-connected printed circuit board that conforms to the specifications shown on the two detector card drawings (See Fig-9.1 and Fig-9.2) included in this specification. 1.2 The module shall be provided with a hand-pull to facilitate insertion and removal form the detector rack enclosure. 1.3 The module shall have a front panel mounted indicator to provide visual indicating of each electrical contact closure. A test switch shall be provided to place an input to the controller unit. Both indicator and switch shall be on the input side of the optical coupler. The test switch shall be a single pole-double
throw, three (3) position switch; momentary on, off and one (1) maintained on positions. The contacts shall be either silver or coin silver with gold over nickel plate rated for 5 amperes at 115 VAC. 1.4 The front panel of the module shall be labeled to indicate usage of all indicates and switches.
Page | - 99 -
NYS TMES – October 2, 2014
1.5 The unit shall be keyed (slotted) between pins B&C and M&N on the edge connector.
1.6 Operation and Maintenance Manuals shall be supplied with each unit. These manuals shall include the following information:
a) General Description b) General Characteristics c) Installation Procedure d) Adjustments e) Theory of Operation f) Schematic and Logic Diagram g) Parts List (to include part type, part number, manufacturer and ratings)
“A minimum of two Operation and Maintenance Manuals shall be sent to the address listed in paragraph 3.2.
2. Electrical Requirements
2.1 The output channel of the detector circuitry shall be an opto-isolated NPN open collector capable of sinking 50 milliamperes at 30 volts. The output channel shall be compatible with New York State 2070 controller inputs and shall present ground true logic to these inputs. 2.2 The detector circuitry shall be powered using the 24 VDC supplied in a Model 330SR traffic control cabinet detector rack. The detector circuitry shall not draw more than 100 milliamperes.
2.3 The module shall provide ground true logic to the controller when pins D & E of the edge connector are shorted and provide logic high when pins D & E are opened. 2.4 The front panel shall be connected to chassis ground. 2.5 The input shall deliver no less than 15 or more than 20 milliaperes to a contact closure across pins D&E of the edge connector. 2.6 The unit shall be capable of supplying 12 VAC across pins F & H of the edge connector. This voltage shall be supplied by a transformer with a secondary rated at 12 volt amps. Power to the primary side of the transformer shall be provided by the Model 330SR
Cabinet through pins M & N of the edge connector. The primary shall be fused at 1/8 ampere with a time delay fuse. 2.7 Lightning protection shall be installed across all input pairs of the detector/input card. The protection shall be designed to enable the device to withstand a 10mF capacitor, charged to +/- 1000 VDC, being placed for period of one (1) second, directly across the input pins or between either input pin and Chassis ground of the detector/input card with no load present.
Page | - 100 -
NYS TMES – October 2, 2014
2.8 To avoid interference with the detector rack card guides, there shall be a 0.1” minimum clearance between the entire top and bottom
of the PC board and any protruding hardware such as washers, screws, Front Panel mounting brackets or circuit components.
3. Manufacturer Operations
3.1 When integrated circuits are provided which are of such special design or programming that they preclude the off-the-shelf purchase of identical components from any wholesale electronics distributor or component manufacturer, one (1) exact duplicate integrated circuit shall be furnished with every fifteen (15) integrated circuits provided. 3.2 All duplicate integrated circuits shall be shipped to the NYSDOT Traffic Signal Lab.
1/8 Amp.
Transformer
Bypass
Test
On
Off
Power
PC
BOARD
1.12"0.062"
0.1"
0.375"
6.88"
0.125" MAXIMUM
1.50"
MAXIMUM
3.5
6"
4.4
9"
0.4
65"
The following tolerances shall be adhered to unless
specifically noted elsewhere in these specifications:
Sheet metal +/- 0.0524"
PC Board +0, -0.01"
Fig - 9.1 12 Volt AC Supply Card Dimensions
Page | - 101 -
NYS TMES – October 2, 2014
Fig -9.2 12 Volt AC Supply Card Pin Assignment
1/8 Amp.
Transformer
Bypass
Test
On
Off
Power
LED dindicates that channel is in call
Switch in center is normal, top is to bypass
sensor, bottom is to test channel.
LED indicates power is applied and fuse is good.
Switch turns power on/off
NOTES: The Bypass/Test switch is normally in the middle position. The Test position momentarily tests the card, Bypass allows a constant call.
The Power switch turns power to the unit on or off.
The edge connector contacts shall be gold plated
1.
2.
PIN ASSIGNMENTS
PIN FUCTION PIN FUNCTION
A DC Ground M AC - B +24 VDC *N AC+ *C Not Used P Not Used D Input R Not Used E Input S Not Used F Output T Not Used H Output U Not Used J 12 VAC Output V Not Used K 12 VAC Output W Not Used L Chassis Ground X Not Used
Y Not Used Z Not Used
Controller Input Controller Ground
*Key slots between B&C and M&N
3.
Page | - 102 -
NYS TMES – October 2, 2014
CHAPTER 10 Detailed Specification on Microwave Vehicle Detectors
This specification describes the requirements for an overhead microwave vehicle motion detector, capable of sensing vehicle movements in one direction only. The direction of detection desired shall be selectable by a switch.
SECTION I REQUIREMENTS
1. General Technical Requirements
1.1 The unit shall be capable of detecting directional motion (approach only or departing only), from overhead, for all directional motion of 2 miles per hour or more. 1.2 The unit shall be capable of detecting every type of vehicle that is licensed to date (including mopeds). 1.3 The range of the unit shall be from one 3.28 ft (1 meter) to 200 ft (61 meters) for automobiles or smaller vehicles (including mopeds). 1.4 The pattern spread of the unit shall be determined by an antenna, acting as a waveguide, at a fixed cone of 16° (i.e. at 16.16 ft , the pattern will be 4.375 ft wide).
1.5 The unit shall have two switch adjustments. One being “range” (high-gain or low-gain) and the other being “directional selection” (approach or depart). 1.6 Operation and Maintenance Manuals shall be supplied with each unit. These manuals shall include the following information: a) General Description b) General Characteristics
Page | - 103 -
NYS TMES – October 2, 2014
c) Installation Procedure d) Adjustments e) Theory of Operation
f) Schematic and Logic Diagram g) Parts List (to include part type, part number, manufacturer and ratings)
A minimum of two Operation and Maintenance Manuals shall be sent to the address listed in Chapter 1.
2. Functional Requirements
2.1 The microwave detector must have a FCC (Federal Communication Commission) identifier number assigned to it with the number affixed to the unit. The unit shall also comply with FCC Rules, Part 15 and be labeled stating complicity to these rules.
2.2 The unit shall operate in the microwave region of the electromagnetic spectrum. 2.3 The unit shall be self-contained with the exception that power will be supplied to the detector unit from an external source. The maximum power consumption of the unit shall be 4.5 watts at 12 VAC. 2.4 The unit shall have an electro-mechanical relay (rated at 5 amperes at 24 VDC) to provide an output signal to devices that interface with the unit. The output signal shall be at ground level when the unit has detected a valid vehicle movement and an open circuit for a non-detected condition. 2.5 The unit must employ a monitoring circuit to supervise the Gunn
and mixer diodes and fail-safe the relay to the closed position (ground level) in the event of a transceiver or power failure. 2.6 The unit shall be self-tuning with the exception of the high-low range selection switch. A five minute warm-up period shall be allowed for the unit to stabilize and operate properly. 2.7 The unit shall have, on the PC board, an LED indicator to demonstrate activation of the electro-mechanical relay.
3. Mechanical Construction Requirements
3.1 Each unit shall be enclosed in a corrosion and water resistant case without the use of silicone gel or any other materials that
could deteriorate with exposure to ultra-violet rays. 3.2 Size of detector shall be: Height...............4.375" (Maximum) Width................4.375" (Maximum) Depth................7.375" (Maximum) Weight...............approximately 3.5 lb
Page | - 104 -
NYS TMES – October 2, 2014
3.3 Each unit shall be supplied with a bracket designed for side-of-pole, overhead-mast-arm, or lag-bolt mounting capabilities. All brackets and mounting hardware shall be corrosion resistant.
4. Environmental Operation Requirements
4.1 The detector shall be capable of continuous operation over a temperature range of -31°F to 170°F.
5. Manufacturer Operations
5.1 The manufacturer shall test all units to FCC specifications (FCC Rules, Part 15). Test reports to be furnished to NYSDOT upon request. 5.2 When integrated circuits are that are used in the units that are of such special design or programming that they preclude the off-the-shelf purchase of identical components from any wholesale
electronics distributor or component manufacturer, one (1) exact duplicate integrated circuit shall be furnished with every fifteen (15) integrated circuits provided in the purchase. 5.3 All duplicate integrated circuits shall be shipped to the NYSDOT Traffic Signal Laboratory. 5.4 The manufacturer shall be required to supply a medical statement as to the safety of the unit to the general public, specifically to those persons who have medical implants (i.e., pace-makers), when requested.
CHAPTER 11 Detailed Specification on Ultrasonic Vehicle Presence Detectors
This specification describes the requirements for a side-of-road (parallel) or overhead mounted ultrasonic presence sensor.
Page | - 105 -
NYS TMES – October 2, 2014
SECTION I REQUIREMENTS
1. General Technical Requirements
1.1 The Ultrasonic Presence Detector shall operate in the ultrasonic region of the frequency spectrum and shall detect the continuous presence of any object (vehicular or pedestrian) within its detection pattern. 1.2 The presence sensor shall detect any object within its programmed zone and hold that detection until the object (vehicle or pedestrian) has left the zone. 1.3 The range of the sensor shall be from one 4 ft(1.22 meter) to 24
ft (7.32 meters) from the front face (plane) of the sensor, adjustable by use of a range control. 1.4 The pattern of detection shall measure 4 ft in diameter at 24 ft from the front face (plate) of the sensor. The shape of the pattern shall be conical. 1.5 Operation and maintenance manuals shall be supplied with each unit. These manuals shall include the following information: a) General Description b) General Characteristics c) Installation Procedures d) Adjustments e) Theory of Operation f) Schematic and Logic Diagram
g) Parts list (to include part type, part number, manufacturer and rating).
2. Functional Requirements 2.1 The unit shall be self-contained with the exception that power will be supplied to the detector unit from external source. The maximum power consumption of the unit shall be 4.5 watts at 12VAC. 2.2 The sensor shall have an electro-mechanical relay (rated at 5 amperes at 24 VDC) to provide an output signal to devices that interface with the unit. The output signal shall be at ground level when the unit has detected a valid vehicle movement and an open
circuit for a non-detected condition. The sensor shall be capable of delaying the output to the detector card by one-half (0.5) to ten (10) seconds by the use of a variable time delay control.
2.3 The sensor must employ circuitry to put the relay to a fail-safe (ground level) position in the event of a power failure.
2.4 The sensor shall work either as a side of road (parallel) detector, or overhead mast arm (overhead) detector, mounted at a height of 8 ft to 24 ft.
Page | - 106 -
NYS TMES – October 2, 2014
2.5 The sensor shall have, on the PC board, an LED indicator to demonstrate activation of the electro-mechanical relay.
3. Mechanical Construction Requirements
3.1 Each unit shall be enclosed in a corrosion and water resistant case without the use of silicone gel or any other materials that could deteriorate with exposure to ultra-violet rays. 3.2 Size of detector shall be: Height................ 4.375” (Maximum) Width................. 5” (Maximum) Depth................. 7.25” (Maximum) Weight................ approximately 3.5 lb
3.3 The sensor shall be furnished with a mounting bracket designed to be mounted in both side of road (parallel) or overhead mast arm (overhead) installations, using either a banding device or lag bolts.
4. Environmental Operation Requirements 4.1 The detector shall be cable of continuous operation over a temperature range of -31°F to 170°F.
5. Manufacturer Operations
5.1 When integrated circuits are provided which are of such special
design or programming that they preclude the off-the-shelf purchase of identical components from any wholesale electronics distributor or component manufacturer, one (1) exact duplicate integrated circuit shall be furnished with every fifteen (15) integrated circuits provided. All duplicate integrated circuits shall be shipped to the New York State Department of Transportation Traffic Signal Lab.
Page | - 107 -
NYS TMES – October 2, 2014
CHAPTER 12 Detailed Specification on Model 210NYR Conflict Monitor with Red Monitoring Option
This specification defines the minimum detailed requirements
applicable to the Model 210NYR Conflict Monitor Module. The intent
is to set forth the electrical and mechanical design parameters, the
requirements within which the equipment shall operate, and the means
by which the equipment shall be tested to determine whether it shall
so operate. This specification shall supplement the General
Technical Requirements within Chapter 1 for Microcomputer Traffic
Signal Control Equipment and in case of conflict this detailed
specification shall govern.
1. General Requirements
This specification defines the minimum requirements for a rack-
mountable, sixteen channel,solid-state 210NYR Conflict Monitor to be
used in a NYS Model 330SR Cabinet. The monitor will interface to the
Model 330SR Cabinet’s Monitor rack. The Conflict Monitor shall be
capable of monitoring sixteen switchpack channels consisting of a
Green output, a Yellow output, and a Red output for each channel.
The Red Switchpack outputs will be supplied to the Monitor Inputs
through the Model 330SR’s Red Conflict Monitor Interface.
1.1 Environmental and Power Supply Requirements:
Line Voltage Operation – 80 to 135 VAC
Line Frequency Operation – 57 to 63 Hz
Operating Temperature Range - -37 deg to 74 deg C
2. Monitor Operation
2.1 Output Relay and Stop-Time Output.
The output relay coil of the Monitor that controls the flash
operation of the cabinet shall be energized by the monitor’s
circuitry when in a non-fault condition and when the line voltage of
Page | - 108 -
NYS TMES – October 2, 2014
the monitor is above 103 +/- 2 VAC. In a fault condition, or when
the line voltage falls below 98 +/- 2 VAC, the output relay coil of
the Monitor shall become energized by the monitor’s circuitry and
will connect the AC voltage present on Pin 28 of its edge connector
to Pin EE of its edge connector. Electrical ratings of the relay’s
contacts should be minimum of 3 amperes at 125VAC.
The Stop-Time Output shall be disabled/off by the monitor’s
circuitry when in a non-fault condition and when the line voltage is
above 103 +/- 2 VAC. In a fault condition, or when the line voltage
falls below 98 +/- 2 VAC, the Stop-Time Input will be enabled/on by
the monitor’s circuitry. The Stop-Time Output shall be derived from
a solid state device, be compatible with the input interface of a
Model 2070 2B FIO Module, be capable of sinking 100 ma DC minimum
when enabled, and have DC breakdown voltage of at least 30 VDC.
2.2 Conflict Monitoring
The Conflict Monitor shall be able to detect the presence of
conflicting green or yellow signal voltages on the switchpack output
terminals of a Model 330SR Cabinet between two or more conflicting
outputs as determined by the Program Card configuration. A Conflict
fault shall de-energize the output relay and enable the Stop-Time
input. A Conflict fault shall also be a latching type fault and
only resettable/cleared through a reset signal issued to the
Monitor.
2.2.1 Conflict Recognition Time and Active Voltage Levels
The Conflict Monitor shall detect a Conflict fault when active
voltages on any conflicting outputs are present for more than 500
ms. The Monitor shall not detect a Conflict fault when active
switchpack output voltages on any conflicting outputs are present
for less than 200 ms. Conflicting outputs sensed for more than 200
ms and less than 500 ms may or may not be detected as a fault. The
active monitor voltage levels for Conflict sensing are: All
voltages, both full wave and half wave rectified, above 25 VAC on
any switchpack output as active and all voltages less than 15 VAC as
inactive
2.3 24VDC Monitoring
The Conflict Monitor shall be able to detect that the cabinet’s +24
Vdc supply has fallen below 18 VD. A 24VDC fault shall de-energize
the output relay and enable the Stop-Time input. A 24VDC failure
shall be a latching fault and only resettable through a reset signal
issued to the Monitor.
2.3.1 24VDC Recognition Time
The Monitor shall detect a 24VDC fault when the voltage on the +24V
input is below 18 Vdc for more than 500 ms. The Monitor shall not
Page | - 109 -
NYS TMES – October 2, 2014
detect a 24VDC fault when the voltage on the +24V input is below 18
Vdc for less than 200 ms. The Monitor may detect voltages between
18Vdc and 22Vdc for more than 500 ms, but not less than 200 ms as
fault. All voltages above level of +22 Vdc shall not be detected as
a fault
2.4 Controller Watchdog Monitoring
The Conflict Monitor shall detect a Watchdog fault should the
Watchdog input not detect a signal transition from the controller
within the selected Watchdog Recognition time period. A Watchdog
fault shall de-energize the output relay and enable the Stop-Time
input.
2.4.1 Controller Watchdog Latch Option
An option, provided by a switch or jumper, to select a Watchdog
fault as a latching or non-latching type fault shall be provided.
For the latching type fault option, the Watchdog fault and Indicator
can only be cleared by a Reset signal issued to the Monitor. For the
non-latching type fault option, the Watchdog fault will be cleared,
output relay energized, if the AC line voltage falls to any line
voltage below the “Brownout” level of 98 +/- 2 VAC and after the AC
line voltage is restored to above 103+/- 2 VAC. Under this option
the Watchdog indicator will remain illuminated until a Reset signal
is issued to the Monitor. Default for the Monitor will be that a
Watchdog fault is a latching type fault.
2.4.2 Controller Watchdog Recognition Time
An option, provided by a switch or jumper, shall set the maximum
Watchdog recognition time to 1000 +/- 100 ms or 1500 +/- 100 ms.
Default time for the Monitor shall be 1500 +/- 100 ms
2.4.3 Controller Watchdog Inhibit Function
The Watchdog monitoring function shall be inhibited when the AC Line
voltage drops below 98 +/- 2 Vac for greater than 50 +/- 17 ms. When
the AC Line rises above 103 +/-2 Vac for greater than 50 +/- 17 ms,
monitoring of the Watchdog input shall resume. A minimum of 5 Vac
shall be maintained between the inhibit voltage level and the enable
voltage level.
2.4.4 Controller Watchdog Enable Switch
An Watchdog On/Off switch shall be provided to disable the Watchdog
monitoring function. The switch shall also be labeled as to its
function. Placement of the switch in the OFF position shall cause
monitoring of the Watchdog to be disabled. Default for the Monitor
is “On”.
2.5 AC Line Monitoring
Page | - 110 -
NYS TMES – October 2, 2014
2..5.1 AC Line Brownout Recognition
The Monitor shall be able to detect that the AC Line has fallen
below 98 +/- 2 Vac for greater than 80 +/- 17 ms. This shall force
the output Relay to the de-energized state, enable the Stop-Time
output, and cause the AC Power Indicator to flash at a 2 Hz rate.
The unit shall maintain this state until the AC Line voltage rises
above 103 +/- 2 Vac, Restore Level, for greater than 80 +/- 17 ms.
Both the output relay and Stop-Time outputs will return to their “No
fault” states – Output Relay Energized and Stop-Time Off.
2..5.2 AC Line Power Response
When AC Line power is first applied, the Signal Monitor shall
immediately energize the Output Relay and place the Stop Time output
to the “Off” state.
2.6 Red Fail Monitoring
The Conflict Monitor shall be able to detect the absence of an
active voltage being present on the outputs of a switchpack channel.
The monitor shall include an option to enable Red Fail Monitoring on
a per channel basis using Dip switches that are clearly labeled for
each channel. A Red Fail fault shall de-energize the output relay
and enable the Stop-Time input. A Red Fail fault shall also be a
latching type fault and only resettable/cleared through a reset
signal issued to the Monitor. The Red Fail monitoring function shall
be enabled for all channels programmed for Red Fail except when the
Red Enable input is not active, or pin #EE is active, or Special
Function #1 input is active, or Special Function #2 input is active.
The active voltage levels for the above four inhibit inputs are: All
voltages above 70 VAC on any inhibit input as active and all
voltages less than 50 VAC as inactive.
2.6.1 Red Fail Recognition Time and Active Voltage Levels
The Monitor shall detect a Red Fail fault when an active voltage is
absent on all three outputs of a switchpack channel for more than
1500 ms. The Monitor shall not detect a Red Fail fault when an
active voltage is absent on all three outputs of a switchpack
channel for less than 1200 ms. Switchapck channels without active
voltages sensed for more than 1200 ms and less than 1500 ms may or
may not be detected as a fault. The active monitor input voltage
levels for Red Fail sensing are: All voltages above 70 VAC as active
and all voltages less than 50 VAC as inactive.
2.6.2 Red Interface Cable Fault
An option, provided by a switch or jumper, to select the operation
of the Signal Monitor to enter or not enter the fault mode causing
the Output relay contacts to close and enabling the Stop-Time output
to the controller without the Red Interface Cable connected to the
Monitor shall be provided. To indicate this fault mode the front
panel Red Fail Indicator will illuminate and the all channel
Page | - 111 -
NYS TMES – October 2, 2014
indicators shall be off. The default for the monitor will be that
the Signal Monitor will enter the fault mode should the Red
Interface Cable not be connected.
2.7 Dual Indication Monitoring
2.7.1 GYR Dual Indication Monitoring
The Monitor shall be able to detect the presence of a simultaneous
active voltages on the green and yellow, green and red, or yellow
and red outputs of a switchpack channel. A GYR fault shall de-
energize the output relay and enable the Stop-Time input. A GYR Dual
Indication fault shall also be a latching type fault and only
resettable/cleared through a reset signal issued to the Monitor.
This function shall be enabled on a per channel basis using Dip
switches that are clearly labeled for each channel. The GYR Dual
Indication monitoring function shall be enabled for all selected
channels except when the Red Enable input is not active or pin #EE
is active.
2.7.2 GY Dual Indication Monitoring
The Monitor shall be able to detect the presence of active voltage
on the green and yellow outputs of a channel. A Conflict fault shall
de-energize the output relay and enable the Stop-Time input. A GY
Dual Indication fault shall also be a latching type fault and only
resettable/cleared through a reset signal issued to the Monitor.
This function shall be enabled with a switch. When the switch is in
the ON position, all channels shall be monitored for simultaneous
active green and yellow outputs on a switchack channel. GY Dual
Indication monitoring function shall be disabled when the Red Enable
input is not active or pin #EE is active.
2.7.3 Dual Indication Recognition Time and Active Voltages
The Monitor shall detect a Dual Indication fault when multiple
outputs are active on a switchpack channel for more than 500 ms. The
Monitor shall not detect a Dual indication fault when multiple
outputs are active on a switchpack channel for less than 200 ms.
Channels with multiple outputs active for more than 200 ms and less
than 500 ms may or may not detect a Dual Indication fault. To
increase the reliability of sensing LED signal failures, the active
monitor input sensing voltages for all channels for the Dual
Indication Monitor function shall be: All voltages above 25 VAC on
any channel as active and all voltages less than 15 VAC as inactive
2.8 Sequence (Short or Absent Yellow) Monitoring
The Monitor shall be able to detect that a switchpack channel has
not provided an adequate Yellow Clearance output following a Green
interval output for that switchapck channel. A Sequence fault shall
de-energize the output relay and enable the Stop-Time input. A
Sequence fault shall also be a latching type fault and only
Page | - 112 -
NYS TMES – October 2, 2014
resettable/cleared through a reset signal issued to the Monitor.
This function shall be enabled on a per channel basis using dip
switches. The Sequence monitoring function shall be enabled for all
selected channels except when the Red Enable input is not active or
pin #EE is active. A minimum Yellow Clearance detect time of 2.7 +/-
0.1 seconds shall be provided.
2.9 Configuration Change Monitoring
Any change in the configuration parameters of the monitor shall
cause the Monitor to enter the fault mode causing the Output relay
contacts to close and enabling the Stop-Time output to the
controller. Examples of changes to configuration parameters would be
changes to switch or jumper settings on the Monitor or changes to
the Programming Card Diodes or Jumpers. An indication of this fault
shall be provided on the front panel of the monitor. Depressing the
Front Panel Reset button for a minimum of 5 seconds shall be
required to clear this fault and log in the new configuration
parameters into memory.
2.10 Program Card Detection
When the Programming Card is removed or not seated properly, the
Monitor shall force the Output Relay to the de-energized "fault"
state, enable the Stop-Time output, and illuminate an indicator
dedicated for this fault on the front panel. A reset command from
the front panel Reset switch or External Reset input shall be
required once the Program Card is in place.
2.11 Switchpack Channel Display Functions
The switchpack channel front panel indicators of the monitor shall
be illuminated for each active Switchpack output (Green, Yellow or
Red) during non fault operation. When the Monitor is latched in a
fault state it shall also be possible, through the switchpack
channel indicators, to alternately view both the active switchpack
outputs at the time of the fault and the outputs that caused the
fault.
2.12 Event Logging
The monitor shall provide Event Logging capabilities that can be
viewed and downloaded to a Personal Computer through an EIA-232
serial interface. The event logging should include, as a minimum,
time stamped logs of Current Configurations, Current Monitor Status,
AC line Status/Events and Previous Faults showing the type of fault
and individual switchpack output status at the time of fault and
identifying the switchpack outputs causing the fault.
2.13 Special Function Preemption Inputs
The Special Function Preemption inputs #1 and #2 shall provide an AC
input to the Monitor which shall disable Red Fail Monitoring
(Absence of Output) when either input is sensed as active. A switch
Page | - 113 -
NYS TMES – October 2, 2014
shall be provided to invert the active logic state of the AC signal
needed to disable Special Function #1. With this option enabled, a
voltage, above 70 VAC applied to Special Function #1 input will
enable the Function and a voltage below 50 VAC will disable it
2.14 Red Interface Connector
This 20 pin connector, mounted on the front panel of the monitor,
provides the required inputs for the unit to monitor the Red field
signal outputs. It shall be a 3M #3428-5302 type or equivalent and
be polarized to insure proper mating with the cable. Ejector latches
shall be included to facilitate removal and prevent the cable from
inadvertently disconnecting. The pin assignments shall be as shown
below.
PIN FUNCTION PIN FUNCTION
1 CHANNEL 15 RED 11 CHANNEL 9 RED
2 CHANNEL 16 RED 12 CHANNEL 8 RED
3 CHANNEL 14 RED 13 CHANNEL 7 RED
4 CHASSIS GROUND* 14 CHANNEL 6 RED
5 CHANNEL 13 RED 15 CHANNEL 5 RED
6 SPECIAL FUNCTION #2 16 CHANNEL 4 RED
7 CHANNEL 12 RED 17 CHANNEL 3 RED
8 SPECIAL FUNCTION #1 18 CHANNEL 2 RED
9 CHANNEL 10 RED 19 CHANNEL 1 RED
10 CHANNEL 11 RED 20 RED ENABLE
*A jumper option shall be provided to allow the connection of Pin #4 to be
made with Chassis Ground.
2.15 Front Panel
The front panel shall be constructed of sheet aluminum with a
minimum thickness of 0.090", and shall be finished with an anodized
coating.
2.16 Indicators
All display indicators shall be mounted on the front panel of the
Signal Monitor and shall be Super Bright type LEDs to increase
visibility. All fault LEDs shall be red except the AC POWER
indicator which shall be green. The following minimum indicators
shall be provided on the front panel and labeled as to their
function:
1) AC Power Indicator. This indicator shall flash when the unit
has detected a low voltage/brownout condition as described in this
specification. It shall illuminate when the AC Line voltage level
is restored above the brownout level. The indicator shall
extinguish when the AC Line voltage is less than 80 Vac.
2) 24 VDC Failed Indicator. This indicator shall illuminate when a
24VDC fault condition is detected. This indicator remains
Page | - 114 -
NYS TMES – October 2, 2014
extinguished if the monitor has not detected by a 24VDC fault.
3) Watchdog Error Indicator. This Indicator shall illuminate when
a controller Watchdog fault is detected. If the Watchdog On/Off
switch on the monitor is placed in the OFF position to disable
Watchdog monitoring the Watchdog Error indicator shall
flash.
4) Conflict Indicator. This indicator shall illuminate when a
conflicting signal fault is detected.
5) Diagnostic Indicator. This indicator shall illuminate when an
internal fault is detected.
6) Red Fail Indicator. This indicator shall illuminate when a Red
Fail fault is detected on a channel(s) that is being monitored for
Red Fail. If the Red Enable input is not active, or a Special
Function input is active, or the EE input is active, the Red Fail
indicator shall flash ON/OFF.
7) Dual Indications Indicator. This indicator shall illuminate
when a GY-Dual or GYR-Dual Indication fault is detected on a
channel(s) that is being monitored for Dual Indications.
8) Sequence Indicator. This Indicator shall illuminate when the
minimum Yellow Clearance time has not been met on a channel(s)
following a green interval.
9) Program Card Detection Indicator. This Indicator shall
illuminate if the Program Card is absent or not properly seated.
11) Switchpack Channel Status Indicators. During normal operation
the 16 Switchpack Channel Status indicators, one indicator for
each switchpack output, shall display all active Signals (Green,
Yellow and Red).
2.17 Monitor Reset
A momentary SPST Reset switch shall be provided and labeled on the
Monitor’s front panel to reset the monitor circuitry to a non-
failed state. The monitor may also be reset by issuing a reset
pulse to Pin Z of its circuit board’s edge connector. The monitors
reset detection method shall be that a reset pulse issued to the
monitor, for reset purposes, is recognized as a one time event.
Any reset pulse, either issued by the front panel switch or
externally through its edge connector, for a period greater than
Page | - 115 -
NYS TMES – October 2, 2014
500 ms will not prevent the Monitor in detecting faults.
2.18. Indicator Display Test with Configuration Switch Settings
Check.
This test shall be initiated by the activation of the front panel
reset switch and will illuminate all front panel front panel LEDs
for 500 msec minimum to allow users to verify their operation. The
test will also, following the LED test, flash for two seconds
minimum the Red channel LEDs for any channel that is switch
configured to monitor for Red Fail. Following the Red Fail
configuration check, the test will flash for two seconds minimum
the Yellow channel LEDs for any channel that is switch configured
to monitor for RYG Dual Indication. Activation of the external
reset shall not produce the Red Fail/RYG Dual Indication
Configuration Switch Settings Check.
2.19 RMS Voltage Sampling
High speed sampling techniques shall be used to determine the true
RMS value of all AC inputs to the Monitor that are measured for
detecting faults. Each AC input shall be sampled at least 32
times per cycle. The RMS voltage measurements shall not be
affected by phase, frequency, or distortion of the waveform. All
voltages specified as VAC in this detailed specification are RMS
Voltages.
2.20 Internal Watchdog Monitoring
Microprocessors shall be used for all timing, control functions
and AC voltage measurement. Operation of the central
microprocessor utilized in the Monitor design shall be verified by
an independent monitor circuit, which shall force the Output Relay
to the de-energized "fault" state, enable the Stop-Time output,
and illuminate the Diagnostic indicator if a pulse is not received
from the microprocessor within a specified time period. An
Internal Watchdog Failure shall be a latching fault. The unit
shall remain latched in the fault state until a reset signal is
issued to the Monitor or if the Monitor AC Line Voltage is removed
and then reapplied to the Monitor
2.21 Diagnostics
In addition to Internal Watchdog Monitoring, the monitor shall be
capable of performing other Internal Diagnostics and Performance
Monitoring of its operation. As a minimum they include:
1. Monitoring of All Supply Voltages
2. Volatile and Non-Volatile Memory Diagnostics
3. Monitoring the operation of all secondary Microprocessors used
in the Design
4. Indicator Display Test initiated by a Front Panel Switch
Page | - 116 -
NYS TMES – October 2, 2014
activation.
Except for the Indicator Display Test, the diagnostic indicator, or
some other defined indicator, shall illuminate should the diagnostic
testing find a fault. These faults are a latching type fault and can
only be cleared by either a Reset issued to the Monitor or removal
of AC line voltage and reapplication of AC line voltage to the
monitor.
2.22 Configuration Parameters
User-programmed configuration settings shall be selected using
switches or jumpers mounted on the printed circuit board of the
unit. Designs requiring a Personal Computer, or some other device
connected to the Monitor’s communication port, to program or verify
the configuration parameters detailed in this specification is not
acceptable. User-programmed configuration settings which are
transferred to memory shall be stored in a programmable read-only
memory (PROM or EEPROM). Designs using a battery to maintain
configuration data shall not be acceptable.
2.23 Input Impedance of Field Terminal Inputs
All AC field terminal inputs of the Monitor shall provide an input
impedance (resistive) of 150K +/- 50K ohms to the load connected to
the each switchpack channel output. Resistors used to set this
impedance shall be discrete resistors having a power dissipation
rating of 0.5 Watts or greater.
3. Programming Card. Each Monitor shall be equipped with a Programming Card to configure
conflicting Switchpack outputs of all 16 Switchpack channels and to
disable Yellow outputs that will not be monitored. Conflict
configuration shall be done through a diode matrix. The card shall
be supplied with all channel outputs programmed as conflicting.
Yellow outputs shall be disabled through jumpers. The card will be
supplied with a Yellow outputs enabled. The Program Card’s physical
dimensions and edge connector functions shall be the same as the
Model 210NYR Conflict Monitor specified herein.
4. Physical Dimensions
The overall physical dimensions of the monitor module shall be
between 9.75 and 9.85” from the face of the front panel to the panel
surface holding the front mating connector. The module shall be no
wider than 1.38” nor less than 1.38”. The printed circuit card shall
be 0.0624” thick. The module shall inter-mate with a 28/56 pin
double-sided connector having bifurcated contacts on 0.156”
centers. The printed circuit board connector shall bisect its edge
board fingers at their centers to within +/ 0.00381” . The center
Page | - 117 -
NYS TMES – October 2, 2014
of the edge board fingers shall be 4.65”from either edge of the
board. The center line of the 0.0625”printed circuit card shall be
0.2 +/ 0.0156” from the right edge of the front panel. The below
drawing, figure 12.1, provides dimensions for the printed circuit
board.
SIDE VIEW
COMPONENT SIDE
REAR
VIEW
SIDE
MAX
9.2
9"
2.4
0"
4.5
0"
2.4
0"
10.20"
ALL DIMENSIONS ARE +/- 0.010", EXCEPT AS NOTED ( NOT TO SCALE )
COMP
1.18"
0.20"
1.38"
FF
0.37"
AL
ET
TE
R S
IDE
FRONT
VIEW
Fig 12.1 Physical Dimensions of Model 210NYR
Page | - 118 -
NYS TMES – October 2, 2014
CHAPTER 12a Detailed Specification on Model 210NYRip Conflict Monitor with Red Monitoring Option
This specification defines the minimum detailed requirements
applicable to the Model 210NYRip Conflict Monitor Module. The intent
is to set forth the electrical and mechanical design parameters, the
requirements within which the equipment shall operate, and the means
by which the equipment shall be tested to determine whether it shall
so operate. This specification shall supplement the General
Technical Requirements within Chapter 1 for Microcomputer Traffic
Signal Control Equipment and in case of conflict this detailed
specification shall govern.
1. General Requirements
This specification defines the minimum requirements for a rack-
mountable, sixteen channel,solid-state 210NYRip Conflict Monitor to
be used in a NYS Model 330SR Cabinet. The monitor will have the same
requirements as the Model 210NYR specified herein except for the
specification differences and additions detailed below.
2. Specification Differences and Additions
2.1 EIA-232 Serial Interface
An EIA-232 Serial Interface is not required.
2.2 Event Logging
The monitor shall provide Event Logging capabilities that can be
viewed and downloaded to a Personal Computer through an Ethernet
interface. The event logging should include, as a minimum, time
stamped logs of Current Configurations, Current Monitor Status, AC
line Status/Events and Previous Faults showing the type of fault and
individual switchpack output status at the time of fault and
identifying the switchpack outputs causing the fault.
2.3 Ethernet Port.
Page | - 119 -
NYS TMES – October 2, 2014
An 10/100 Mbps Ethernet port shall be provided and accessed through
a RJ-45 connector on the front panel of the monitor. Port settings,
such as IP address, Port Number, Subnet Mask and Default Gateway,
shall be easily set or changed through configuration software
obtained from the Vendor. The configuration software shall also
provide a means to verify a valid connection with the monitor.
NEW YORK STATE DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
TRANSPORTATION MANAGEMENT EQUIPMENT
SPECIFICATIONS (TMES)
Chapters 13 - 16
CABINET REQUIREMENTS
Page | - 120 -
NYS TMES – October 2, 2014
CHAPTER 13 Detailed Specification for Model 330SR Pole Mounted Traffic Signal Cabinet
This specification defines the minimum detailed requirements
applicable to Traffic Signal Cabinets. The intent of this
specification is to set forth the minimum acceptable electrical and
mechanical design and requirements within which all equipment must
operate satisfactorily and reliably, and the means by which the
equipment shall be tested to determine whether it shall so operate.
This specification shall supplement the General Specification for
Microcomputer Traffic Signal Control Equipment, and in case of
conflict, the Detailed Specification shall govern.
SECTION I CABINETS AND HOUSING
1. Cabinets and Housings
1.1 All equipment shall be housed within a weatherproof,
rainproof, outdoor pole-mounted cabinet. The cabinet shall be
clean-cut in design and appearance and have minimum interior
dimensions as follows:
Depth Width Height
17 5/8” (1) 21” (1)* 62” (2)
* Including door opening
(1) Minimum dimension
(2) Maximum dimension
Tolerances are (+/-) 1/8”
Page |-- 121 --
NYS TMS- October 2, 2014
The maximum exterior dimensions, including the door, shall be
as follows:
Depth Width Height
19” 23” 64”
1.2 Cabinet housings shall be fabricated from sheet aluminum
Grade 5052-H32. The sheet aluminum shall be 0.188” thick and
adequately reinforced. Sheet aluminum for the cabinet door may
be 1/8” if reinforcing supports are welded to the inside of
the door to prevent the warping or twisting of the door. All
construction shall be free of dents, scratches, weld burn
through and abrasions harmful to the strength and general
appearance. All seams shall be of continuously welded
construction or alternative weatherproof construction
consisting of non-continuous welds provided the connection is
mechanically sound and weather resistant because of material
overlap when approved by the procuring agency. Manufacturer
information (eg: serial number, date of manufacture, etc)
shall be provided on a permanent tag, and attached to the
inside left wall of the cabinet shell in clear view from the
opened door.
1.3 A certificate of compliance from the manufacturer shall be
furnished certifying that the material used in the
construction of the cabinet housing complies with the
requirements of paragraph 1.2.
1.4 The housing shall have a door, securely gasketed, which
shall include substantially the full area of the front of the
cabinet.
1.4.1 A gasket shall be provided on all door openings. All
gaskets shall be of dust-tight permanent type that will not
peel off or deteriorate. Gaskets shall be closed cell
neoprene and shall be installed with contact cement for a
permanent bond. The mating surface of all gaskets shall be
sprayed with a silicone lubricant to prevent sticking to the
mating surface.
1.4.2 The lock shall be of the self-locking heavy duty five
(5) pin tumbler rim cylinder type. It shall not be keyed to
#2 standard, but instead keyed to a Corbin (CCL or approved
equivalent)bitting pattern “#2A”. The “CR” lock cylinder
keyway remains the same. This key bitting pattern can be
obtained from the NYSDOT Traffic Signal Lab.
Page |-- 122 --
NYS TMS- October 2, 2014
1.4.3 When the door is closed and latched, with the key
removed, the door shall lock. The door shall be furnished
with a three-point positive latching mechanism.
1.4.4 The three-point locking mechanism shall be fabricated
so that it may be actuated by rotating a removable 5/8” hex
key. The hex socket and locking cam shall rotate on a 1/2”
minimum diameter shaft. The socket, shaft and hex key shall
be fabricated from stainless steel, grade 2011P3 aluminum,
or other material plated to prevent corrosion. The socket
and shaft shall be field-replaceable with common tools. The
socket head shall be protected from being rotated with a
pipe wrench or similar tool. Designs shall be subject to
approval by the procuring agency prior to fabrication. A
suggested design is shown on the following page (Fig-13.1).
One (1) hex wrench shall be provided with each cabinet.
1.4.5 No part of the cabinet shell assembly including any
protrusions from the power supply, power distribution
assembly and police panel shall extend further than 7/8” in
front of the plane formed by the front of the cabinet shell.
1.4.6 No part of the cabinet door or any attachment to it
shall extend further than 1.25” from the door into the areas
of the controller, cabinet drawer, detector rack, power
supply, or power distribution areas, when the door is
closed.
1.4.7 No part of the cabinet door or any attachment to it
shall extend further than 2.25” in other areas except as
specified for the police compartment, when the door is
closed. The EIA mounting racks shall be installed 2 5/8”
back from the front plane of the cabinet housing. Tolerance
for all the above dimensions is +/- 1/8”.
Page |-123-
NYS TMS- October 2, 2014
COVER
HEX BOLT
0.625"X0.5"
SHAFT
0.5"
CAM LOCK
HEXKEY-0.625"
Fig 13.1 330SR Cabinet Door Locking Mechanism
1.5 The cabinet shall be equipped with a automatic, self-engaging
catch to hold the door open at 100 degrees +/-5 degrees and
135 degrees +/- 5 degrees. The catch shall be capable of
holding the door open in a 60 MPH wind coming at an incidence
angle of 90 degrees referenced to the plane of the door. The
front door shall have at least three 6” hinges/pins made of
Page |-124-
NYS TMS- October 2, 2014
Type 304 stainless steel along the right edge when viewed from
the front. The hinges shall be crimped or welded to prevent
removal of the hinge pins. The cabinet door hinges shall be
bolted to the cabinet housing in a manner that prevents
unauthorized personnel from removing the door with commonly
available tools when the door is closed.
1.6 Each cabinet shall be provided with louvered vents in the
front door with a removable and reusable metal air filter 16
by 12 by .875” deep. The filter shall be an UL classified air
filter-Class 2 type with the following performance
specifications based on tests done per the ASHRAE 5276 Dust
Test:
At 350fpm At 520fpm
Avg. Arrestance 54% 48%
Clean Resistance 0.045" w.g. 0.09" w.g.
Dust-Holding Capacity 3.35 oz/sq.ft 2.36 oz/sq.ft.
1.6.1 The filter shall overlap the vents by at least 1” and
shall be held firmly in place with bottom and side
brackets and a spring loaded upper clamp. Provisions shall
be made in the design of the vents to prevent snow and
rain from being blown through the vents into the cabinet,
as shown in the Fig 13.12 at the end of this chapter
1.6.2 The bottom filter bracket shall be formed into a
waterproof sump with drain holes to the outside. The
louvered vents shall be designed and constructed so that a
stream of water from a pressure head, such as a Rain Bird
sprinkler or other type sprinkler, will not enter the
cabinet. The louvered area shall be less than the filtered
area. The cabinet top shall be crowned or sloped to
prevent standing water, and shall be constructed to shield
the top of the cabinet door to prevent water from entering
between the top door gasket and the cabinet.
1.7 Each cabinet shall be equipped with an electric fan, Comair
Rotron No. MU2B1 or equal, with ball bearings and a capacity
not less than 100 cubic ft per minute.
1.7.1 The cabinet shall be provided with a 30 square inch
minimum screened exhaust vent. The area between the
exhaust vent and the exhaust fan shall be designed to
prevent snow or rain from reaching the fan area and from
entering the cabinet’s main area. Design of this area
should include baffling to block the entrance of moisture
Page |-125-
NYS TMS- October 2, 2014
yet provide adequate ventilation. This area should also be
sloped, to drain any moisture that may get into this area,
to the outside of the cabinet.
1.7.2 The opening for the fan into the exhaust vent area shall
be designed so that it is only opened when the fan is
operating. The design of this assembly will be such that
this assembly can be removed or replaced from inside of
the cabinet’s main area with ordinary hand tools.
1.7.3 The fan shall be thermostatically controlled and shall be
manually adjustable to turn on between 32 Deg F and 140
Deg F with a differential of not more than 20 Deg F
between automatic turn on and off. The manual adjustment
shall be graded in 20 Deg F increment scale. The
Thermostat shall be an Omega KT01101141900 or equal.
1.7.4 The cabinet fan/light circuit shall be fused with a 3 amp
fuse located on the front of the PDA between the flasher
and controller fuse holders. Thermostat and fan terminals
shall be insulated or covered so that no parts having line
voltage are exposed.
1.7.5 The thermostat shall be located in the vicinity of the fan
and shall be attached to the cabinet housing.
1.7.6 A series resistor-capacitor snubber network, with an AC
voltage rating of at least 400 Vrms, shall be connected
across the thermostat terminals to suppress switching
transients produced by the fan motor. Fan connections
should be made with push-on insulated terminals.
1.8 Each cabinet shall have bolt holes drilled in it and shall be
furnished with one pair of zinc-plated channel brackets
suitable for welding to a steel pole (See “Cabinet Bolt Hole
Locations and Channel Bracket Mounting Details” drawing shown
at the end of the chapter, Fig 13.14). Each bracket shall be
made of 10-gauge cold rolled anodized steel with 5/16” studs
pressed or welded into the bracket. Each channel bracket shall
be supplied with four (4) flat metal washers, two (2) rubber
washers and two (2) locking type nuts for use in mounting the
cabinet to the channel brackets. The washers and nuts shall be
sized for use on the 5/16” studs. To accommodate a 0.75” wide
metal band, each bracket shall include a 0.250” wide by 1”
long slot located approximately in the center of each “ear”
section of the bracket. Mounting brackets and hardware shall
be shipped inside the cabinet.
Page |-126-
NYS TMS- October 2, 2014
1.9 The Main Front Door of the cabinet shall contain a Police
Compartment Door. When opened, this door shall expose two (2)
toggle switches located in the equipment rack. A hinged, swing
out Police Panel Compartment shall be dimensioned and located
as shown fig 13.2 and in the sketch at the end of this chapter
Fig 13.11.
1.9.1 A "Signal-Off" switch, so labeled, mounted in the switch
panel shall be accessible through the Police Compartment.
The switch, when placed in the "Off" position, shall
energize the mercury contactor coil or Solid State Relay
and prevent the flash relay from energizing the flash
transfer relays.
1.9.2 A "Signal-Flash" switch, so labeled, mounted in the switch
panel shall be accessible through the Police Compartment
and shall operate per paragraph 4.6 Section II of this
chapter.
1.9.3 The police compartment door shall be constructed on the
Main Front Door so that it is flush with the front surface
of the main front door. The door shall be keyed to accept
a Corbin Key No. R4266 or equal and be designed to be
easily closed without the use of this key.
1.9.4 The swing out police panel shall be located on a slide out
panel. This will allow the police panel to be slid out a
minimum of 6” in front of the cabinet shell, and slid back
a minimum of ¼” behind the cabinet shell, as shown in the Fig-13.11 at the end of this chapter.
1.9.5 The two (2) switches accessible through the Police
Compartment shall be Double-Pole, Double-Throw Toggle type
rated at 15 amperes, 120 volts AC.
1.9.6 Both switches accessible through the Police Compartment
Door shall be available on the front of the rack assembly
when the Main Front Door is opened. Only those two (2)
switches shall be accessible through the Police
Compartment Door when the Main Front Door is closed.
1.9.7 An area shall be provided in the police compartment or on
the compartment door to store the hex wrench that opens
the main door.
1.10 An 8” by 8” square cutout shall be provided on the cabinet
floor. The cutout shall be centered laterally on the cabinet
Page |-127-
NYS TMS- October 2, 2014
floor, and located longitudinally with its center 8.5” in
front of the rear outside surface of the cabinet. (See
ABottom View of Cabinet@ diagram Fig-13.19 at the end of
this chapter.)
1.11. Two 12” by 12” adaptor plates shall be provided which can
be mounted to the bottom of the cabinet when necessary (See
“Adaptor Plate” diagram Fig-13.20 at the end of this
chapter). The plates shall be constructed of the same type
and gauge aluminum used for the cabinet. One plate shall
have a 3 5/8” hole for the use of 3” conduit, the other a 4
5/8” hole for the use of 4” conduit. The holes in both
plates shall be centered on the adaptor plate. The position
of both plates when mounted to the bottom of the cabinet
shall be that the centers of the holes in both plates are
directly over the center of the 8” by 8” square cutout
described above. The plates shall be attached to the bottom
of the cabinet using ¼” - 20 plated screws with nylon lock
nuts in each corner of the adaptor plate. Adapter plates
shall be shipped inside the cabinet.
1.12 The cabinet shall be constructed with metal mounting rails
running approximately the entire depth of the cabinet along
the lower left and right hand bottom of the cabinet. The
cabinet shell shall rest on these rails when installed in
its normal position and slide along these rails when
installed or removed. The rails shall be capable of
supporting the weight of the cabinet shell and shall be
installed at a height of 5 1/2 inches from the bottom of the
cabinet floor.
1.13 The cabinet shall be constructed such that there is
approximately 1” of clearance between the bottom of the door
when closed, and the bottom of the cabinet. This will allow
the door to be opened and closed when the cabinet is sitting
flush on a flat surface.
1.14 The cabinet shall be provided with two (2) lifting eyes to
be used when mounting the cabinet on a pole or base. The
lifting eyes shall be centered on each side of the top of
the cabinet and shall be bolted with two (2) bolts each to
the side of the cabinet. Each eye shall have a minimum
diameter of 0.750” and shall be capable of lifting 1000 lb.
1.15 A fluorescent light fixture shall be supplied in the
cabinet. The fixture shall utilize a forward facing
fluorescent lamp with a F8T5/CW designation. The fixture
shall be mounted to the top inside of the cabinet in the
Page |-128-
NYS TMS- October 2, 2014
area between the front of the cabinet and the fan and top
controller receptacle.
1.15.1 The light fixture shall be protected with the same fuse
as the fan, located on the front of the panel of the PDA
labeled “FAN/LIGHT”. Power to the fixture shall be
supplied by Pin 4 of Cabinet connector PDA 3 and wiring
connections to the fixture shall be made through a
connector to facilitate removal of the fixture for
maintenance.
1.15.2 The light fixture shall be controlled by a switch, rated
at 5 amperes -120 volts - with contact material of either
silver or coin silver, mounted on the Conflict
Monitor/Fluorescent Light/Door Open Switch bracket that
is specified in Section 2 and labeled “LS” directly on the bracket.
1.16 A momentary, normally closed, pushbutton type switch shall
be located on the same bracket as the light and conflict
monitor door switches. This switch shall be used to send an
“open door” alarm to the 2070 controller and shall be
labeled “ODS” directly on the bracket
1.16.1 One terminal of this switch shall be connected to the
24vdc “ground” in the PDA via connected PDA-3, pin#8. The
other terminal shall be connected PDA-3, pin#9 and then
internally PDA-2, pin#13 to C1 harness pin # 63.
1.17 Switchpack 24V Control Relay (S24CR)
The 24V connection to Pin 9 of all 16 switchpacks shall be routed
and switched through a relay mounted in the area between the input
file and cabinet drawer and located on the right side of this area –
see 330SR Cabinet Details figure (Fig 13.10.1) for location of the
relay and its mating socket.
The relay shall be designated and marked as S24CR and shall be a
Tyco Electronics SPDT KUP series relay or equal with contact ratings
of 10 amps. The coil of this relay shall be connected to a
connection point in the Cabinet shell that connects to the Mercury
Contact coil or to the control signal of the Solid State Relay so
Page |-129-
NYS TMS- October 2, 2014
that any time the Cabinet goes into Flash operation or is turned off
via the Police Panel ON/OFF switch the 24V connection to Pin 9 of
the switchpacks will be interrupted by opening the set of contacts
on this relay. The relay will have a mechanical hold down
clamp/spring to secure the relay into its socket. See Line Diagram
Figures for schematic of this relay circuit( Fig 13.16 & 13.17).
1.18 24V Control Relay (S24CR) Bypass Switch. A momentary NO switch,
labeled “S24CR BYPASS” with minimum contact ratings of 3 amps at 28
VDC, shall be provided and located adjacent to S24CR. The contacts
of the switch shall be wired in parallel with the contacts of S24CR
that interrupt the 24V connection to the switchpacks. The switch,
when closed, will provide a means for the switchpack DC status to be
viewed when the S24CR is interrupting the 24V connection to the
switchpacks.
1.19 24V Access Terminal. A one position, two pole, feed-through,
barrier type connector shall be installed in the area between the
input file and cabinet drawer and located on the right side of this
area – see 330SR Cabinet Details figure(Fig 13.10.1) for location
of the connector. The connector will provide access to the
Cabinet’s 24VDC and 24VDC Gnd for auxiliary equipment usage. The
terminal block will be horizontally installed and properly labeled
(24VDC, 24VGnd) and shall include a removable plastic cover for
protection. The connector shall be rated to supply a minimum 5 amps
DC. In addition, the 24V supplied to the Access Terminal shall be
fused using a 3.0 Amp, MDL Series, Time Delay fuse connected in
series with the 24VDC Access terminal. The fuse will be located
below the 24V Access Terminal. The fuse shall be labeled “3A 24VDC
Fuse”.
Page |-130-
NYS TMS- October 2, 2014
2.50"
2.00" 2.10"
Center Line
2.00"4.125"
Switch Panel,
Surface even
with rack face.
4.125"
When Closed
1.00 +/- 0.10 “
rain dam
lip
0.50"
Bottom sloped to drain
water out front.
3.50"
Police Panel.
Area Allowed
Center
Line
Police Panel - Closed
Position.
3.50"
Fig -13.2 330SR Police Compartment
Page |-131-
NYS TMS- October 2, 2014
SECTION II PERIPHERAL HARDWARE
1. Rack
A standard EIA 19” rack shall be provided inside the cabinet housing
for mounting the Traffic Controller, Cabinet Shell and Removable
Ventilated Shelf. The height of this rack shall be 53 inches minimum
and it shall begin just above the cabinet shell mounting rails. The
cabinet shell shall contain a swing out power supply, a removable
detector rack, a removable power distribution assembly, a conflict
monitor rack, a load rack, a pullout drawer, field terminals police
panel switches and Traffic Controller supporting angles. The rack
shall conform to EIA-STD-RS-310-B. It shall consist of two
continuous, adjustable equipment mounting angles of 0.1875” nominal
thickness aluminum tapped with 10-32 threaded holes with EIA
universal spacing in the angle surfaces that are above the shell’s
pullout drawer when the cabinet shell is installed. For angle
surfaces below the drawer only the necessary 10-32 threaded holes to
fasten the cabinet shell to the rack need to be provided. Traffic
Controller supporting angles, mentioned above, shall be supplied to
distribute and support the weight of the controller unit and shall
be located just above the pull out drawer. Each angle shall be 10”
deep and 3” wide. A removable, ventilated shelf, 12” deep minimum
capable of supporting 50 lbs minimum shall also be furnished. This
shelf shall be installed two inches above the Traffic Controller
area and shall fasten only to the rails of the EIA rack so that it
may be removed and repositioned on the rails. The purpose of this
shelf is to support either auxiliary equipment or a second Traffic
Controller. (See Figs 13.10.1 and 13.10.2 for additional details)
2. Swing Out D.C. Power Supply
2.1 A swing out power supply of Ferro-resonant design, having no
active components, shall be provided to operate all peripheral
hardware installed in the cabinet. The power supply shall be
hinged on the left hand side of the cabinet as shown in the in
Fig-13.15. The hinge shall be secured to the cabinet shell
using pressed-in threaded mounting studs, installed in the
shell, and cap nuts. The power supply connecting cable shall
run from the left hand rear of the power supply and join to the
cabinet as shown in Fig-13.15. The power supply connecting
cable shall terminate in a MOLEX 03-09-2151 plug or equal. It
shall be provided with male pins wired as follows: Pin#1→AC+,
Pin#2→chassis Gnd, Pin#3→AC-, Pin#14→+24 VDC, Pin 15→DC Gnd.
This plug shall be labeled PS1 on both the cabinet rack and the
plug.
Page |-132-
NYS TMS- October 2, 2014
2.2 The power supply shall be provided with a 15.250” wide by
4.375” high front panel, as shown in the diagram labeled "Power
Supply Detail" drawing at the end of this chapter(fig 13.15).
Two (2) captive 8-32 thumbscrews shall be provided on the right
side of the power supply. These shall attach the power supply
front panel to the bracket on the conflict monitor housing. The
thickness of this bracket shall be 0.1” minimum. The left side
of the front panel shall be firmly bolted to a hinge mounted on
the cabinet shell using two ¼”-20 X.50” plated hex head bolts
with cap nuts. The location of the captive thumbscrews and bolt
holes on the power supply's front panel shall be as shown on
the diagram referenced above. The power supply hinge shall be
of sufficient strength to support the power supply horizontally
while swinging out, and the hinge shall be crimped, preened, or
welded to prevent the hinge pin from vibrating out.
2.3 The actual power supply shall be a maximum of 12.25” wide by
5.50” deep, by 3.25” high, and shall be mounted to the front
panel within the area shown in the in the Fig-13.15 in this
chapter.
2.4 The power supply shall be constructed with a solid top. Venting
should be provided through the back, sides and/or bottom.
2.4.1 The power supply shall be capable of the following:
2.4.1.1 Regulation: Minimum Voltage 23.0 VDC, Maximum Voltage
26.3 VDC. These voltages are specified for all AC line
voltages between 95 VAC and 135 VAC and all DC load
currents from 0.5 amps to 5.0 amps.
2.4.1.2 Design Voltage: +24.6 VDC
2.4.1.3 Full Load Current: 5 Amperes
2.4.1.4 Ripple Noise: 2 volts P-P & 500 mV rms at full load
2.4.1.5 Efficiency: 60% minimum
2.4.1.6 Temperature Coefficient: 32 Degrees Fahrenheit
2.4.1.7 Over voltage protection: A lN6284A Transorb shall be
connected between +24 VDC and GND.
2.4.1.8 Primary Fuse : 3 Amp MDL Series Time Delay fuse
Secondary Fuse: 5 Amp Time Delay fuse - located before
Over voltage protection
Page |-133-
NYS TMS- October 2, 2014
2.4.1.9 A +24 VDC and a D.C. ground test point shall be
provided on the power supply front panel. The +24 VDC
test point (Through a 1KΩ ½ W resistor) shall be taken
off the load side of the secondary fuse.
2.4.1.10 An indicator light shall be provided to indicate that
the 24 volt supply is putting out its required voltage
2.4.1.11 The 24 volt supply shall have an AC line surge
protector as shown in Fig-13.3
Fig -13.3 AC Line Surge protector for 24 Volt power Supply
3. Detector Rack (Input File)
3.1 Each detector rack shall utilize 5.25” of rack-mounting height.
The detector rack shall be capable of housing fourteen (14)
dual detector modules or seven (7) quad detector modules
described elsewhere in these specifications. The detector rack
shall be mounted as shown in the sketch at the end of this
chapter.
3.2 The detector rack shall provide card guides (top and bottom)
and a 22-pin edge-connector on 0.156” centers, mounted
vertically for each detector. The detector rack shall allow air
circulation through the top, bottom, and rear of the detector
rack.
3.3 Four (4) pins (D, E, J, K) on each detector module edge
connector shall be wired to four (4) field terminals to provide
for two (2) loop detector channels or one magnetometer channel
as follows:
mov
mov
mov
To
Equipment
Transformer.0.68mf
600vac
Chassis
Ground.
Chassis
Ground.
0.5 ohm 10 watt
Wirewound.
0.5 ohm 10 watt
Wirewound.
+AC
-AC
MOV=V150LA20
Page |-134-
NYS TMS- October 2, 2014
PIN D - lower channel terminal A (e.g. CH1)
PIN E - lower channel terminal B (e.g. CH1)
PIN J - higher channel terminal A (e.g. CH2)
PIN K - higher channel terminal B (e.g. CH2)
3.4 Loop 1 and 2 output collectors and emitters (pin F, H, W and X)
for each slot shall connect to the proper processor unit inputs
in the connector C1S wiring harness.
3.5 The detector rack shall be connected as shown on the "Input
Rack Wiring Diagram" in Fig-13.13. Wiring between the rack and
field terminals shall be shielded or twisted pair.
3.6 The edge connectors shall be double-sided connectors with the
numbered side of each pin shorted to its respective lettered
side internally.
3.7 Output circuit emitters shall have a common junction and be
grounded only by connection to C1P, pin 104, "DC Input Ground".
3.8 The detector rack shall be constructed in a modular manner and
shall be removable from the cabinet shell without the use of
special tools. The harness running from the detector rack to
the cabinet shell shall be hard wired to the rear of the
detector rack, and plug connected to the face of the cabinet
shell. All plug connectors shall be identified in an
appropriate manner for mating purposes.
3.9 The Detector Rack shall interface with (7) plugs
(Molex # 03 -06-2151 or equal) to the cabinet shell located
directly behind the assembly, they shall mate with (7) sockets
(Molex #03-06-1151 or equal) labeled from left to right(IF1-
IF7).Pin assignments are located in the Table-13.2 at the end
of this chapter.
3.10 The input file shall have two continuous white vinyl, writable
labels. One label located above the input cards and one below
them. The upper label shall be printed with the odd input
position numbers(E.g. 1,3 ,5 … 27). The lower label shall be
printed with the even input position numbers (E.g. 2,4,6 …28).
4. Power Distribution Assembly
The Power Distribution Assembly (PDA) shall be constructed in a
completely modular manner. The units shape and size shall be in
Page |-135-
NYS TMS- October 2, 2014
accordance with the detailed diagram at the end of this chapter. The
PDA shall be mounted to the cabinet shell using two (2) 10-32 nuts
with split-type lock-washers. Two (2) pressed in threaded studs,
protruding from the cabinet shells mounting ears shall be provided
for mounting purposes.
Connections between the PDA and the Cabinet/Cabinet shell, except
for Main AC +, Surge Protector AC- and Surge Protector Earth Ground
shall be made via four (4) connectors identified and labeled as
PDA1, PDA2, PDA3 and PDA4. In addition to labeling, these connectors
shall also be color coded as follows: PDA1 - Blue, PDA2 - Yellow,
PDA3 – White, PDA4 - White. Wire harnesses extending 1” to 3” beyond
the rear of the PDA unit and terminating into connectors PDA1, PDA2
and PDA4(Molex #03-06-2151 or equal) shall mate with cabinet shell
connectors PDA1,PDA2 and PDA4(Molex #03-06-1151 or equal).
Connectors PDA1, PDA2 and PDA4 shall be rigidly mounted to the shell
directly behind the PDA. The distance of cabinet shell PDA1 from the
bottom of the shell shall be approximately 8 1/2”; for PDA4
approximately 6 1/2”; for PDA2 approximately 4 1/2". Connector PDA3
(Molex #03-06-1151 or equal) shall be rigidly mounted to the lower
side of the PDA facing the ground busses, approximately 5 1/2” from
the front of the unit.
A wire harness terminating into Cabinet PDA3 shall mate with PDA
connector PDA3. The wire harness shall have sufficient slack to
provide adequate strain relief when the connectors are mated. In
addition, wires in this harness from the door switch, controller
receptacle and LIGHT/FAN switch shall be routed behind the cabinet
shell. Pin functions for PDA1, PDA2, PDA3 and PDA4 are on the
following page. The inside surface of the PDA cover shall be covered
with an electrical insulating materials. The PDA cover shall be
securely fastened and easily removed without the use of hand tools.
All neutral and ground connections in the PDA shall terminate at the
appropriate bus bars only through the large #6 AWG, green and white
wires
Page |-136-
NYS TMS- October 2, 2014
List of Connections between PDA and Cabinet Shell
PIN PDA-PDA1 CABINET SHELL-PDA1 PDA-PDA2 CABINET SHELL-PDA2
1 Circuit Breaker 1 AC for Swpks 1,2 PDA3-12 24V DC Gnd/ Conf Monitor Pin. 25
2 Circuit Breaker 3 Swpks 5,4 FR-Coil Gnd
Conf. Monitor. Pin 24
3 Circuit Breaker 4 Swpks 7,8 MC Coil Conf Monitor Pin EE
4 NC NC FTR Drive Volt
FTR Pin 1
5 Circuit Breaker 2 Swpks 3,4 NC +24 Volt Supply
6 NC NC NC C1-99
7 AC+ Aux Pwr Term AC+ AC+ *
8 AC- Aux Pwr Term AC- AC- *
9 Flasher AC+ Flasher Power Earth Gnd Earth Gnd *
10 NC NC AC+ AC+
11 Circuit Breaker 1 Swpks 13,14 MC Coil To Signal on-off & Police Flash Switch
12 MC Coil NC NC NC
13 Circuit Breaker 4 Swpks 9,10 PDA-3, PIN#9
C1 Harness, PIN#63
14 Circuit Breaker 3 Swpks 11,12 NC NC
15 Circuit Breaker 2 Swpks 15,16 NC NC
Page |-137-
NYS TMS- October 2, 2014
List of Connections between PDA and Cabinet Shell
List of Connections between PDA and Cabinet PIN PDA-PDA3 CABINET -PDA3
1 AC+ out from Series portion of Surge Protector
Controller Receptacles AC+
2 AC- out from Series portion of Surge Protector
Controller Receptacles AC-
3 Earth Gnd Earth Gnd bus Bar
4 Fan/Light Fuse. Fan/Fluorescent Light
5 NC NC
6 NC AC- Bus Bar
7 NC AC- Bus Bar
8 PDA2-PIN#1(DC Gnd) “Door Open Switch”
9 PDA2-PIN# 13 “Door Open Switch”
10 NC NC
11 Fr-Coil Gnd Door Switch
12 PDA2-Pin 1(DC Gnd) Door Switch
13 Earth Gnd Earth Gnd Bus Bar
14 NC NC
15 NC NC
* = To Cabinet Shell
PIN PDA-PDA4 CABINET-SHELL-PDA4
5 FR-Coil +24V +24 Volt Supply
Page |-138-
NYS TMS- October 2, 2014
4.1 The following equipment shall be installed in the Power
Distribution Assembly and shall be readily accessible for
replacement
4.1.1 One hybrid power line surge protector (See section 4.4)
4.1.2 Main circuit 30 Amp breaker - mounted on front panel
4.1.3 Equipment circuit breaker (controls the G. F. I. and the
auxiliary AC terminals described in Section III, Paragraph
2.1.1) - mounted on the front panel
4.1.4 Duplex equipment receptacles with ground fault detection -
mounted on front panel
4.1.5 Solid state relay
4.1.6 Connector PDA3, which feeds the fan/light, and controller
receptacles.
4.1.7 Four(4) 15 Amp switch pack circuit breakers with an
Auxiliary Switch Feature - mounted on front panel
4.1.8 A signal-flash switch - mounted on the front panel
4.1.9 Fifteen(15) Amp MDA Time Delay fuse for the Model 204
flasher -mounted on the front panel
4.1.10 Ten(10) Amp MDA Time Delay fuse for the controller
receptacles mounted on the front panel and labeled "CNTRLR
PWR"
4.1.11 Miscellaneous cabinet control relays including the flasher
relay and the conflict monitor door switch relay.
4.1.12 Three(3) Amp MDA Time Delay fuse for the fan/light mounted
on the front panel and labeled “FAN/LIGHT” located between
the flasher and controller fuse holder.
4.1.13 Flash Relay, “FR”
4.1.14 A panel-mounted, red in color, Neon Indicator. The
indicator shall have a low profile type lens, an integrated
current limiting resistor, and be labeled “SSR IND”. The
Indicator shall be connected to the output of the PDA’s
Solid State Relay through a NO momentary switch, minimum
contact rating of 1 amp at 120 VAC, mounted on the PDA’s
panel and labeled “SSR IND SW”. Depending on the voltage
output of the Solid State Switch, closure of the switch
Page |-139-
NYS TMS- October 2, 2014
will result in either the indicator illuminating or
remaining off.
4.2 Circuit Breakers
4.2.1 All circuit breakers used in the cabinet should be approved
and listed by UL. The trip and frame size shall be plainly
marked. They shall be magnetic type breakers with their
overload trip points unaffected by temperature. Contacts
shall be silver alloy enclosed in an arc-suppressing
chamber. Minimum interrupting capacity shall be 5000
Amperes, RMS.
4.2.2 The equipment circuit breaker, labeled "GFI/AUX C.B.",
shall be a single pole automatic trip, short delay and trip
indicating type, rated at 15 amperes at 125 VAC.
4.2.3 The switch pack breakers shall consist of 4 single pole 15
ampere circuit breakers with an Auxiliary Switch Feature
and Medium Trip Delay Characteristic (Carlingswitch A
Series or equal). The four breakers shall be wired per the
line Diagrams Figures located at the end of this
specification(Fig 13.16 & 13.17). The auxiliary circuits
shall be wired in parallel so that any tripped breaker
shall energize the Mercury Contactor Coil or Solid State
Relay . The breakers auxiliary contacts shall be rated at 5
amperes (min) at 120 VAC (min). These breakers shall be
labeled "Signal Head C.B.". Each switch pack shall receive
power from one breaker and in the following manner:
S.P. 1, 2, 13, 14 : C.B. #1
S.P. 3, 4, 15 ,16 : C.B. #2
S.P. 5, 6, 11, 12 : C.B. #3
S.P. 7, 8, 9, 10 : C.B. #4
4.2.4 The main circuit breaker, labeled "Main C.B." shall be a
single pole automatic trip, short delay and trip indicating
type, rated for 30 amperes. However, the cabinet wiring
shall be rated for 40 amperes. The electrical service shall
be connected to the main breaker using a setscrew type
plated lug. This lug shall be capable of accepting wire
sizes in the range of AWG # 4 to AWG 14 gauge. The lugs
mounting method to the breaker shall include provisions to
prevent the lug from turning when torqued. The lug shall
also be positioned so that its opening faces the bottom of
the cabinet. The bottom of the PDA unit shall be open
directly below the lug to facilitate the insertion/removal
Page |-140-
NYS TMS- October 2, 2014
of the service wire.
4.3 Receptacles
4.3.1 The equipment receptacle in the PDA shall be a duplex type,
rated for 15 amps, and have a ground fault circuit
interruption as defined in the National Electrical Code.
4.3.2 Two duplex type Traffic Controller receptacles, rated for
15 amps, shall be provided. One shall be located in the top
right rear corner of the cabinet housing the other in the
rear of upper right hand corner of the area shown as
Traffic Controller Area in the 330SR Cabinet Details Figure
(See Fig 13.10.1 and Fig 13.10.2). Both receptacles shall
be mounted in a grounded metal enclosure in such a way that
connections to the receptacle are not exposed and that no
shock hazard is present.
4.3.3 AC+ and AC- of both controller receptacles shall be tied to
the series portion of the power line surge protector
through PDA3 and via a shielded cable, Belden No. 83336 or
equal. The earth ground (green) wire and shield leader of
the cable shall be directly connected to the cabinet earth
ground bus bar.
4.4 An integrated series and parallel hybrid power line surge
protector (EDCO NO. SHA 1210 or Equal) shall be installed as
shown on the one line diagram. The surge protector shall be
capable of reducing the effect of Transient voltages applied
to the AC line. Gas-discharge devices shall not be used in the
protector. The surge protector shall attach to the appropriate
bus bars through #6 AWG wires.
4.4.1 The protector shall meet or exceed the following
specifications.
Normal Mode Surge Protection (Line to Neutral)
Peak Current 20KAmps (8x20 msec wave shape)
Life Test 5X maximum voltage clamp change before and
after 25 20KAmp surges (8x20 msec wave shape)
Clamp Voltage 300 Volts Max at 20KAmp surge
Response Time Voltage across device never exceeds 300V
during surge
Common Mode Surge Protection Neutral to Earth Ground
Clamp Voltage 700 Volts may at 20KAmp maximum (8x20 msec
Page |-141-
NYS TMS- October 2, 2014
wave shape)
Operating Characteristics
Temperature Range -40 to 185 Fahrenheit
Continuous Service
Current 10Amps maximum at 120VAC 60Hz through
Series Filter
MIL-STD 220 Insertion loss Specification for Series Filter
Frequency of Applied Signal Insertion loss (db)
60Hz 0
10KHz 34
50KHz 55
100KHz 76
500KHz 76
2MHz 68
5MHz 58
10MHz 58
20MHz 63
b) Protector must be epoxy-encapsulated in a flame-
retardant material and enclosed in the PDA.
c) The line surge protector shall be wired in on the load
side of the main circuit breaker. Wiring to and from the
surge protector shall be kept as short as possible and
shall be routed separate from all other PDA wiring.
4.5 The Solid State Relay shall be normally closed and capable of
switching 50 amperes at 120 volts AC.
4.6 A "Signal-Flash" Switch so labeled shall be provided on the
power distribution assembly. This switch, when placed in the
"Flash" position (down) shall energize the mercury contactor
coil or Solid State Relay. See line wiring Diagrams Figures
located at the end of this specification (Fig 13.16 & 13.17).
When the switch is placed in the "Signal" (up) position, the
processor unit shall resume control via the switch pack
outputs to the field.
4.7 The FLASH RELAY, FR, contacts shall be of silver alloy designed
for 1/4 to 10 amp loads at 120 VAC and shall be rated for the
following:
Page |-142-
NYS TMS- October 2, 2014
- insulation resistance greater than 1500 megohms,
- life expectancy greater than 100,000 operations,
- dielectric breakdown 1500 VAC RMS 60Hz other than
contact element
4.8 All electrical connections within the PDA shall be either
solder connections, self-locking connectors or made with a
screw and lock nut.
4.9 The entire inside area of the PDA removable cover (top and
side) shall be covered with an insulating material that has an
opaque appearance to prevent contact between the metal cover
and live terminals in the PDA when removing or replacing the
cover.
4.10 Cabinet wiring shall be in accordance with the Line Diagrams
shown in Figs 13.16 and 13.17.
5. Conflict Monitor Module Rack
5.1 The conflict monitor module described elsewhere in this
specification shall be mounted in this rack as shown in the
330SR Cabinet Details Figure (Fig 13.10.1) at the end of this
chapter and be readily serviceable without special tools. The
rack shall contain sufficient vent holes to provide for air
circulation around the monitor module.
5.2 Card guides shall be provided to guide and support the printed
circuit board of the monitor module.
5.3 A rigidly supported printed circuit board edge connector,
having two rows of 28/56 interdependent bifurcated gold plated
contacts on 0.156” centers, shall be provided. The connector
shall mate with the monitor unit described elsewhere in these
specifications. This connector shall not be supplied with a
key.
5.3.1 The connector shall meet or exceed the following
requirements:
Operating Voltage :600 volts AC (RMS)
Current Rating :5 amperes
Insulation Resistance :500 megohms
Contact Material :copper alloy plated with 0.000050”
of nickel and 0.000015” or
greater of gold on top of nickel
Page |-143-
NYS TMS- October 2, 2014
Board Thickness :0.059” to 0.066”
Contact Resistance :0.006 ohms
5.4 A normally open 24 VDC relay, designated “FR” and mounted in
the Power Distribution Assembly (PDA), shall be provided to
reverse the relay logic of the monitor module. Servicing the relay
shall not require any special tools other than a screwdriver and
the relay shall be provided with a retaining clip or spring.
5.4.1 Relay Connections. The coil of the relay shall be wired in
series with both the door switch and pins 24 and 25 of the
conflict monitor. Conflict Monitor Pin 25 shall be wired to
DC ground inside of the cabinet shell and then connected to
Pin 1 of connector PDA 2. Conflict Monitor Pin 24 shall be
connected to Pin 2 of PDA 2. The door switch connections
shall be connected to Pins 11 and 12 of connector PDA 3.
The relay will receive its 24 VDC supply from Pin 5 of PDA
4. For legacy purposes 24VDC shall also be provided to pin
5 of PDA 2 (See Line Diagram Figures for schematic of this
circuit and List of Connections between PDA and Cabinet
Shell in this Section for connections into the PDA for Pins
24 and 24 of the Conflict Monitor and the Door Switch).
5.5 Door Switch. The door switch mentioned above shall function
and have the features described in this paragraph.
5.5.1 Closing of the front cabinet door with the monitor unit
removed shall cause the intersection to go into flashing
operation. The cabinet shall contain a conspicuous warning
against operation with the monitor unit removed.
5.5.2 The door switch shall be a single pole, single throw switch
rated at 5 amperes, 120 volts, with contact material of
either silver or coin silver
5.5.3 The door switch for the conflict monitor shall be mounted
on the Conflict Monitor/Fluorescent Light/“Open Door”
Switch Bracket and and labeled “CMS” directly on the
bracket. The switch assembly/bracket shall be mounted in
the upper right front corner of the cabinet and mounted so
that this bracket does not interfere with installation of
a Traffic Controller on the removable shelf.
Page |-144-
NYS TMS- October 2, 2014
5.6 The stop timing output of the conflict monitor shall go to pin
65 of the C1 connector.
6. Load Rack (Output File – Switchpacks 1 – 14 and Flasher)
The load rack shall mate with the solid-state switch pack and
flasher described elsewhere. It shall be located as shown in the
330SR Cabinet Detail Figure at the end of this chapter. It shall be
capable of containing fourteen switch packs, one flasher, seven
flash transfer relays, fourteen programming plugs to select
emergency flashing output on each switch pack, and a conflict
monitor. A shelf shall be provided in the rack to support the
installed switch packs and flasher unit. Dimensional spacing
between the Switchpacks and Flasher shall be as shown in the
Switchpack Rack Spacing (Swpks 1 – 14) Fig-13.4a.
6.1 On the primary side of the flasher there shall be a 15
ampere MDL type time delay fuse. Fuses shall be readily
serviceable without special tools and live parts shall be
covered. Fuses shall be located on the power distribution
assembly. Additional flashers will require additional fusing.
6.2. The required number of solid-state switch packs and
flasher shall be housed within a rack.
6.3. The rack shall comply with outline connector mounting
dimensions in the Fig-13.4a below. A means to support and
retain the switch packs and flasher shall be provided.
6.4. Each rack shall be completely equipped and wired for the
required complement of solid-state switch packs and a flasher,
so that no additional hardware or wiring to the rack is
required.
6.5. The load rack shall have a continuous white vinyl,
writable label located below the switch packs. The label shall
be printed with the switch pack locations (E.g. SP1,SP2-SP14),
leaving room for any field crew markings.
7.0 Load Rack (Output File –Switchpacks 15 and 16)
The load rack shall mate with the solid-state switch pack
described elsewhere. It shall be located in the area between
the input file and cabinet drawer as shown in the 330SR Cabinet
Detail Figure at the end of this chapter. This area shall be
enclosed on four sides – rear, right, left and bottom and
Page |-145-
NYS TMS- October 2, 2014
shall have the typical height and width opening dimensions
shown in Fig 13.4b. The switchpacks will rest on the bottom
side of the enclosed area when installed. The outputs of these
switchpacks will not be switched through flash transfer relays.
Both the green and yellow outputs will be connected directly to
their output terminals and the appropriate input terminals on
the Conflict Monitor connector. The red outputs directly to
their output terminals and to the appropriate connections on
the Red Monitor Interface specified herein. Dimensional Spacing
between the two connectors for these two switchpacks shall be
as shown in the Switchpack Rack Connector Spacing (Swpks 15-16)
figure, Fig 13.4b. The positions of the Switchpacks 15 and 16
shall be labeled as SP15, SP16. The labels can be placed right
above the mating female connectors.
Fig 13.4a Switchpack Rack Connector Spacing (Swpks 1-14)
1.1"
2"
2.1"
2.0"
(+/-) 0.025"
0.9"
Page |-146-
NYS TMS- October 2, 2014
3 5/8" TYP
10 ¾” TYP
SWP 15 SWP 16
1"
15/16"
Fig 13.4b Switchpack Rack Connector Spacing (Swpks 15-16)
8.0 Flash Transfer Relay
Electromechanical or solid-state relays may be used for opening
and closing traffic signal field circuits. These shall be rated
for constant duty.
8.1 Relays used for this purpose shall be enclosed with a
Page |-147-
NYS TMS- October 2, 2014
removable clear plastic cover.
8.2 All contact points which make, break, and carry current
to the signal lamps shall be of silver-cadmium, coin silver
or superior alternative material. Contacts shall be capable
of making, breaking, and carrying a current of 20 amperes,
120 volts, without undue pitting. 120-volt AC relay coils
shall be used and shall have a power consumption of 10 volt
amperes or less and shall be designed for continuous duty.
8.3 The transfer relay shall withstand potential of 1500
volts at 60 hertz between insulated parts and between current
carrying parts and grounded and non-current carrying parts.
8.4 Each flash transfer relay shall have a one cycle surge
rating of 175 amperes RMS (247.5 amperes peak).
8.5 Each transfer relay shall be unaffected by electrical
noise, having a rise time of up to 200 volts per microsecond.
Each relay shall be unaffected by the 500 volt power noise
transient test when the dv/dt herein specified is not
exceeded.
8.6 The flash transfer relay shall transfer field signal
light circuits (for switch packs 1 through 14) from the
processor unit to flasher and shall permit flashing lights as
programmed on the main street or highway and on the cross
street or streets. Operation of the flash transfer relay
circuit shall not prohibit the operation of the processor,
but shall prohibit operation of the field signal light
circuits by the processor. The flash transfer relays shall
not be energized when the signal is operating in the 3-color
mode.
8.7 The flash transfer relay shall be Midtex part no.
136-62T200 or equal, and shall be provided with a connector
Cinch Jones, type #P-408-SB or equal and mate with Cinch
Jones, type #S-408-SB or equal(see Fig-13.5).
Page |-148-
NYS TMS- October 2, 2014
Fig 13.5 Flash Transfer Relay
9.0 Flasher Programming
A programming means shall be provided to alter whether flashing
yellow, flashing red or absence of flash (white plug) appears
on the output field terminals of Switchpacks 1 thru 14. Flasher
programming shall be provided by way of a Molex type 1375
receptacle without locking detents, and mate with a Molex type
1375 plug. Six (6) Red, four (4) Yellow, and four (4) white
programming plugs shall be provided (see Fig-13.6). Flash
programming shall be in compliance with the following:
9.1 Red programming plugs shall contain three (3) jumper
wires connecting pins 9 and 15, 1 and 3, 7 to 13.
9.2 Yellow programming plugs shall contain three (3)
jumper wires connecting pins 1 and 7, 3 and 9, 13
7
5
3
1
8
6
4
2
PIN# CIRCUIT
8
7
6
5
1
2
3
4
COIL
COIL
Normal Closed CKT #1
Normal Closed CKT #2
COMMON CKT #1
COMMON CKT #2
Normal Open CKT #1
Normal Open CKT #2
Page |-149-
NYS TMS- October 2, 2014
and 15.
9.3 White programming plugs shall contain two (2) jumper
wires connecting pins 1 and 3, 13 and 15.
9.4 Programming plug jumper wires shall be 14 AWG wire.
Fig 13.6 Flash Programming Plug
10.0 Switchpack -- Flasher Interconnection
The following Table shall determine the interconnection between
the Solid-State Flasher and the switch packs. Each switch pack
shall be assigned to one of the two Solid-State Flasher load
circuits as follows:
Load Load
Circuit #1 Circuit #2
S.P. 1 S.P. 4
S.P. 2 S.P. 5
S.P. 3 S.P. 6
S.P. 8 S.P. 7
S.P. 9 S.P. 11
S.P. 10 S.P. 12
FRONT VIEW
1
4
7
10
13
3
6
9
12
15
Page |-150-
NYS TMS- October 2, 2014
S.P. 13 S.P. 14
11. Red Conflict Monitor Interface.
11.1 Each cabinet shall be supplied with a Red Conflict Monitor
interface. This interface shall be a 20 Pin Ejector Header connector
with Gold Plated pins - 0.1 X 0.1 inch Grid pin arrangement with
locking latches. The function of this connector is to make available
the Red Switchpack outputs of the Model 330SR Cabinet, Red Enable
Input and Chassis Ground to the front panel connector of a Model
210NYR Red Monitoring type Conflict Monitor for processing of these
signals. Location of this connector will be in the area between the
input file and cabinet drawer and located on the right side of this
area- see 330SR Cabinet Details figure for location of the
connector.
Pin functions of this connector are as follows.
Connector Designation: CCS
PIN OUTS/FUNCTIONS/CONNECTIONS FOR CCS
Pin No Function/Connection Pin No Function/Connection
1 Swpk Red Output 15 11 Swpk Red Output 9
2 Swpk Red Output 16 12 Swpk Red Output 8
3 Swpk Red Output 14 13 Swpk Red Output 7
4 Chassis Ground 14 Swpk Red Output 6
5 Swpk Red Output 13 15 Swpk Red Output 5
6 NC 16 Swpk Red Output 4
7 Swpk Red Output 12 17 Swpk Red Output 3
8 NC 18 Swpk Red Output 2
9 Swpk Red Output 10 19 Swpk Red Output 1
10 Swpk Red Output 11 20 *Red Enable
*Red Enable shall be connected to the connection that supplies AC+
Page |-151-
NYS TMS- October 2, 2014
to the Conflict Monitor – Pin FF of the Conflict Monitor Connector.
11.2 The Red Conflict Monitor Interface shall be supplied with a
standard ribbon cable of the appropriate length, and with the
necessary connectors, to connect the Red Monitor Interface to the
Red Interface Connector of the Model 210NYR Conflict Monitor
specified herein. This cable shall be routed on the right side of
the cabinet (close to the mounting rail). To hold the ribbon cable
in place, cable clips shall be used to support the cable to the side
of the cabinet. The cable shall also be protected by braided,
expandable sleeving, SPC Brand #8465-0231 or approved equal, to
within 1.5 inches of either end. The lower end of the cable shall
be secured by a nylon cable clamp, Panduit Brand, #CCS31-S8-M, or
approved equal and be attached by the shell mounting bolt located
above the PDA assembly. One UV rated plastic wire tie shall be
installed at each end of the sleeving and one immediately above the
cable clamp. The length of the cable after the lower attachment
point specified above shall be approximately 5 inches. The purpose
of this cable length is so that the cable has to be removed from the
conflict monitor before the monitor can be fully removed from it’s
mounting enclosure.
11.2.1 To further protect the monitor from accidentally shorting to
ground upon removal, the entire left side interior of the conflict
monitor enclosure shall be covered with an insulating material that
has an opaque appearance similar to that used on the PDA cover. This
material shall wrap around and cover the front right mounting
bracket of the 24vdc supply.
SECTION III
MISCELLANEOUS
1. Harness Wiring
1.1 All cabinet wiring harnesses shall be neat, firm and routed
to minimize cross talk and electrical interference. Printed
circuit motherboards may be used to eliminate or reduce
cabinet wiring.
Page |-152-
NYS TMS- October 2, 2014
1.1.1 Wiring containing AC shall be routed and bundled
separately by function, or shielded separately by
function, from all low voltage control circuits.
1.1.2 All electrical connections on the back of the cabinet rack
shall be soldered or made with locking type connectors.
1.2 All conductors and live terminals or parts, which could be
hazardous to maintenance personnel, shall be covered with
suitable insulating material (preferably white vinyl).
1.3 Within the cabinet wiring, the DC ground and earth ground
shall be electrically isolated from the AC neutral by 500
megohms.
1.4 Conductors within the cabinet between the AC service
terminals and the switch pack circuit breakers, including the
switch pack circuit breakers and signal light neutral, shall
be rated so as to withstand short circuits on any field output
line without any detectable deterioration.
1.5 Two (2) twenty (20) terminal plated solid copper or
brass bus bars with through pressure (screw) connectors
shall be provided on the floor of the cabinet housing.
These bus bars shall be capable of accepting wire sizes in
the range of AWG #6 to AWG #16 gauge. Each bus bar shall be
supplied with a plated copper or brass lug capable of
accepting an AWG # 4 to AWG #14 gauge wire. The lug shall
be connected to one terminal of each bus bar and be UL
approved, and marked as such, for connection to either
copper or aluminum wire.
1.5.1 One (1) bus bar shall function as an AC minus (common)
bus bar. This bus bar shall be located on the front side
of the (closest to the cabinet door) cabinet floor and
positioned parallel to the cabinet door. The bus bar
shall be securely mounted to and electrically isolated
from the floor of the cabinet. The other bus bar shall
function as an AC chassis (earth ground) bus bar. This
bus bar shall be securely fastened, mechanically and
electrically, to the floor of the front of the cabinet
and be parallel to and behind the AC neutral bus bar.
1.5.2 A six inch(6”)long AWG # 6 wire shall be included to
bond the neutral and the ground bas bar together when
necessary. This wire shall be placed in the document
drawer in a clear plastic bag labeled “To be installed
between the ground and neutral bus bars when this
Page |-153-
NYS TMS- October 2, 2014
cabinet is used as a Service Entrance Disconnect”.
1.5.3 Seventeen (17) terminal bus bar shall function as an AC
chassis (earth ground) bus bar. This bus bar shall be
securely fastened to the floor of the cabinet and
located near the front, parallel to the AC neutral bus
bar.
1.6 The C1 connector harness shall be made in length so that it
extends at least 20” in front of the cabinet pull out drawer
when the drawer is closed. In addition, to prevent the C1
connector from falling between the cabinet rack and cabinet
housing, a section of polyethylene foam pipe insulation, or
an equal type component, shall be placed around the
cabinet’s C1 harness. The section of insulation used shall
have an inside diameter of 0.75 inches, a wall thickness of
0.375 inches and be approximately 8 inches in length. The
end of the insulation shall be placed approximately 3 inches
from the C1 connector and secured to harness cable using two
plastic tie wraps approximately 2 inches from each end of
the insulation section.
2. Terminal Blocks
2.1 All terminal blocks specified in this paragraph shall be
rotation resistant square type terminals to prevent the
terminals from loosening if excess torque is applied to the
terminals (Magnum A4000 Series or equal).
2.2 Seven (7) terminal blocks, for Switchpacks 1 thru 14 and
Detector Inputs 1 thru 28, located as shown in the 330SR
Cabinet Details Figure at the end of this chapter, shall be
one-position, fourteen pole, feed-through, barrier type.
2.3 A one –position, six pole, feed-through, barrier type
terminal block located to the right of the 24 VDC supply
cabinet connector shall be provided for switchpacks 15 and
16 (See 330SR Cabinet Details Figure)
2.4 Terminal blocks used for field wiring connections (field
terminals) shall be rated for 20 amperes RMS and be capable
of securing conductors with a 8-32 or larger soft nickel
plated brass binder head screw.
2.5 A one-position, three-pole, feed through barrier type
terminal block shall be located to the right of the output
Page |-154-
NYS TMS- October 2, 2014
terminal block for switchpacks 15 and 16 and as shown the in
the 330SR Cabinet Details Figure, Fig-13.10.1, to provide
spare AC+ ,and AC- and AC Ground. This shall be fused from
the equipment breaker in the power distribution assembly.
These three terminals shall be provided with a plastic
shield and shall be labeled "AC+, AC-" and AC Ground.
2.6 Field wiring terminal blocks shall be labeled as shown
below:
FIELD WIRING TERMINAL BLOCK
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
SP1R SP5G SP1OY 1A 8A 15A 22A
SP1Y SP6R SP1OG 1B 8B 15B 22B
SP1G SP6Y SP11R 2A 9A 16A 23A
SP2R SP6G SP11Y 2B 9B 16B 23B
SP2Y SP7R SP11G 3A 10A 17A 24A
SP2G SP7Y SP12R 3B 10B 17B 24B
SP3R SP7G SP12Y 4A 11A 18A 25A
SP3Y SP8R SP12G 4B 11B 18B 25B
SP3G SP8Y SP13R 5A 12A 19A 26A
SP4R SP8G SP13Y 5B 12B 19B 26B
SP4Y SP9R SP13G 6A 13A 20A 27A
SP4G SP9Y SP14R 6B 13B 20B 27B
SP5R SP9G SP14Y 7A 14A 21A 28A
SP5Y SP1OR SP14G 7B 14B 21B 28B
3. Connectors are described elsewhere in the Specification.
4. Pull-out Drawer
4.1 A pull-out, hinged-top drawer, having sliding tracks, and
quick-disconnect feature, or equivalent -- shall be
provided as shown in the cabinet drawings. The pull-out
drawer shall extend a minimum of 13” order to facilitate
removal of the controller by providing the controller with
an aluminum platform. It shall be possible to lift this
hinged platform in order to gain access to the interior of
the drawer. Minimum interior dimensions of the drawer shall
be 1” high, 12” deep, and 16” wide. The drawer shall be
capable of supporting a 40 lb controller when fully
Page |-155-
NYS TMS- October 2, 2014
extended. The drawer slides shall not extend past the rear
edge of the cabinet shell. The drawer shall not latch in
the fully extended position.
5. Cabinet Wiring Diagrams
Two (2) sets of cabinet wiring diagrams and equipment layout
shall be supplied with each cabinet. The diagrams shall be
non-proprietary and shall identify all circuits in such a manner
as to be readily interpreted. These diagrams shall be placed
within the pull-out hinged-top drawer.
6. Cabinet Line Diagrams
6.1 Line Diagrams (Figs 13.16 and 13.17) show the electrical
interrelationship between the various components described
in the 330SR specification.
7. Conflict Monitor Reset Line
7.1 A conflict monitor reset line shall be provided in the
cabinet to facilitate automatic testing of Conflict
Monitors in each cabinet. A circuit shall be provided from
connector C1 - PIN 97 to the conflict monitor reset line,
Pin Z of the monitor connector, through a standard three
(3) conductor 0.250” diameter plated conductor stereo phone
jack. The connection will be made when a mating plug with
the tip and ring shorted together is inserted into the
jack. The jack shall be labeled ACFM Reset@ and be isolated
from chassis ground. No part of the jack shall be made of
plastic.
8. Relay Transient Protection
8.1 All AC relays used in the cabinet shall have a series
resistor-capacitor snubber network, with an AC voltage
rating of at least 400 Vrms, placed across their coils.
This network shall be designed to suppress the high voltage
transients generated by the relay coil. The parallel
combination of the six flash transfer relays shall have
only one of these networks. All DC relays shall have diodes
placed across their coils to suppress switching transients.
9. Cabinet Rack Removable Access Panel Cover
Page |-156-
NYS TMS- October 2, 2014
9.1 A removable panel 8” wide by 6” long shall be provided in
the bottom left-hand side of the cabinet rack. This side
panel shall be held in place by four removable screws
located in each corner of the plate. A 4”X7” access
opening, located under the cover, shall be provided.
10. C1 Connector Harness Wiring
10.1 The C1 connector shall be an AMP connector block (See Fig-
13.9) with T-Handle, Part No. 201692-4, or equivalent. It shall
be supplied with a Pin Hood (AMP No. 202119-2 or equal), a 45
Fig- 13.7 C1 Connector Block Dimensions
Deg. outlet shield with cable clasp (AMP No. 202110-1 or
equal), guide pins (AMP No. 202173-5 or equal) and guide
sockets (AMP No. 204099-2 or equal). The guide pins shall
be installed in connector holes B & C, the guide sockets
installed in connector holes A & D. The harness wires shall
exit the shield on the B-D end of the C1 connector
10.2 The C1 connector harness shall be wired as shown in Table
13.1 below.
TABLE 13.1
C1 CONNECTOR WIRING
Cl-PIN# PORT#-BIT I/O FUNCTION C1-PIN# PORT#-BIT I/O FUNCTION
1 DC GND - OUTPUT GND 53 1002-7 I DETECTOR #15
2 1001-1 O SW1-RED 54 1002-8 I DETECTOR #16
3 1001-2 O SW1-GRN 55 1003-1 I DETECTOR #17
4 1001-3 O SW2-RED 56 1003-2 I DETECTOR #18
C A
D B
2.5
"
2.8
75
"
2.50"
0.875"
Corner Guides
C1P - Pins B & C - Sockets A and D
1"1.125"
Page |-157-
NYS TMS- October 2, 2014
5 1001-4 O SW2-YEL 57 1003-3 I DETECTOR #19
6 1001-5 O SW2-GRN 58 1003-4 I DETECTOR #20
7 1001-6 O SW3-RED 59 1003-5 I DETECTOR #21
8 1001-7 O SW3-YEL 60 1003-6 I DETECTOR #22
9 1001-8 O SW3-GRN 61 1003-7 I DETECTOR #23
10 1002-1 O SW4-RED 62 1003-8 I DETECTOR #24
11 1002-2 O SW4-GRN 63 1004-5 I Door Open Alarm
12 1002-3 O SW5-RED 64 1004-6 I N.C.
13 1002-4 O SW5-YEL 65 1004-7 I CUR/CON.MON.STOP TIME
14 DC GND - OUTPUT GND 66 1004-8 I POLICE FLASH
15 1002-5 O SW5-GRN 67 1005-1 I DETECTOR #25
16 1002-6 O SW6-RED 68 1005-2 I DETECTOR #26
17 1002-7 O SW6-YEL 69 1005-3 I DETECTOR #27
18 1002-8 O SW6-GRN 70 1005-4 I DETECTOR #28
19 1003-1 O SW7-RED 71 1005-5 - N.C.
20 1003-2 O SW7-GRN 72 1005-6 - N.C.
21 1003-3 O SW8-RED 73 1005-7 - N.C.
22 1003-4 O SW8-YEL 74 1005-8 - N.C.
23 1003-5 O SW8-GRN 75 1006-1 - N.C.
24 1003-6 O SW9-RED 76 1006-2 - N.C.
25 1003-7 O SW9-YEL 77 1006-3 - N.C.
26 1003-8 O SW9-GRN 78 1006-4 - N.C.
27 1004-1 O SW10-RED 79 1006-5 - N.C.
28 1004-2 O SW10-GRN 80 1006-6 - N.C.
29 1004-3 O SW11-RED 81 1006-7 - N.C.
30 1004-4 O SW11-YEL 82 1006-8 - N.C.
31 1004-5 O SW11-GRN 83 1006-1 - N.C.
32 1004-6 O SW12-RED 84 1006-2 - N.C.
33 1004-7 O SW12-YEL 85 1006-3 O SW13-RED
34 1004-8 O SW12-GRN 86 1006-4 O SW13-YEL
35 1005-1 O SW4-YEL 87 1006-5 O SW13-GRN
36 1005-2 O SW10-YEL 88 1006-6 O SW14-RED
37 1005-3 O SW1-YEL 89 1006-7 O SW14-YEL
38 1005-4 O SW7-YEL 90 1006-8 O SW14-GRN
39 1001-1 I DETECTOR #1 91 1007-1 - SW16-YEL
40 1001-2 I DETECTOR #2 92 DC GND - OUTPUT GND
41 1001-3 I DETECTOR #3 93 1007-2 - SW16-RED.
42 1001-4 I DETECTOR #4 94 1007-3 - SW16-GRN
43 1001-5 I DETECTOR #5 95 1007-4 O DETECTOR RESET 17-22
44 1001-6 I DETECTOR #6 96 1007-5 O DETECTOR RESET 23-28
45 1001-7 I DETECTOR #7 97 1007-6 - CON MONITOR RESET*
46 1001-8 I DETECTOR #8 98 1007-7 - CUR MONITOR RESET*
47 1002-1 I DETECTOR #9 99 1007-8 - SW15-RED
48 1002-2 I DETECTOR #10 100 1005-5 O SW15-YEL
49 1002-3 I DETECTOR #11 101 1005-6 0 SW15-GRN
50 1002-4 I DETECTOR #12 102 1005-7 O DET. RESET CH 1-16
51 1002-5 I DETECTOR #13 103 1005-8 O WATCH DOG
52 1002-6 I DETECTOR #14 104 DC GND - INPUT GND
*Normally open
11. Shelf Cover
11.1 A permanent cabinet shelf cover as shown in Fig-13.8 below shall be
Page |-158-
NYS TMS- October 2, 2014
provided. The shelf cover shall be fabricated from a 14 gauge sheet aluminum. The angles associated with the bends in the shelf cover shall be such that it
prohibits the C1 connector/cable from sliding down between the shell and the
cabinet. Also measure shall be taken to prohibit the C1 connector/cable from
sliding down between the two sides of the shell and the cabinet.
11.2 To prevent the C1 connector and cable from falling between the cabinet
rack and cabinet housing, a section of polyethylene foam pipe insulation or an equal
type component shall be placed around the cabinet’s C1 harness cable. The section of
foam pipe insulation used shall have an inside diameter of ¾”, a wall thickness
dimension of 3/8”, and be approximately 8” in length. The end of the insulation shall be
placed approximately 3” from the C1 connector and secured to the harness cable using
two plastic tie wraps approximately 2” from each end of the section of foam insulation.
Page |-159-
NYS TMS- October 2, 2014
Transfer
Relay
Drawer
Switchpak 15 & 16 Area
Input File
Fl. Prgm. Blk
Terminal Block
PDA
Power
Supply
Fl. Prgm. Blk
Loadswitch
Loadswitch
Switch
Panel
12.5"
Front
SIDE VIEW
CFM Reset
Line Jack
1.2
5"
2.76
"
O.S T
O INS.
Traffic Controller area
Fig – 13.8 Shelf Cover 330SR Cabinet
Page |-160-
NYS TMS- October 2, 2014
Fig 13.9 Model 330SR Pole Mounted Cabinet Diagram.
12. Shipping Pallet Lag Screws:
The cabinet shall be fastened, with lag screws, to the
shipping pallet no longer than two inches wider than the
cabinet, measured from any side.
Weather-Resistant
Overhang.
Door Lock.
Door Handle
socket.
Police Door.
Louvered Air
Vents.
Bolted Hinges.
Lifting Eyes.
Page |-161-
NYS TMS- October 2, 2014
Traffic Controller
Area
P
D
A
AC+ Term
C
F
M
K1 K2 K3 K4 K5 K7K6
LS
8
LS
9
LS
10
LS
11
LS
12
LS
14
LS
13
LS
1
LS
2
LS
3
LS
4
LS
5
LS
7
LS
6FL (Back)
Traffic Controller
Area
DRAWER
Switchpack 15 & 16 Area
Switchpack
15 & 16
Area
24VDC
Power
Supply
Connector
2"
typFRONT VIEW
14 Position T/B
Flash
Programming
Block
*Cut out for
door lock
8.5
"
7"
EIA Holes
Center Line
Permanent Solid Cover
Swing out
Power Supply
Fastens to side
of monitor shield
14.8
75
"
Swing out
police panel.
(see detail "A")
BRACKET for
power supply
0.75" wide 0.1"
min. thickness
3.5
"5
.25"
10.2
5"
14"
Rack
Mounting
Holes
TOP VIEW
RED
MONITOR
&
BRACKETS
* THE CUT OUT FOR THE DOOR LOCK SHALL BE A MINIMUM OF 4" LONG
AND CENTERED ABOUT A POINT OF 21" FROM THE BOTTOM OF THE
RACK. THE DOOR STOP SHALL BE LOCATED ON THE CABINET HOUSING
IN THE CENTER OF THIS AREA.
EIA
Holes
Center
Line
20.75"
to
23"
From Bottom
Of Rack
DETAIL "A"
POLICE
SWITCH PANEL
(FRONT VIEW)
Transfer
Relay
Drawer
Switchpack 15 & 16 Area
Input File
Fl. Prgm. Blk
Terminal Block
PDA
Power
Supply
Fl. Prgm. Blk
Loadswitch
Loadswitch
Switch
Panel
12.5"
Front
SIDE VIEW
CFM Reset
Line Jack
Input File Area3
3.5
0"
*
* *
**
*
Represents rack mounting holes (3 pair minimum located in
both rack mounting ears and mounting rail). Holes located
1.5", 10.75" & 33.50" from bottom of Cabinet Shell.
*
Mounting
Studs
Cabinet shell mounting rail
Mounting
Studs
2.75"
Fig – 13.10.1 330SR Cabinet Details
Swp 15-16
S24CR
CCS24V TB.
Bypass
FUSE
Page |-162-
NYS TMS- October 2, 2014
Fan, Light & Controller Receptacle Area
EIA 19"
Rack
Rails (2)
Universal
Holespacing
this Length
(Both Rails)
Controller
Receptacle
Cabinet Shell
3 Threaded Holes for
Securing Cabinet Shell
to Rails -Holes Located
1.5", 10.75" & 33.625"
From Bottom of
Shell(Both Rails)
Cabinet
Mounting
Rails (2)
Switch
Bracket/
Assembly
Drawer
Removable Shelf
5½”
Fig 13.10.2 Internal Cabinet Layout
Controller
Receptacle
Page |-163-
NYS TMS- October 2, 2014
Cabinet Shell
Front of Shell
Police
Panel.
Sliding Plate.
6"
Hinge
Fig – 13.11 Police Panel Side View
Page |-164-
NYS TMS- October 2, 2014
Fig – 13.12 Cabinet Door Intake Vent - Inside View.
12"
PDA
Clearance
area.
Required 15.25 inch2 of
air flow
16.25"
1.625
1.75"
5"
16.375"
Page |-165-
NYS TMS- October 2, 2014
A
B
C
D
E
F
H
J
K
L
M
N
P
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
A
B
C
D
E
F
H
J
K
L
M
N
P
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
A
B
C
D
E
F
H
J
K
L
M
N
P
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
SLOT1 SLOT2 SLOT3
KEYDetector Reset
Input # 1A
Input # 1B
Output # 1 + ( Collector)
Output # 1 - (Emitter) *
Input # 2A
Input # 2B
Chassis Ground
AC +KEY
AC -
Input # 3A.
Input # 3B
Output 3 - (Emitter)
Input # 4A
Input # 4B
Output # 2 + (Collector)
Output 2 -(Emitter)
Output 4 + (Collector)
Output # 4 - (Emitter) *
NOTE: Connector pin functions are the same for all slots. Controller DC input Ground.*
+24 VDC Ground
+24 VDC
S
SS
SSS
S*
SSS
S
S*
SS*
S*
S
Output 3 + (Collector)
Fig – 13.13 Input Rack Wiring Diagram
Page |-166-
NYS TMS- October 2, 2014
41
½”
4"
7"
4"
4"
4"
1"
+/-0.4378"BOLT HOLERS-FOUR
CHANNEL BRACKET
PLATED OR ANODIZED
FRONT VIEW
CHANNEL BRACKET
TOP VIEW
STUDS SHALL BE
5/16"X1.25"
CHANNEL BRACKET
SIDE VIEW
Fig – 13.14 Cabinet Bolt Hole Locations and Channel Mounting Bracket details
¼” x 1” lg slots(typ.)
Page |-167-
NYS TMS- October 2, 2014
Fig - 13.15 Power Supply Detail
0.00
0.000.00
ACTUAL POWER SUPPLY MUST BE LOCATED WITHIN
THIS AREAHOLES FOR
MOUNTING
BOLTS
FRONT PANEL -FRONT VIEW
0.25"
SIDE
VIEW
ACTUAL
POWER
SUPPLY
MAXIMUM
AREA
*MINIMUM FRONT PANEL HEIGHT =
3.625"MAXIMUM FRONT PANEL HEIGHT =
4.375"
TOLERANCE = 1" +/-
5.5"
0.00
3.50"
3.625""
4.375""
1"13.25" 14.75" 15.25"
4.375""
3..625""
0..25""
4.375"
3.625"
HOLES FOR
MOUNTING
THUMBSCREWS.
3.062""
0.875"
0.500"
3.062"
0.875"
Page |-168-
NYS TMS- October 2, 2014
F-5
3 AMP FUSE
Fig – 13.16 3-Color Mode - Line Diagram
S24V CR Relay
SSR
Control
SWITCHPACKS 15-16
24 VDC. POWER SUPPLY
DETECTOR RACK
SWITCHPACKS
FLASH
RELAY
COIL
PARALLEL SURGE AND
SERIES FILTER
FAN / LIGHT
To PIN 4 of PDA # 3TO AUX AC POWER TERMINALS
DC
GROUND
DOOR
SWITCH
DOOR
CLOSED
PDA SIGNAL
FLASH SWITCH
FLASH RELAY
CONTACT
CONFLICT MONITOR
RELAY CONTACT
POLICE PANEL
MAIN AC+
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
SIGNAL ON / OFF
TO C1 PIN
#66
DC GROUND
ENERGIZED
IN NORMAL
3 COLOR
MODE
FLASHER
SWITCHPACKS 1-14
PROGRAMMING
PLUG
FLASH TRANSFER RELAY
(7 TOTAL)
FIELD
TERMINALS
SIGNAL
HEADS
SIGNAL
FLASH
AC+
AC-
F4
10 AMP. FUSE
CONTROLLER
RECEPTACLES (2)
EARTH
GROUND
24VDC
GFCI
15A CB
AC-
EARTH
GROUND
30 AMP MAIN BREAKER
F-1 15 AMP
FLASHER FUSE
SSR
Contactor
Output
AUX SW
SWITCHES
4-15 AMP WITH
AUX SWITCHS
# CONFLICT MONITOR INTERLOCK PIN
24 & 25 OF CONFLICT MONITOR
NOTE: DURING 3 COLOR MODE THE FLASH RELAY IS
ENERGIZED,MERCURY CONTACTOR IS DE-ENERGIZED
AND ALL FTR'S ARE DE-ENERGIZED
#
CONFLICT MONITOR
FLASH
TRANSFER
RELAY
CONFLICT
MONITOR
RELAY
COIL
SSR
INDSSR IND SW
S24V CR Bypass
FR
FR
Page |-169-
NYS TMS- October 2, 2014
24 VDC. POWER SUPPLY
DETECTOR RACK
SWITCHPACKS
FLASH
RELAY
COIL
PARALLEL SURGE AND
SERIES FILTER
TO PIN 4 of PDA # 3
TO AUX AC POWER TERMINALS
DC
GROUND
DOOR
SWITCH
DOOR
CLOSED
PDA SIGNAL
FLASH SWITCH
FLASH RELAY
CONTACT
CONFLICT MONITOR
RELAY CONTACT
POLICE PANEL
MAIN AC+
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
SIGNAL ON / OFF
TO C1 PIN #66
DC GROUND
ENERGIZED
IN NORMAL
3 COLOR
MODE
FLASHER
SWITCHPACKS 1-14
PROGRAMMING
PLUG
FLASH TRANSFER RELAY
(7 TOTAL)
FIELD
TERMINALS
SIGNAL
HEADS
SIGNAL
FLASH
AC+
AC-
F4
10 AMP. FUSE
CONTROLLER
RECEPTACLES (2)
EARTH
GROUND
24VDC
GFCI
15A CB
AC-
EARTH
GROUND
30 AMP MAIN
BREAKER
F-1 15 AMP
FLASHER FUSE
SSR
Contactor
Output
AUX SW
SWITCHES
4-15 AMP WITH
AUX SWITCHS
# CONFLICT MONITOR INTERLOCK PIN
24 & 25 OF CONFLICT MONITOR
NOTE: DURING CURRENT MONITOR FLASH MODE
CURRENT MONITOR RELAY CONTACT IS CLOSED
& MERCURY CONTACTOR IS ENERGIZED
#
FLASH
TRANSFER
RELAY
CONFLICT MONITOR
CONFLICT
MONITOR
RELAY
COIL
3 AMP
Fan / Light Fuse
Fig – 13.17 Flash Mode - Line Diagram
S24V CR Relay
SWITCHPACKS 15-16
S24V CR Bypass SW
SSR INDSSR IND SW
SSR
Control
FR
FR
170
NYS TMES – October 2, 2014
OFF ON
FLASH
Flasher
30AMP
15AMP
MAINGFIAUX
SIGNAL HEADS
15 AMP
SIDE
VIEW
TOLERANCE +/- 0.010"
SLOTS IN CABINET SHELL SHALL BE
PROVIDED TO ACCOMMODATE
MOUNTING TABS.
T
O
P
V
I
E
W
0.0
5.0" 4" 1"" 0.0 10" 8"" 7.50"" 3"" 2.5" 0.0
13.25"
12.625"
2.75"
0.375"
0.0
0.625"1"5.00"
0.0
1.75"
2.75"
7.75"
10"
Grommeted Access Hole For Main
Lug Screw.
fuse
fuse
Fan/Light
Controller
fuse
Fig – 13.18 PDA Drawing
VIEW
FRONTPush
Button
Neon
Lamp
Page | -171-
NYS TMES - October 2, 2014
8.5"
Front of Cabinet
Cut-out centered
on cabinet
width
Exterior Outside Surface
4"
8"
Fig - 13.19 Bottom View of Cabinet
CL
CL
12"
4.625" Hole
centered on Plate
CL
12"
12"
3.625" Hole
centered on Plate
CLCL
Fig – 13.20 Adaptor Plates
4"
of cabinet
1"
1"
Note: Hole location
dimensions
apply to all four
mounting holes
1"
1"
12"
Page | -172-
NYS TMES - October 2, 2014
Table 13.2 Input File to Cabinet Interface
P1 P2
Pin # Channel/Function Pin # Channel/Function
1 Input #1 B 1 Input #6 B
2 Input #1 A 2 Input #6 A
3 Detector Call #1* 3 Detector Call #6*
4 Input #2 B 4 Input #7 B
5 Input #2 A 5 Input #7 A
6 Detector Call #2* 6 Detector Call #7*
7 Input #3 B 7 Input #8 B
8 Input #3 A 8 Input #8 A
9 Detector Call #3* 9 Detector Call #8*
10 Input #4 B 10 Input #9 B
11 Input #4 A 11 Input #9 A
12 Detector Call #4* 12 Detector Call #9*
13 Input #5 B 13 Input #10 B
14 Input #5 A 14 Input #10 A
15 Detector Call #5* 15 Detector Call #10*
P3 P4 Pin # Channel/Function Pin # Channel/Function
1 Input #11 B 1 Input #16 B
2 Input #11 A 2 Input #16 A
3 Detector Call #11* 3 Detector Call #16*
4 Input #12 B 4 Input #17 B
5 Input #12 A 5 Input #17 A
6 Detector Call #12* 6 Detector Call #17*
7 Input #13 B 7 Input #18 B
8 Input #13 A 8 Input #18 A
9 Detector Call #13* 9 Detector Call #18*
10 Input #14 B 10 Input #19 B
11 Input #14 A 11 Input #19 A
12 Detector Call #14* 12 Detector Call #19*
13 Input #15 B 13 Input #20 B
14 Input #15 A 14 Input #20 A
15 Detector Call #15* 15 Detector Call #20*
* Denotes Collectors
Page | -173-
NYS TMES - October 2, 2014
Table 13.2 Input File to Cabinet Interface (Cont’d)
P5 P6 Pin# Channel/Function Pin# Channel/Function
1 Input #21 B 1 Input #26 B
2 Input #21 A 2 Input #26 A
3 Detector Call #21* 3 Detector Call #26*
4 Input #22 B 4 Input #27 B
5 Input #22 A 5 Input #27 A
6 Detector Call #22* 6 Detector Call #27*
7 Input #23 B 7 Input #28 B
8 Input #23 A 8 Input #28 A
9 Detector Call #23* 9 Detector Call #28*
10 Input #24 B 10 Detector Reset 17-22
11 Input #24 A 11 Detector Reset 23-28
12 Detector Call #24* 12 DC Ground
13 Input # 25 B 13 Detector Reset 1-16
14 Input #25 A 14 DC Ground
15 Detector Call #25* 15 +24VDC
* Denotes Collectors
P7
Pin# Channel/Function
2 AC Neutral
8 AC Earth Ground
14 AC+
Page | -174-
NYS TMES - October 2, 2014
CHAPTER 14 Detailed Specification on Flasher Cabinet
This specification defines the minimum requirements for a
Traffic Signal Cabinet to be used at locations where only a
flashing signal indication is needed. A Model 204 flasher
will be used in the cabinet to provide the flashing outputs to
the signal heads.
Page | -175-
NYS TMES - October 2, 2014
1. Flasher Receptacle and Harness Assembly
The flasher receptacle shall be mounted in the cabinet in a
permanent and rigid manner to allow easy insertion and removal
of the flasher unit. A means to support the flasher unit when
installed shall also be provided.
A harness assembly shall be provided for all electrical
connections into and out of the flasher unit. The assembly
shall be composed of five single conductors of 7 strand #14
gauge wire. The assembly shall connect to the flasher receptacle
at one end and shall be terminated at the other end with spade
terminals. The harness assembly conductors shall be clearly
identified and labeled as to their circuit function (see Pin
No./Circuit table below).
The harness assembly shall be wired to the flasher receptacle as
in the Fig 14.1 below:
Fig – 14.1 Harness Assembly to Flasher Receptacle
Wiring
PIN NO. CIRCUIT.
7
8
9
10
11
12
LOAD CKT #1
LOAD CKT #2
CHASSIS GND
AC COMMON
+AC
NOT CONNECTED
8
10
12
7
9
11
Page | -176-
NYS TMES - October 2, 2014
2. Cabinet
The cabinet shall be constructed of 0.125” thick aluminum type
5052-H32 and shall have the following interior dimensions:
Height Width Depth
18” 14” 10”
Tolerance for above dimensions: +/- 0.125”
Cabinet seams shall be welded in such a manner to insure that
the cabinet is structurally sound. All seams shall be weather
tight. The cabinet finish shall be natural and shall have the
following additional features and equipment:
2.1 Door. The main door of the cabinet shall include
substantially the full area of the front of the cabinet
and shall be furnished as a single full door. The door
shall be sealed to prevent moisture from entering the
cabinet with a closed cell neoprene gasket that is
securely cemented to the door. The mating surface of the
gasket shall be coated with a silicone lubricant to
prevent the gasket from sticking to the area contacted by
the gasket. The door hinge shall be a continuous type and
be made of 14 gauge stainless steel with a 0.125”
diameter steel hinge pin.
2.2 Mounting. The cabinet shall be furnished with two
mounting plates that are suitable for welding to steel
poles. These mounting plates shall be attached to the top
and bottom of the rear of the cabinet in a manner to
support the weight of the cabinet when mounted to the
pole. Mounting plates shall also be designed or provided
to allow the cabinet to be securely banded to or screwed
into a pole at two locations. The plates shall be
designed to accept an 0.5” lag screw and also have a
slot 1.00” long to accept 0.752” banding.
2.3 Ventilation. The cabinet shall provide adequate natural
ventilation to reduce the amount of heat buildup and be
designed to prevent the entrance of rain and snow.
2.4 Locks. The door lock shall be of the self-locking heavy
duty 5 pin tumbler cylinder rim type, not keyed to a
Corbin #2 standard (refer to lock spec for model 330SR
cabinet) and be provided with a keyhole cover for
Protection. The door when closed and locked will provide
an adequate seal to prevent the entrance of rain and snow
Page | -177-
NYS TMES - October 2, 2014
into the cabinet. Two keys shall be provided with each
cabinet.
2.5 Main Circuit Breaker. A 15 Amp circuit breaker shall be
rigidly mounted in the cabinet. The breaker shall be an
UL approved magnetic type. The breaker terminal that is
to be used to connect the incoming Main AC+ shall be
supplied with a single barrel copper lug with a slotted
set screw. The lug shall be capable of accepting a wire
range of between a No. 14 and No. 6 wire. The lug and set
screw shall be easily accessible so that the main AC+ can
easily be connected\disconnected from the breaker.
2.6 Convenience Outlet. A duplex type convenience outlet with
GFI protection shall be supplied and rigidly mounted in
the cabinet.
2.7 Ground Busses. Two Solid Platted Brass or copper ground
bus bars capable of accepting a wire range of between a
No. 14 and No. 6 wire shall be provided. The bus bars
shall have through type pressure (screw) connectors. The
AC- bus bar shall be 10 position minimum and be isolated
from chassis ground. The chassis bus bar shall be 4
position minimum and be connected directly to the
cabinet housing.
2.8 Terminal Block. A 20 AMP rms, double row, 10 terminal
minimum, barrier type terminal-block with shorting bars
between the rows shall be supplied and mounted securely
in the cabinet. The terminal block will be supplied with
8-32 nickel or cadmium plated brass binder head screws.
This terminal block will be used as an interface between
the signal head wiring and the flasher wiring.
2.9 Surge Protection. The cabinet shall be supplied with both
common mode (AC+ to chassis, AC- to chassis) and
differential mode (AC+ to AC-) surge protection to reduce
the effect of transients on the AC line. This protection
shall be connected to the load side of the main breaker.
The surge protection shall meet the following
requirements:
Continuous RMS Voltage - 150 VAC min.
Energy Dissipation Capability - 80 joules min
(10 by 1000 microsecond current waveform)
Maximum Clamping Voltage - 360 volts
Page | -178-
NYS TMES - October 2, 2014
(I = 100 amps 8 by 20 microsecond current waveform)
Peak Current Capability - 6500 amps min
(8 by 20 microsecond current waveform)
2.10 Conduit Hole\Knockout. A hole or knockout to accept a
1.50” electrical conduit shall be provided approximately
in the center of the floor of the cabinet.
3. Miscellaneous
3.1 Positioning of the electrical hardware in the cabinet
such as the terminal block, ground busses and main
breaker shall be done in a manner so that wiring going to
these devices can be easily connected/disconnected.
3.2 Lock washers shall be used on all bolts or studs securing
the back panel, door lock and door hinges.
CHAPTER 15 Detailed Specification on Model 330SR Cabinet Base
This specification describes the technical requirements for a
microcomputer traffic signal cabinet base for the Model 330SR
cabinet.
Page | -179-
NYS TMES - October 2, 2014
1. Description
The microcomputer traffic signal cabinet base shall be a sheet
aluminum base unit designed for use in mounting a NYS Model
330SR Microcomputer Traffic Signal Cabinet to a concrete pad for
base-mounted traffic signal installations.
The base shall be designed to be bolted to the base. Field
wiring, detector wiring, etc. are to be brought into and out of
the cabinet through the round hole in the top of the base.
This base has its overall size and bolt-hole locations in the
flange designed to allow it to be directly retrofitted over
certain concrete pads and anchor bolts existing in the field.
2. Material Requirements
The base shall be constructed of Grade 5052-H32 aluminum, with
full weld seams and shall conform in all respects to the
attached drawing.
The top plate of the base shall be constructed of 0.188”
aluminum and shall have one 8” hole cut into it, as shown on the
attached drawing.
The base plate of the cabinet shall be constructed of
0.187”aluminum and shall be constructed to form a flange with
the sides so that the bottom of the base is completely open.
Four 1.25” anchor bolt holes shall be cut into the base plate as
shown on the attached drawing.
The sides of the base shall be constructed of 0.188” aluminum. A
door shall be constructed in the front of the base by attaching
a piece of 0.25” aluminum inside the base to form a one in lip.
The door shall be constructed of 0.188” aluminum and shall fit
flush to the front of the base, against the lip. The door shall
be secured at the top and bottom with 0.25” allen screws.
A ½” - 13 NC hex nut to be used for grounding purposes shall be
welded to the inside of the front of the base (see drawing).
The base shall be untreated and unpainted aluminum.
Page | -180-
NYS TMES - October 2, 2014
Fig – 15.1 Model 330SR Cabinet Base
16”
22”
16 ”
3”
20” 28.75” 32”
4.375
13.25”
25.5”
3.25”
2.75”
12”
4” 6”
3.00”
10”
3.00”
0.5” TYP.
2” TYP.
1” TYP.
TWO-1/4”-20NC
1/2 “-13NC HEX NUT WELD
INSIDE
8.5”
Page | -181-
NYS TMES - October 2, 2014
CHAPTER 16 Detailed Specification on Auxiliary Input Cabinet
The intent of this specification is to provide the requirements
for an auxiliary input cabinet for the Model 330SR traffic
signal cabinet. This cabinet will provide additional inputs.
1. ENCLOSURE
See attached drawings for references to the specifications
listed below.
1.1 The enclosure shall be constructed of 0.125” thick
aluminum alloy type 5052-H32, with screened louvered vents,
Apex Enclosures Model TCSM261715 o approved equal. The
enclosure shall be rated NEMA 3R and the door lock shall be
a self-locking, heavy duty 5 pin rim type, and not keyed to
a Corbin #2 standard (refer to lock spec for model 330SR
cabinet)and be provided with a keyhole cover for
protection. Two keys shall be provided. The continuous door
hinge and pin shall be made from stainless steel and be
attached with stainless steel carriage bolts. Facing the
front of the enclosure, the door shall be hinged on the
left side.
1.2 A removable, aluminum inside back panel shall be provided
and mounted 1.5” off of the enclosure’s backplane in the
four corners with #8-32 stainless steel screws. The
approximate size of the panel shall be 25”H x 14.75”W. All
sockets, terminal blocks and wiring shall be attached to
this plate and the panel shall be easily removed as a
single unit with simple hand tools.
1.3 Facing the back of the enclosure a three inch conduit hole
shall be centered 5” from the bottom edge and 5” inches
from the left side. Facing the right side (opposite the
Page | -182-
NYS TMES - October 2, 2014
hinge side), a two inch conduit hole shall be centered 6”
inches from the top and 7” from the right edge. This 2”
conduit hole shall be supplied with an assembly that
consists of an aluminum “close nipple” and a weatherproof
type hub (Myers Hub Model ST-6 or approved equal) attached
to each end. The threads shall have waterproofing compound
applied.
1.4 A 12 inch wide “L-shaped” mounting bracket shall be
attached to the right side of the enclosure’s bottom plate.
It shall be attached to the enclosure with three (3) #10-32
stainless steel bolts and locking type nuts. The bracket
shall be constructed of 0.125” aluminum. (See attached
drawing for additional dimensions and placement)
The interconnect shall be made via a three inch conduit
between the back of the input cabinet and the base mount
assembly of the Model 330SR cabinet. A two inch conduit
between the right side of the input cabinet and the left
side of the Model 330SR cabinet shall provide a means to
connect to the controller and also the 24vdc power supply.
The input cabinet shall use a removable, standard Model
330SR cabinet input file assembly.
2. REMOVABLE BACK PLATE
2.1 Three vertical, 14 position terminal blocks (Magnum A4000
Series or approved equal) shall be located six (6) inches
down from the top edge and one and one half inches from the
right edge. The blocks shall be spaced one and one-quarter
(1¼) inches apart
2.2 A two inch conduit hole shall be centered five inches from
the top edge and four inches from the right edge. A three
inch conduit hole shall be placed in the lower right hand
corner and shall be centered on the back panel three inch
conduit hole. The edges of the holes shall have protective
covers.
Page | -183-
NYS TMES - October 2, 2014
2.3 Two 11.5”H x 5”W brackets spaced 17.5” apart shall be
placed four inches from the left edge of the back plate.
The brackets shall be constructed of 0.064” aluminum. These
brackets will be used to support a State provided, standard
NYS Model 330SR cabinet input file assembly and input
cards.
2.4 Five vertical sockets (Molex # 03-09-1154 or approved
equal) shall be installed between the mounting brackets,
centered and equally spaced.
2.5 A panel mounted fuse holder with a 3AG 2 amp SB fuse shall
be installed below TB10 to protect the 24vdc supply.
3. ELECTRICAL
3.1 A #24AWG, 25 conductor stranded cable (Belden #9543 or
approved equal) shall extend from the two inch conduit
assembly. The cable shall be 48” in length and one end
shall terminate with a circular plug (Amp #206305-1),
shell/ cable amp assembly (Amp #206138-1) and pins (Amp #1-
66099-4). The other end shall go through the two inch
conduit hole in the back plate and terminate as shown on
the “Aux. Input Cabinet Pin Assignment” page. This circular
plug will be designated as “C11P”.
3.2 A #16AWG, 2 conductor stranded cable (Belden #8780 or
approved equal) shall extend through the two inch conduit
holes. The cable shall be 60” in length and terminate in
the enclosure as shown on the “Aux. Cabinet Pin Assignment”
page. The other end shall terminate in a “Tee” arrangement
between a plug and a socket ( Molex #03-09-1157 and #03-09-
2158) as indicated on the “24vdc Pin Assignment” page,
located on the associated drawing.
3.3 All wiring between AUX S1- AUX S4 and terminal blocks
TB8, TB9 and TB10 shall be #16AWG, 2 conductor stranded,
twisted pair wire (Belden #8780 or approved equal).
3.4 A three position, double row terminal block shall be
placed on the rear of the removable back plate. This block
shall terminate the 24vdc supply and C11P ground wires.
4. LABELING
Page | -184-
NYS TMES - October 2, 2014
4.1 Starting at the bottom of the column of sockets, a label
shall be placed to the right of each one. They shall be
labeled as follows: AUX-S1 through AUX-S5.
4.2 The fuse holder shall be labeled as follows: 24VDC
Supply-2 Amp SB
4.3 From left to right, the three vertical terminal blocks
shall be labeled TB8, TB9 and TB10. Starting at the top,
TB8 shall be labeled as follows: 29A, 29B, 30A, 30B… and so
on. TB9 shall be labeled as follows: 36A, 36B, 37A, 37B…and
so on. TB10 shall be labeled as follows: 43A, 43B, 44A,
44B… and so on. The last two screws on TB10 shall be
labeled -24VDC and +24VDC. The labels shall be placed on
the left side of each terminal block.
4.4 The plug on the end of the 60” cable shall be labeled
“Cabinet 24vdc Socket”. The socket on the same end shall be
labeled “24vdc Supply”.
4.5 A label shall be placed on the removable backplate, under
the input file assembly as follows:
“INSTALLER: DO NOT USE THE FIFTH PLUG OR THE AC PLUG FROM
THE INPUT FILE ASSEMBLY”
AUXILIARY INPUT CABINET PIN ASSIGNMENTS
AUX C11P TB 8 AUX C11P TB9 AUX C11P TB10
S1-2 29A S2-8 36A S3-14 43A
S1-1 29B S2-7 36B S3-13 43B
S1-3 10 S2-9 18 S3-15 25
S1-5 30A S2-11 37A S4-2 44A
S1-4 30B S2-10 37B S4-1 44B
S1-6 11 S2-12 19 S4-3 26
S1-8 31A S2-14 38A S4-5 45A
S1-7 31B S2-13 38B S4-4 45B
S1-9 12 S2-15 20 S4-6 27
S1-11 32A S3-2 39A S4-8 46A
S1-10 32B S3-1 39B S4-7 46B
S1-12 13 S3-3 21 S4-9 28
S1-14 33A S3-5 40A S4-11 47A
Page | -185-
NYS TMES - October 2, 2014
S1-13 33B S3-4 40B S4-10 47B
S1-15 15 S3-6 22 S4-12 29
S2-2 34A S3-8 41A S4-14 48A
S2-1 34B S3-7 41B S4-13 48B
S2-3 16 S3-9 23 S4-15 30
S2-5 35A S3-11 42A
S2-4 35B S3-10 42B
S2-6 17 S3-12 24
AUX- S5 PIN ASSIGNMENTS
Pin # 12 – 24 volt D.C. Ground
Pin # 14 - C11P D.C. Grounds (Pins #9, #14, #31, #37)
Pin # 15 – 24 volt D.C. Positive
Page | -186-
NYS TMES - October 2, 2014
0.125" HOLE
(2 PLCS)
5"
1.50"
2.25"
2.5"
11.5"
Side View
* NOT TO SCALE
TOP VIEW-BOTTOM BRACKET
1.25"
Fig – 16.1 Input File Assembly Mounting Bracket
Page | -187-
NYS TMES - October 2, 2014
17.5"
WIRING TO
330 CABINET
AUX
S5
AUX
S4
AUX
S3
AUX
S2
AUX
S1
TB8 TB9 TB10
2 AMP
FUSE
FRONT VIEW
*WITHOUT MODEL 330 CABINET INPUT FILE
ASSEMBLY INSTALLED
Fig – 16.2 Removable Back Plate
Page | -188-
NYS TMES - October 2, 2014
Fig – 16.3 Pin Assignment for 24 Volt
Page | -189-
NYS TMES - October 2, 2014
**
3"
12"
2" 4" 4" 2"
AUX.
CAB
SIDE VIEW
** THIS DIMENSIONS EQUALS THE
LENGTH OF THE TWO INCH
HUB ASSEMBLY PLUS THREE INCHES
MODEL 330
CABINET
2" HUB ASSEMBLY
“L” BRACKET
SPACE EQUALLY
WITH 2' HUB
ASSEMBLY
3-¼” HOLES
FRONT VIEW
NOTE:
Dimensions are not in scale
END VIEW
Fig – 16.4 “L” Bracket Dimensions and Placement
Page | -190-
NYS TMES - October 2, 2014
NEW YORK STATE DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
TRANSPORTATION MANAGEMENT EQUIPMENT
SPECIFICATIONS (TMES)
Chapters 17
LED MODULES
&
PED LED COUNTDOWN TIMER
Page | -191-
NYS TMES - October 2, 2014
CHAPTER 17 Detailed Specification for LED Traffic Signal Modules
The purpose of this specification is to provide the minimum
performance requirements for the following LED Traffic Signal
Modules:
Circular Ball
Arrow - Single and Bi-Modal (Yellow and Green Arrow incorporated
into one unit)
Pedestrian - Single (Hand or Walking Person) and Bi-Modal (Hand
and Walking Person incorporated into one unit)
Countdown Pedestrian Signal – Single Unit and Ped/Countdown
Module (Hand and Walking Person with Countdown Pedestrian
Signal)
This specification refers to definitions and practices described
in “Vehicle Traffic Control Signal Heads” referred to in this
document as “VTCSH.” and “Pedestrian Traffic Control Signal
Indications”, referred to in this document as “PTCSI”, published
in the Equipment and Materials Standards of the Institute of
Transportation Engineers.
Ball and Single Arrow LEDs are specified in this specification
as either NYSDOT Standard or Type “A” - See Paragraph 5.0
(NYSDOT Standard LED Module Definitions) for detailed features.
Single Pedestrian, Bi-Modal Pedestrian, Countdown Pedestrian
Signals (Single Unit and Ped/Countdown Module) and Bi-Modal
Arrows are specified as Type “A” only.
All unit types designed to this specification shall be
Page | -192-
NYS TMES - October 2, 2014
operationally compatible with the traffic signal equipment that
each type is designed and intended to interface with. This
equipment includes all controllers, conflict monitors, current
monitors, switchpacks and flashers currently in use by the New
York State Department of Transportation.
1. Circular Ball Specifications
Circular Ball Modules shall be designed, built and tested per
the currently in effect ITE performance specification titled
“Vehicle Traffic Control Signal Heads: Light Emitting Diode
(LED) Circular Signal Supplement”. Minimum maintained luminous
intensity values shall be per Table 1 of the specification.
Circular Ball Modules shall also conform to the additions and
exceptions to specifications noted herein.
2. LED Arrow (Single And Bi-Modal) Specifications
Led Arrow Modules shall be designed, built and tested per the
currently in effect ITEs performance specification titled
“Vehicle Traffic Control Signal Heads: Light Emitting Diode
(LED) Vehicle Arrow Supplement”. Minimum maintained luminous
intensity values shall be per Table 3 (Omni Directional) of the
specification. The Single LED Arrow module shall be designed to
display an Arrow of either a Yellow or Green color. The Bi-
Modal LED Arrow module shall be designed to display both a
Yellow and Green Arrow in the same unit. Led Arrow Modules shall
also conform to the additions and exceptions to specifications
noted herein.
3. LED Pedestrian Signal Modules (Single and Bi-Modal) and
Countdown Pedestrian Signal Specifications
Led Pedestrian and Countdown Pedestrian Signal Modules shall be
designed, built and tested per the currently in effect ITE
performance specification titled “Pedestrian Traffic Control
Signal Indicators - Light Emitting Diode (LED) Signal Modules”.
Single LED Pedestrian Signal modules shall be designed to
display either a “HAND” or “WALKING PERSON”. Bi-Modal LED
Pedestrian Signal modules shall be designed to display both the
“HAND” and “WALKING PERSON” in the same module. Countdown
Pedestrian Signal Modules shall either be Single Units
displaying only digits for Pedestrian clearance timing or
Combination Units (Ped/Countdown Module) that include a Hand and
Walking Person Indication. Led Pedestrian and Countdown
Pedestrian Signal Modules shall also conform to the additions
Page | -193-
NYS TMES - October 2, 2014
and exceptions to specifications noted herein.
LED Pedestrian and Countdown Pedestrian Signal Modules shall be
designed as either having Message Bearing Surfaces of 12 inches
by 12 inches or 16 inches by 18 inches. Message Bearing Surfaces
for the Model Types are as follows:
12 inches by 12 inches – Single Hand, Single Walking Person,
Bi-Modal Hand/Walking Person and Single Unit Countdown
Pedestrian Signal
16 inches by 18 inches – Bi-Modal Hand/Walking Person and
Ped/Countdown Module (Hand and Walking Person with Countdown
Pedestrian Signal)
The 16 inch by 18 inch modules shall be built to the dimensions
shown below and fit into pedestrian signal housings of the
manufacturers listed.
Height
WIDTH
CORNER
RADIUS
FITS HOUSINGS DESIGNED BY
16 in
17.7 in
2.36 in
ICC, IDC & McCAIN
4.0 Additions and Exceptions to Specifications for All Modules
- except where noted
4.1 A one piece “U” shaped cross section rubber gasket or other
suitable means shall be provided with each module to insure a
weather tight fit between the door of the signal housing and the
module. The quality of gasketing supplied, and any method used
to adhere the gasketing to the module if the gasketing is
affixed to the module using adhesive, shall be such that the
gasketing and adhesion technique shall not appreciably
deteriorate over the life of the module when the module is used
in its intended application.
4.2 Wiring for electrical connections to the module shall be
terminated with insulated 0.250 inch female quick disconnect
push on terminals.
4.3 Each signal module shall be identified on the back side with
Page | -194-
NYS TMES - October 2, 2014
the following:
--- Manufacturer’s Name or Trade Mark and Manufacturer’s Model
- Number
--- Part number as shown in the NYS DOT’s LED Traffic Signal
- Module QPL
--- Serial number
--- Voltage rating
--- Power consumption (Watts and Volt-Ampere)
--- Vertical indexing indicator (i.e., “up arrow”, or the
word “UP” or “TOP”) if specific orientation of the module is
required.
--- Date of Manufacture (minimum information required -month &
year)
--- Single units shall have identification markings as to the
type and color of the module. Bi-Modals shall be marked with
module type.
4.4 All “Red” LED signals module lenses supplied to this
specification shall be tinted with the appropriate color to
enhance on/off contrast. The material used to tint the lens
shall not affect the luminous intensity or chromaticity and
shall be uniform across the face of the lens. The “Yellow” and
“Green” units shall be supplied with untinted lenses.
4.5 All wiring and terminal blocks shall meet the requirements
of Section 13.02 Wiring of the VTCSH standard. Each wire shall
be approximately 1 m long. All wiring shall be rated for use
over the temperature range of -40 deg F to +165 deg F. Under
normal handling of the module over the specified temperature
range, the wiring insulation shall not crack or fray along its
entire length.
Units shall be supplied with colored coded wires as defined
below:
Red Balls & Red Arrows - Red & White(Common)
Yellow Balls & Yellow Arrows - Yellow & White(Common)
Green Balls & Green Arrows - Brown & White(Common)
Bi-Modal Arrows - Brown(Green Arrow), Yellow(Yellow Arrow) &
White(Common)
Bi-Modal Pedestrians - Orange(Hand), Blue(Person)&
Page | -195-
NYS TMES - October 2, 2014
White(Common)
Single Pedestrians-Hand - Orange & White(Common)
Single Pedestrians-Walking Person - Blue & White (Common)
Countdown Pedestrian Signal (Single Unit and Ped/Countdown
Module) - Orange (Connection to Pedestrian Hand Switchpack
output),Blue (Connection to Pedestrian Walking Person Switchpack
output) & White(Common)
4.6 All modules shall contain filtering dedicated to prevent
inducing electronic noise into the AC power lines
4.7 Failed State Impedance. Failed State Impedance shall only be
required on the Circular Balls and Single Arrows supplied to
this specification. The Failed State Impedance shall be 1 Megohm
minimum across the input power leads.
4.8 Yellow Ball and Yellow Arrow Modules supplied to this
specification shall only be required to meet the Minimum
Maintained Luminous Intensities of the applicable specification
for that device at 77 deg F.
4.9 Initial Luminous Intensities of the Modules built to this
specification shall equal or exceed the Minimum Maintained
Luminous Intensities applicable for that device at 77 deg F as
follows.
Circular Ball Modules:
Red - 125% of the Minimum Maintained Luminous Intensity values
Green - 115% of the Minimum Maintained Luminous Intensity values
Yellow - 110% of the Minimum Maintained Luminous Intensity
values
Led Arrow Modules:
Red - 125% of the Minimum Maintained Luminous Intensity values
Green - 115% of the Minimum Maintained Luminous Intensity values
Yellow - 110% of the Minimum Maintained Luminous Intensity
- values
Page | -196-
NYS TMES - October 2, 2014
Led Pedestrian Modules:
Walking Person - 150% of the Minimum Maintained Luminous
- Intensity values
Hand - 120% of the Minimum Maintained Luminous Intensity values
4.10 All modules shall be fused. Fuse selection shall be such
that it provides reliable operation for its intended operation.
The fuse shall be located before any electronic component used
in the module and placed in series with the colored wire of the
unit. If multiple fuses are used in the design of the module,
the main surge protection fuse shall be placed in the location
above. The main surge protection fuse can be internal or
external to the unit. Should fusing be external to the unit by
placing inline fuse holders into the wiring of the unit, the
fuse holder shall be installed so that it is between six to ten
inches from the housing of the unit. The fuse holders, should
they be utilized, shall be a two piece type that employs a
threaded connection to join the two pieces.
4.11 Countdown Pedestrian Signal Operation.
Countdown Pedestrian Signals (Single Unit and Ped/Countdown
Module) shall comply with the following Operational
Requirements.
4.11.1 The unit will be designed to countdown to zero only
the “Clearance” time of the Pedestrian Interval. During the
Steady Don’t Walk Indication the display will always be dark.
4.11.2 The unit, when connected to the appropriate
Pedestrian switch pack outputs, shall have an automatic learn
mode in order to learn and store the Pedestrian clearance times
in its memory and to self-adjust for subsequent changes in
Pedestrian Clearance time.
4.11.3 Following power restoration to the unit after a power
outage of greater than two seconds the unit will remain dark for
one pedestrian cycle maximum to learn and acquire the current
pedestrian clearance timing and replace any values that were
stored in memory prior to the power outage with the newly
acquired values. The unit shall display the newly acquired times
on the next pedestrian cycle following the learn cycle.
4.11.4 The unit shall detect changes in pedestrian clearance
timing during normal operation and act upon them as described
below:
Page | -197-
NYS TMES - October 2, 2014
4.11.4.1 The unit will automatically re-program itself should it
detect any increase in Pedestrian clearance timing. The
increased timing shall be displayed on the subsequent pedestrian
cycle.
4.11.4.2 The unit will detect any reductions in pedestrian
clearance timing (such as those occurring during a traffic
Preemption cycle) and display on the subsequent pedestrian cycle
the timing stored in its memory prior to the shortened
pedestrian cycle.
4.11.4.3 The unit will re-program itself should it detect two
consecutive identical shortened pedestrian clearance cycles and
display this timing on the next pedestrian cycle.
4.11.5 The unit shall be designed to suspend any timing
and go dark when, for any reason, the timing of the Ped
Clearance cycle is terminated before reaching the “zero”
count and the clearance switchpack output reverts to a
steady “On” condition
4.11.6 The unit shall be capable of timing consecutive
complete Pedestrian cycles outputted by the traffic control
system.
4.11.7 The unit shall be designed to retain the Pedestrian
timing stored in its memory for all power outages of less
than one second and to continue timing of the Pedestrian timing
if the traffic control system has resumed Pedestrian timing
following this duration outage. For outages of between one and
two seconds memory may or may not be retained. For all power
outages greater than two seconds the unit will resume operation
as described in Paragraph 4.11.3
5.0 NYSDOT Standard and Type A LED Module Definitions.
5.1 5.1 NYSDOT Standard units shall be designed so that a
normally functioning signal module will generate current pulses.
The frequency of the current pulses shall be 6 pulses per
second, and be evenly spaced over this time interval, with the
first pulse generated within 100 msec after application of AC
power. The minimum current required shall be 500 milliamp peak
AC or pulsed current with a minimum pulse width of 3 msec. The
pulse width shall be measured at the 500 milliamp level. These
Page | -198-
NYS TMES - October 2, 2014
levels shall be maintained over the voltage range of between 95
and 135 volts rms.
Type “A” units shall be supplied without the necessary circuitry
to generate the current pulses.
All Ball and Single Arrow LED modules may be procured using this
specification as either NYSDOT Standard or Type A units. Single
Pedestrian, Bi-Modal Pedestrian, Bi-Modal Arrows and Countdown
Pedestrian Signals (Single Unit and Ped/Countdown Module) will
be procured as Type A only.
5.2 Power Factor. LED signal modules supplied to this
specification shall have power factors of 0.90 or greater. Power
Factors for NYSDOT Standard units shall also be 0.90 or greater
when measured without the current generating circuitry included
in the measurements.
5.3 Harmonic Distortion. Harmonic Distortion induced into the AC
power line for Type A units operating at 120V rms shall not
exceed 20 percent. NYSDOT Standard units supplied will meet the
same low distortion standards without the current generating
circuitry included in the measurements.
5.4 Electronic Noise. Type A units supplied to this
specification shall meet the requirements of the Federal
Communication Commission Title 47, Subpart B, Section 15
regulations concerning the emission of electronic noise by Class
A digital devices. Standard units shall meet the same
requirements except without the current generating circuitry
included in the measurements.
6.0 Production Tests & Inspections
Production Tests and Inspections shall be per the ITE
specifications for the particular device except as follows:
6.1 Luminous Intensity. Modules shall be tested for luminous
intensity. A single point measurement, with a correlation to the
Initial Luminous Intensity requirements specified in paragraph
4.0 of this document may be used. Failure of a module to meet
the requirements for the Initial Luminous Intensity specified or
Maximum Permissible Luminous Intensity shall be cause for
rejection of the module.
Page | -199-
NYS TMES - October 2, 2014
6.2. Current Consumption Measurement: All modules (Standard and
Type “A” Units) shall be measured for current flow in Amperes.
The measured current values shall be compared against the design
current values for the unit. A measured current consumption in
excess of 120% of the design current value for an ambient
temperature of 77 deg F shall be cause for rejection of the
module.6.3 Power Factor. All modules (Standard and Type “A”
Units) shall be measured for Power Factor. The measured values
for Type “A” units shall be greater than 0.90, for “Standard”
units the approximate design value for that device.
6.4 Current Monitor Compatibility (Standard Units Only). All
Standard type modules shall be tested to ensure that the unit is
generating the necessary current for compatibility with the
Model 215 Current Monitor. Test to be performed at 77 deg F and
120 V rms.
6.5 Visual Inspection: All modules shall be visually inspected
for any exterior physical damage or assembly anomalies. Careful
attention shall be paid to the surface of the lens to ensure
there are no scratches (abrasions), cracks, chips,
discoloration, or other defects. The presence of any such
defects shall be cause for rejection of the module.
7. Miscellaneous
7.1 Independent Laboratory Test Reports shall be required for
all products that are placed on New York State Department of
Transportation Management Equipment Qualified Products List for
LED Signal Indications. Test reports demonstrating the following
requirements shall be provided
—Lens Abrasion
—Chromaticity
—Initial Luminous Intensities as defined in Paragraph 4.0 of
-this specification
Page | -200-
NYS TMES - October 2, 2014
NEW YORK STATE DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
TRANSPORTATION MANAGEMENT EQUIPMENT
SPECIFICATIONS (TMES)
Chapters 18 – 23
Infrared Optical Preemption and Communication System
Portable Solar Powered Traffic Signal
Traffic Signal Electrical Service Disconnect / Generator Transfer Switch
ADA Solid State Pedestrian Push Button Assembly
School Zone Flashing Sign Beacon Assembly Solar Powered
Battery Back-Up System
Double Conversion Battery Back-Up System
Page | -201-
NYS TMES - October 2, 2014
CHAPTER 18 Detailed Specification for Vehicle Identifying Infrared Optical Preemption and Communication System
The purpose of this specification is to provide the minimum
performance requirements for the following Optical Preemption
and Communication System:
1. System Description
The required priority control system will employ infrared
communications technology to identify the presence of
authorized emergency and transit vehicles within the priority
control system. A log record of system users with vehicle
subgroups and identification numbers may be created. Vehicles
emitting the standard base frequencies of 14.035 +/- 0.003 Hz
(Emergency Band) and or 9.639 +/- 0.003 Hz (Transit Band) and
not emitting an approved manufacturers infrared vehicle
encoded message shall be recorded in all system log records as
code (0) and shall actuate the associated Optical Signal
Processor/Phase Selector as specified in section 2.4 below. A
single given traffic intersection within a complete priority
control system shall consist of a matched set of optical
detectors, optical signal processor/phase selector, system
software and applicable system accessories from a single
manufacturer. System emitters will be capable of generating a
user programmable infrared data encoded signal as well as the
standard base frequency for emergency and transit bands. The
data-encoded signal will be detected and recognized by the
infrared detectors at or near the intersection over a line-of–
sight path of up to 2,500 feet (762m) under clear atmospheric
conditions. The infrared optical signal processor/phase
selector will process the electrical signal from the detector
to ensure that the communication (1) is the valid standard
base frequency or (2) is correctly data encoded and (3) is
within user-settable range. If these conditions are met, the
signal processor will generate a priority control request to
Page | -202-
NYS TMES - October 2, 2014
the traffic controller for the appropriate intersection
approach to request a “green light” for system vehicles. The
system will require no action from the vehicle operator other
than activation of the infrared emitter. The system will
operate on a first come, first served basis. The system shall
interface with NEMA TS1, NEMA TS2, 170, 179 and 2070 traffic
control equipment and their associated cabinet systems.
2. System Components
2.1. Optical Emitter
2.1.1. The optical emitter shall generate the optical signal
required to activate the receiver equipment in all approved
brands of intersections. The light pulses shall consist of
either a fixed frequency base signal for standard preemption
systems or a modulated or interleaved base frequency signal
for fully coded systems, to transmit information.
2.1.2. The optical emitter power supply shall be powered by
the vehicle’s electrical system. The emitter power supply
shall operate from 10 to 30VDC.
2.1.3. The optical emitter shall perform three functions:
2.1.3.1.The first function shall be to transmit the industry
standard carrier frequency for Emergency band signals, (14.035
+/- 0.003Hz) or for Transit Band signals (9.639 +/- 0.003 Hz),
which shall represent Code 0 to the optical signal
processor/phase selector at each intersection.
2.1.3.2.The second function shall be to transmit a vehicle
identification signal, added to the carrier frequency either
by modulating the carrier frequency or by interleaving extra
pulses between the standard carrier frequency pulses.
2.1.3.3.The third function shall be to effect range adjustment
of the system using either coded or non-coded optical emitters
positioned at the desired distance, while the optical signal
processor/phase selector range adjustment features are
activated in the traffic cabinet. The range of each system
intersection approach shall be adjustable between 200 feet
(90m) and 2500 feet (762m).
2.1.3.4.The optical emitter shall conduct self-diagnostics and
display its status. The diagnostic status display shall be of
Page | -203-
NYS TMES - October 2, 2014
simple design and easily interpreted by the user. For example,
status via a single indicator light located on the control
switch is acceptable.
2.1.4.The optical emitter shall operate over a temperature
range of - 30 °F (-34 °C) to +165 °F (+74 °C). The optical
emitter shall operate over a range of 5% to 95% relative
humidity.
2.1.5. The optical emitter shall have a cutout option, which
can be wired to disable the emitter automatically when the
vehicle is in park, or neutral.
2.2. Optical Detector
2.2.1. The optical detector shall be manufactured from black
glass-filled, UV stabilized polycarbonate suitable for all
weather use. The detector shall be designed and sealed to
prevent the entrance of rain, sleet and snow.
2.2.2. The optical detector shall sense and transform optical
energy from optical emitters into electrical signals to be
decoded by the optical signal processor/phase selector.
2.2.3.The optical detector shall sense optical emitter signals
over an adjustable range of up to 2500 feet (762m) in optimum
atmospheric conditions.
2.2.4. The optical detector shall transmit electrical signals
to the optical signal processor/phase selector via up to 1000
feet of optical detector cable.
2.2.5. The optical detector shall have an internal terminal
strip with wiring label for convenient positive connection to
the detector cable.
2.2.6.The optical detector shall have as a minimum a conical
eight (8) degree or greater field of view centered about the
view port normal axis. Should wider viewing fields be
necessary, the vendor shall supply the equipment/hardware to
achieve the detection area that is needed for the specific
application.
Page | -204-
NYS TMES - October 2, 2014
2.2.7.The optical detector shall be of single channel, single
direction or two directions, dual channel configuration, with
a ½ inch or ¾ inch FNPT mounting connection. Other
configurations will also be considered by NYSDOT. Hardware
shall be available from the manufacturer to allow mounting the
optical detector to mast arm, span wire, and various other
possible intersection mounting configurations.
2.3. Optical Detector Cable
2.3.1. General – Either three (3) or four (4) conductor
shielded control cable, with foil shield overall and ground
wire. Meets the requirements of IPCEA-S-61-402/NEMA WC5,
Section 7.4, 600-Volt Control Cable, rated for 75 degrees
Celsius, Type B, and the following:
2.3.1.1. Conductors
Wire Quantity 3 4
Wire Gauge AWG #20 (7 x
28) stranding
AWG #20 (7 x
28) stranding
Conductor
Material
Individually
tinned copper
strands
Individually
tinned copper
strands
Insulation PVC, 80C, 600V,
25-mil minimum
average
thickness
PVC, 80C, 600V,
25-mil minimum
average
thickness
Wire Color 1 Blue, 1
Orange, and 1
Yellow
Blue, Orange,
Yellow, and
Other
2.3.1.2.
Aluminized polyester film or approved equal, applied with a
nominal 20% overlap to provide 100% shield coverage
2.3.1.3. Drain Wire
2.3.1.3.1. Gauge - AWG #20 (7 x 28) stranding
2.3.1.3.2. Material - Individually tinned copper strands
2.3.1.3.3. Non-insulated and in contact with the shield
Page | -205-
NYS TMES - October 2, 2014
conductive surface
2.3.1.4. Electrical Characteristics
2.3.1.4.1. Drain and conductor DC resistance shall not exceed
11.0 ohms per thousand feet
2.3.1.4.2. Capacitance from 1 conductor to the other 2
conductors and shield shall not exceed 48 pf/ft at 1000 Hz.
2.3.1.5. Jacket
2.3.1.5.1. Minimum average wall thickness - .045”
2.3.1.5.2. Temperature rating - 80C
2.3.1.5.3. Voltage Rating - 600V
2.3.1.5.4. Material - PVC, Black
2.3.1.5.5. Nominal O.D. over jacket - .35” maximum
2.3.2.The optical detector cable shall be of durable
construction to allow the following types of installation:
2.3.2.1. Direct burial
2.3.2.2. Conduit and mast arm pull
2.3.2.3. Exposed overhead, as with span wire.
2.4. Optical Signal Processor/Phase Selector
2.4.1. The optical signal processor/phase selector shall be
installed in the traffic controller cabinet to decode the
electrical signals from optical detectors. The optical signal
processor/phase selector shall interface directly with
NYSDOT/CALTRANS 170/179 and newer 2070 series controllers with
compatible software, and NEMA TS-1 and TS-2 with suitable
system interface equipment and software and associated cabinet
systems.
2.4.2. The optical signal processor/phase selector shall be
powered from 115 VAC (95VAC to 135VAC), 60Hz mains and have an
on board, power supply that supports up to 10 optical
detectors.
Page | -206-
NYS TMES - October 2, 2014
2.4.3. The optical signal processor/phase selector shall come
standard with the following:
2.4.3.1. Up to four channel inputs, each capable of receiving
and decoding up to 10 coded emergency or transit band signals
from system vehicles simultaneously. There shall be a minimum
of one detector per channel input.
2.4.3.2. A real-time clock, that provides a battery or super
capacitor backed-up on board source for time and date stamp
information during event logging. The real-time clock shall be
read and set via the RS-232 port. Battery backup life shall be
a minimum of 96 hours with system power off and shall be
recharged when power is restored.
2.4.3.3. A main processor which shall arbitrate priority
between the channels, log events, and provide RS-232
communication with the outside world for system configuration
during installation, and real time communication with the
traffic controller or central system during operation.
2.4.3.4. The non-volatile memory for storage of configuration
parameters and event logs. Retention time for the non-volatile
memory shall be a minimum of 10 years with system power off or
on.
2.4.4. The optical signal processor/phase selector front panel
shall have the following features:
2.4.4.1. A power on/off switch with corresponding indicator.
2.4.4.2. Panel Indicators for emergency and transit band
reception status, for each of four channels.
2.4.4.3. Test switches for activating internal diagnostics.
2.4.4.4. The ability to set range via system software
interface or using a range arm switch to enabling range
setting using front panel switches.
2.4.4.5. A standard data communications port.
2.4.4.6. The following log entries shall be recorded in the
signal processor card if user selected:
2.4.4.6.1 Vehicle subgroup or class
Page | -207-
NYS TMES - October 2, 2014
2.4.4.6.2 Vehicle ID number
2.4.4.6.3 Vehicle Frequency Band
2.4.4.6.4 Direction
2.4.4.6.5 Call duration
2.4.4.6.6 Final greens at end of call
2.4.4.6.7 Duration of final greens
2.4.4.6.8 Time and date call started
2.4.4.6.9 Time and date call ended
2.4.4.6.10 Near or far vehicle approach
2.4.4.6.11 Maximum signal strength
2.4.4.6.12 Priority output response (Yes/No) for preemption
2.4.4.7 The optical signal processor/phase selector will
include the following control timers to modify priority
control conditions by use of system software through IBM type
computer or laptop if user selected:
2.4.4.7.1 Max Call Time: Sets the maximum allowable activation
time of a channel
2.4.4.7.2 Call Hold Time: Sets time a call is held by a
channel after vehicle signal is lost.
2.4.4.7.3 Call Delay Time: Sets time a call is recognized
before channel is activated.
2.4.4.8 The optical signal processor/phase selector will
include one optically isolated output per channel that provide
the following electrical signal to the appropriate pin on the
card edge connector:
2.4.4.8.1 6.25Hz +/- 0.1Hz 50% on/duty square wave in response
to Transit Calls.
2.4.4.8.2 A steady ON in response to Emergency Calls.
Page | -208-
NYS TMES - October 2, 2014
2.4.5. Programming the optical signal processor/phase selector
and retrieving data stored in it via it’s data port shall be
accomplished using an IBM PC-compatible computer either
locally or remotely via a modem.
2.4.6. The optical signal processor/phase selector shall be
capable of decoding 10,000 separate vehicle identification
codes in Emergency Band and the same in Transit Band.
2.4.7. The optical signal processor/phase selector shall log
and store a minimum of 1,000 events in non-volatile memory.
When the log is full, the oldest entry shall drop off to allow
the newest entry to be logged.
2.4.8. There shall also be a complete set of green timers for
transit band signals.
2.5. System Software
2.5.1. Optical signal processor/phase selector configuration
software shall be provided on CD-ROM. It shall run on IBM
compatible computers with Windows 95, 98, NT 4.0, Windows 2000
and Windows XP software (when available).
2.5.2. The software shall provide windows and menus for
setting vehicle ID subgroups and codes, range settings,
intersection and channel names, timing parameters, desired
green signal indications during priority control operation,
and for viewing and downloading logged information.
3. Environmental
3.1. All equipment supplied as part of the optical preemption
traffic control system intended for use in the controller
cabinet shall meet the electrical and environmental
specifications spelled out in the NEMA Standards Publications
TS2-1992 Part 2 where applicable:
3.1.1. Line voltage variations per NEMA TS2 1992, 2.1.2
3.1.2. Primary power interruptions per NEMA TS2 1992,
2.1.04.A.1
3.1.3. Power Source frequency per NEMA TS2 1992, 2.1.3
Page | -209-
NYS TMES - October 2, 2014
3.1.4. Power source noise transients per NEMA TS2 1992, 2.16.1
3.1.5. Power Source high-energy transients per NEMA TS2 1992,
2.1.6.1
3.1.6. Non-destructive transient immunity per NEMA TS2 1992,
2.1.8
3.1.7. Input-output noise immunity per NEMA TS2 1992, 2.1.7
3.1.8. Temperature range per NEMA TS2 1992, 2.1.5.1
3.1.9. Humidity per NEMA TS2 1992, 2.1.5.2
3.1.10. Shock test per NEMA TS2 1992, 2.1.13
3.1.11. Vibration per NEMA TS2 1992, 2.1.12
4. Qualifications
4.1. The manufacturer or their qualified agents shall supply a
list of at least three preemption system users having
experience with the various types of preemption system
components available from the manufacturer for a minimum of
three years.
4.2. The manufacturer shall be able to demonstrate the ability
to provide on going technical and product warranty support.
4.3. A tour of the manufacturer’s production facilities shall
be made available for a maximum of two inspectors from the
purchasing agency upon request.
4.4. The manufacturer shall have an independent quality
control department that has complete authority to monitor
product integrity and is answerable only to a senior officer
of the manufacturing organization.
5. Responsibilities
5.1. The manufacturer or the manufacturer’s representative
shall provide responsive service before, during and after the
installation of the priority control system. The manufacturer
or the manufacturer’s representatives shall provide training
to the system installer and maintenance department of the
purchasing agency. Training shall consist of proper
Page | -210-
NYS TMES - October 2, 2014
installation and operating procedures for the system hardware
and software.
5.2. The manufacturer or the manufacturer’s representative
shall, at the request of the purchasing agency, assist with
field surveys of the traffic system intersections to insure
that all traffic control system equipment shall interface with
the manufacturers preemption system components. The necessary
number of preemption channels and the appropriate location of
the optical detectors, for optimum system operation shall be
determined at this inspection.
5 6
5.3. The manufacturer or the manufacturer’s representative
shall assist the installer or the purchasing agency’s traffic
department to insure that all traffic controllers are properly
programmed for preemption system interface. Preemption system
maintenance and operational manuals shall be provided to the
purchasing agency and system installer.
5.4. The manufacturer or the manufacturer’s representative
shall provide an Emergency Vehicle Driver Training Course to
all qualified personnel who will use the preemption system, at
the request of the purchasing agency. At least one copy of the
materials used for the driver training course shall be
provided to the purchasing agency for future review.
5.5. The manufacturer shall warrant, provided the preemption
system components have been properly installed, operated, and
maintained, that matched system components that fail due to
material flaws or workmanship shall be replaced or repaired
under manufacturers published warranty provisions. The
protection period against system component failure shall have
a total duration of not less then 10 full years (1 year for
emitter lamps) according to provisions set forth in the
manufacturers published warranty.
5.6. The manufacturer shall provide, upon request, a
certificate of product liability insurance for $5,000,000.
5.7. The manufacturer of the preemption system shall certify
on request from the purchasing agency that all the component
products in their system are designed, manufactured, and
tested as a system of matched components and shall meet or
exceed the requirements of the specification.
Page | -211-
NYS TMES - October 2, 2014
CHAPTER 19
Detailed Specification for Portable Solar Powered
Traffic Signal
1.0 SCOPE:
These specifications describe Solar-Powered Portable Trailer-
Mounted Three Color Traffic Signal (PTS) System (two trailers
per system).
The unit shall comply with the requirements for Portable Traffic
Control Signals as defined in the Federal Manual of Uniform
Traffic Control Devices (MUTCD), Part IV, including specifically
the requirements pertaining to signal heads, lamps, and spacing
of signals, clearance, and number of signal faces. The PTS
System units shall utilize L.E.D. traffic signal indications
meeting the Institute of Traffic Engineers specifications. Each
PTS System delivered shall contain the trailer, structural
support system, mast arm assembly; lift mechanism, regulated
power supply, batteries, solar charging system, trailer-mounted
traffic signal controller, signal heads, microwave detector, all
necessary wire and cable and all ancillary equipment. The PTS
System shall be able to function continuously, independent of
utility power sources.
The system trailers shall conform to applicable sections of
the New York State Vehicle and Traffic Law governing
trailers, including lighting to highway standards.
2.0 - GENERAL:
PTS System construction, materials, and operation shall conform
to the ITE, NFPA, ULI, and NEC. The unit shall be a trailer
mounted and equipped with a mechanically lifted mast and arm. It
shall be equipped to display (2) 12” (300 mm), 3 section traffic
signal heads with back plates. Vehicle heads shall be dark green
or federal yellow in color.
3.0 - TRAILER:
The trailer shall be designed for safe transport at normal
highway speeds of 55 mph. Lights, reflectors, and splash guards
shall be provided to comply with ICC and NYS regulations. The
PTS System shall be delivered with 3M reflective tape, or State
approved equal, installed on all four (4) sides of the trailer.
Page | -212-
NYS TMES - October 2, 2014
Each side of the trailer shall have the minimum equivalent of 72
square inches (465 square centimeters) of reflective tape.
4.0 - STRUCTURAL SUPPORT:
The deployed structure shall supply adequate support to allow
complete traffic signal operation, including raising and
lowering of the mast arm, and shall remain stable during wind
gusts of 80 mph when stationary.
5.0 – LIFT MECHANISM:
(A) The lift mechanism shall be an electric or electrically-
assisted hydraulic or mechanically assisted manual mechanism
capable of raising and lowering the mast arm.
(B) The mechanism shall be capable of being lowered manually.
(C) A safety feature shall be provided to prevent the mast arm
from lowering once in the raised position. If a safety bolt is
used, a self-locking mechanism shall be incorporated into the
safety bolt which prevents it from being inadvertently
dislodged.
(D) The mast arm of the unit shall extend a minimum of 9 feet
(2.7 m) from the side of the trailer, and provide a minimum
clearance of 17 feet (5.2 m) over the baseline established by
the jacks.
6.0 – ELECTRICAL:
(A) The PTS System shall operate primarily from a solar powered
electrical system. Secondary power supply type shall provide
capability to accept existing 120V commercial electric service.
(B) This system shall consist of a battery power system and
solar array panels, and shall be capable of operating the PTS
System for at least 14 consecutive days on batteries alone at
70ºF (17.7ºC). The system shall be designed to operate
continuously within New York State, January thru December.
Should weather conditions preclude the use of pure solar power
the PTS System shall be equipped with an on-board auxiliary
charging system to enable the batteries to be recharged via a
120 Volt AC connection.
7.0 - TRAFFIC SIGNAL OPERATION:
The traffic signal controller shall be enclosed in a cabinet
mounted on each trailer. The controller shall be furnished with
a keypad and LCD display screen; the use of a PC or laptop only
for programming is not acceptable. The controller keyboard or
key pad shall be capable of allowing the signal operator to
Page | -213-
NYS TMES - October 2, 2014
program the signal under all weather conditions. The traffic
signal controller shall also:
(A) Be capable of operating over a -30º to +150ºF (-34º to
+66ºC) range and in a 20% to 100% humidity range.
(B) Be capable of performing normal traffic signal operations
as defined in the following table: (continue to page 3)
Page | -214-
NYS TMES - October 2, 2014
Page | -215-
NYS TMES - October 2, 2014
(C) To avoid the possibility of conflicting signal indications,
or absence of signal voltages, the traffic signal system shall
be either hard-wired or controlled by radio signals, and in
either case shall employ the use of a conflict monitors, or
similar electronic technology that is typically used in
traditional traffic signal operations which will not allow
conflicting signal displays.
(D) In the event that a conflict is detected the signal heads
shall display flashing red indications, and the system shall
require the malfunction to be manually reset.
(E) Retain programs in the controller's memory in the event of
power failure.
(F) Be capable of automatic system recovery after power outages
without operator intervention.
(G) Place the signal into programmed flashing operation when the
output voltage drops below the manufacturer's recommendations.
(H) Be contained in a weatherproof, lockable housing, and
insulated to protect against excessive vibration and
temperature. The housing shall have a lockable door latch.
(I) Have the ability to be programmed with a password, to help
prevent unauthorized access to the controller software in the
field.
(J) The controller software provided with the PTS System shall
not contain any computer code that would disable such software
or system or impair in any way its operation based on the
elapsing of a period of time, exceeding an authorized number of
copies, advancement to a particular date or other numeral, or
other similar self-destruct mechanisms, (sometimes referred to
as "time bombs", "time locks", or "drop dead" devices), or that
would permit contractor to access the Product to cause such
disablement or impairment (sometimes referred to as a "trap
door" device).
Page | -216-
NYS TMES - October 2, 2014
CHAPTER 20 Detailed Specification for Traffic Signal Electrical Service Disconnect / Generator Transfer Switch
1.0 SCOPE:
The intent of this specification is to provide a service
disconnect, and a generator transfer switch within a
stainless steel NEMA 3R enclosure. The unit shall be
designed to satisfy the ANSI requirements for service
equipment, and for generator transfer switches. All
electrical components shall be UL listed or recognized for
their intended function.
2.0 ENCLOSURE:
The enclosure shall be constructed of .060” stainless
steel, and shall be at least 9” H x 6” W x 6” D but no
larger than 12” H x 10” W x 8” D. The enclosure shall be
rated NEMA 3R with a 1.5” bottom rear flange with two
vertical 1” x 0.25” slots, 0.75” to the right and left of
the center line. The flange shall have a 3/8” hole centered
between the slots. A 3/8” hole shall be supplied on the
back of the enclosure, centered on the width of the
enclosure and located 1” down from the top.
The back of the enclosure shall have concentric ¾” and 1”
diameter conduit knockouts which shall be centered on the
width and positioned approximately 3” above the enclosures
bottom.
The top of the enclosure shall have a one inch conduit hole
to be centered on the width, and close to the back of the
enclosure and still be able to mount a watertight hub,
Myers brand ST-3 or approved equal. This hole to be plugged
with a knockout seal, Heyco model KOS-LT1 or approved
equal.
The enclosure shall have a hinged interior switch panel to
allow for the access to the field wiring. This panel shall
be hinged with stainless steel rivets or approved equal
stainless steel tamper-proof fasteners.
Page | -217-
NYS TMES - October 2, 2014
When not in use the inlets shall be covered with a hinged
stainless steel cover. This cover shall be lockable with
the enclosure door.
The outside locking front cover shall latch in the “up”
position. The locking mechanism shall be a police door
style warded lock and key, Pelco SM-1012 or equal. The
enclosure door shall be capable of being locked while the
generator power cord is connected to the inlet flange. A
keyhole cover shall automatically protect the keyhole when
the key is removed.
3.0 ELECTRICAL:
The service disconnect shall be a 30 amp type HACR single
pole breaker installed to disconnect utility power, and
shall be a Siemens Type QP130 or approved equal. The
breaker shall have a minimum interrupt rating of 10,000
amps.
The unit shall be capable of transferring power from the
utility to one of the user selectable generator inlet
connectors via two single pole double throw switches which
have been ganged together. One switch shall transfer the
AC+ from utility power to generator power. The second
switch shall turn a green LED pilot light “on” when the
transfer switch is in the generator position and utility
power is available. When the ganged switches are switched
to utility power, this second switch turns the LED pilot
light off. The pilot light shall be visible only when the
hinged inlet cover is open. The gang switch handles shall
be “up” when set in the “LINE” position. All screws used in
the transfer switch shall have lock washers installed or
the screws should be a binding head type. A third switch
shall select which one of the two flanged inlets (AC+ pole)
is connected to the generator.
The bottom of each unit shall be supplied with two covered
flanged inlets. One shall be a three wire two pole 125V
twist lock plug NEMA L5-30, Hubbell brand HBL4716c or
approved equal. The second shall be a three wire two pole
125V straight blade plug NEMA 5-15P, Hubbell brand HBL5278c
or approved equal. All mounting screws shall be stainless
steel.
All switches to comply with UL1008 ANSI specification for
manual generator transfer switches, and shall have a
transfer rate of 250 ms or less.
One, three position barrier type terminal strip shall be
mounted on the inside back of the enclosure to receive up
to # 6 AWG utility power wire and traffic cabinet power
Page | -218-
NYS TMES - October 2, 2014
wires (+AC), Cooper Bussmann-Magnum TS Series or approved
equal. It shall be located as close as possible to the left
cabinet side. The conductors from the circuit breaker to
the terminal strips shall be #8 AWG. The conductors to and
from the switches, except the pilot light switch, shall be
#10 AWG. The wires from the 15A inlet shall be #12 AWG. The
unit shall be equipped with one (minimum five position)
ground bus bar, sized for # 6 AWG wire, mounted on the
right inside back panel of the enclosure. A ground wire
from one of the positions shall be connected to the inside
fold down access panel for bonding purposes and a #10 AWG
wire shall be connected to the third position of the
terminal strip which connects to the neutrals of the pilot
light and the generator inlets.
4.0 LABELING:
The inlets, switch positions, breaker positions shall all
be clearly labeled. The manufacturer’s model number,
electrical ratings and a statement “Suitable for use as
service equipment” shall appear in an easily visible
location when the front door is in the open position. The
30 amp breaker shall also be labeled as “SERVICE
DISCONNECT”.
The pilot light shall be labeled as follows:
“Service disconnect breaker must be in the “ON” position
for pilot light to function” The outside of the front
cover shall be labeled as follows:
“SERVICE DISCONNECT AND GENERATOR TRANSFER SWITCH”.
Page | -219-
NYS TMES - October 2, 2014
CHAPTER 21 Detailed Specification for ADA Solid State Pedestrian Push Button Assembly
1. 0 General
1.1. Shall have a 2” diameter ADA compliant push button
1.2 Shall be pressure activated with essentially no moving parts
1.3 Shall incorporate a solid state switch requiring between 1-3
lbs of force to activate
1.4 Shall be highly vandal resistant
1.5 Shall have a minimum operating life of 100 million
actuations
1.6 Shall be compatible with all 242 DC Isolation Units as
defined at Chapter 5.
2.0 Housing
2.1. Shall be high impact cast or machined aluminum or
polycarbonate
2.2 Shall have powder coat paint and be dark green in color
2.3 Shall be equipped with a pole mounting housing which will
enable the flexibility of choice to mount the button both to a
flat and a convex surface
2.4 Shall have a gasket between the button housing and the
mounting housing
2.5 Shall be assembled with tamper resistant stainless steel
hardware
3.0 Electrical
3.1 Operation voltage: 15 to 24V DC or 12 to 24V AC
3.2 On Resistance 10 Ohms (When the button is activated and
placing a call)
3.3 Standby Current 10 micro amps typical
Page | -220-
NYS TMES - October 2, 2014
3.4 Shall require only two conductors be run from the traffic
signal cabinet to the push button to operate
3.5 Shall have a solid state electronic piezo switch rated for
100 million cycles with no moving plunger or moving electrical
contacts
4.0 Environmental
4.1 Shall operate at temperatures between -25F to 155F
4.2 Shall be able to be completely immersed in water for 5
minutes. The button shall operate immediately after being
removed from the water.
CHAPTER 22 Detailed Specification for School Zone Flashing Sign Beacon Assembly – Solar Powered
1.0 General:
This specification defines the minimum requirements for a School
Zone Flashing Sign Beacon Assembly – Solar Powered. The unit
shall be fully integrated to provide two flashing signal
sections and a remotely programmable time clock capable of
activating and deactivating the assembly by time of day or by
command.
The unit shall be provided with all necessary software and
hardware necessary to provide a fully functional, standard 4 ½”
(inch) round beacon pole mountable, Solar Powered, School Zone
Flashing Sign Beacon Assembly.
Page | -221-
NYS TMES - October 2, 2014
2.0 Software Specifications:
2.1 Scheduler:
Each beacon shall have the ability to receive and store the
annual flash schedule.
Scheduled events shall be programmable by year, month, day,
start time, duration, and day of the week.
The system shall provide programming flexibility to include
morning and afternoon flash cycles, early dismissal days,
holidays and special events. Scheduled events shall be easily
overwritten with a temporary schedule such as unscheduled
early dismissals and snow days.
2.2 System Administration:
Central Secure Web Based System management for multiple users,
each user shall have a password and user jurisdiction allowing
users to be assigned individual field devices or groups of
devices. The System Administrator shall have the ability to
add, delete, modify and view the following user parameters:
Create New Users
Create User Passwords
Reset Passwords
Edit Existing Users
Delete Users
Set Permission Levels o System Groups o Scheduler Access o View Schedules o Modify Schedules o Send Schedules
Add Devices
View Devices
Modify Devices
3.0 Hardware Specifications:
3.1 Flash Pattern
½ Second “ON”, ½ Second “OFF” - per the requirements set forth
in the most recently published edition of the Manual on
Uniform Traffic Control Devices of the US Department of
Page | -222-
NYS TMES - October 2, 2014
Transportation, Federal Highway Administration.
3.2 Communications
Long-range instructions shall be via SMS and/or FTP using
cellular modem technology integrated into the sign beacon
assembly.
The master beacon shall have the ability to communicate to a
minimum of four (4) satellite beacons which shall have the
ability to receive communications from the master beacon
utilizing short range communications.
Short-range, inter-beacon communication shall be provided by
902-928 MHz spread spectrum radio modems.
4.0 Environmental Requirements
Operating Temperature: -25° to +155°F
Operates at rated usage for a minimum of 30 Days without solar
charging at an ambient air temperature of 23°F.
Battery and solar panel sizing shall be based on no more than
3.5 kWh/m2 per day of solar insolation.
5.0 Materials
Signal sections shall be Dual 8”(inch) Polycarbonate sections,
mountable vertically as per the Federal MUTCD; in Dark Green
or Traffic Zone Yellow as specified on the purchase order. The
color shall be fully impregnated into the polycarbonate resin.
The color shall be such that a properly prepared color chip
shall be a reasonable visual match to Federal Color Standard
No. 595A, Color #14056 for Dark Green and to Federal Color
Standard No. 595A, Color #13538 for Traffic Zone Yellow.
Viewing shall be done under North Standard Daylight.
Visors shall be Polycarbonate cutaway, exterior to match
signal sections, interior shall be flat black.
Solar panels shall be tilted for operation. The solar panel
assembly shall be adjustable so as to enable a south
orientation with out any additional hardware.”
Battery and Electronics shall be enclosed in a ventilated
anodized or powder coated aluminum enclosure (Cabinet)
Page | -223-
NYS TMES - October 2, 2014
constructed of at least 1/8” (inch) in thickness.
The system shall be designed to be mounted to a standard 4 ½"
(inch) round beacon pole. Mounting brackets shall be ductile
iron or 6061-T6 powder coated aluminum painted to match the
signal head color.
6.0 Cabinet
Hinges shall be a continuous type and shall be made of 14
gauge stainless steel with a 1/8” (inch) diameter stainless
steel hinge pin.
Venting shall be covered by wire mesh to prevent the intrusion
of insects.
Solar panel housing shall be anodized or powder coated
aluminum
The cabinet shall be equipped with a self-locking heavy duty 5
pin tumbler cylinder rim type lock, keyed to a Corbin #2
standard, and shall be provided with a keyhole cover for
protection. Two keys shall be provided with each cabinet.
The door, when closed and locked, shall provide an adequate
seal to prevent the entrance of rain or snow into the
cabinet., and at a minimum meet the requirements of NEMA 3R
for weather resistance.
The enclosure shall be designed to allow it to be securely
fastened to the above noted pole with set screws or stainless
steel banding.
7.0 Electrical
Each beacon shall be equipped with an easily accessible manual
override, which shall provide the ability to manually turn on
or off the sign beacon. This manual override shall be in a
locked enclosure, keyed with a standard police key
Solar panels and battery system shall be 12 Volt DC.
The unit shall be supplied with 12VDC, 8” (inch) Yellow LEDs,
conforming to the latest ITE specifications.
All wiring shall be at least 7-strand, #14 gauge wire.
The enclosure shall be equipped with a grounding lug, and
Page | -224-
NYS TMES - October 2, 2014
shall be tied to earth ground by a #6 gauge stranded wire.
Wire routing shall be internal to the unit and pole
attachment; no exposed conductors shall be permitted.
8.0 Basis of Acceptance
Equipment supplied under this item should be listed in the
NYSDOT Signal Lab Qualified Products List.
9.0 Warranty
The system and its associated components shall carry a
manufactures warrantee of not less than 2 years; batteries shall
carry a warrantee of not less than 1 year.
CHAPTER 23 Specification For Battery Back-Up System for Traffic Signals Utilizing Light Emitting Diodes (Led)Traffic Signal Modules
GENERAL
This specification establishes the minimum requirements for a
complete emergency battery backup system for use with Light
Emitting Diode (LED) Traffic Signal Modules. The BBS shall
provide reliable emergency power to a traffic signal system
(Vehicle and Pedestrian Traffic) in the event of a power failure
or interruption.
The Battery Backup System (BBS) shall include, but not be
limited to the following: Batteries, Inverter/Charger, Power
Transfer Relay (internal or external to the Inverter/Charger), a
Page | -225-
NYS TMES - October 2, 2014
manually operated non-electronic Bypass Switch that is external
to the Inverter/Charger and all necessary hardware and
interconnect wiring. (See Figure 23.1 – BBS Block Diagram) In
addition, the manually operated non-electronic Bypass Switch
must also be a separate functional unit from the Power Transfer
Unit but both may share a common external enclosure.
The BBS shall be designed for outdoor applications, in
accordance with this current New York State Transportation
Management Equipment Specifications (TMES), Chapter 1
requirements.
1. OPERATION
1.1 Compatibility
The BBS shall be compatible for full run time operation with all
Traffic Signal Cabinets and internal components of the Cabinet,
all Traffic Controllers and all Traffic Signal LED Modules
specified by this current New York State Transportation
Management Equipment Specifications.
1.2 Run-Time
At ambient temperature (70ºF ) the BBS shall provide a minimum
of four(4) hours of full three-color run-time traffic
intersection operation plus two(2) hours of flash time (50%
Flash Duty Cycle) operation when connected to a load configured
to consume 4 Amp rms. The load shall be constructed using the
components mentioned in Paragraph 1.1
1.3 Output Capacity
The BBS shall be able to provide a minimum of 700W/1000VAC @
+70ºF, continuous active output capacity, with 80% minimum
inverter efficiency while running in Backup Mode (on batteries).
1.4 Output Voltage
When operating in Backup mode, the BBS output shall be 120 VAC ±
5 VAC, pure sine wave output, ≤ 3% THD, 60 Hz ± 0.05 Hz.
1.5 Transfer Time
Page | -226-
NYS TMES - October 2, 2014
The maximum transfer time allowed, from disruption of normal
utility line voltage to stabilized Backup Mode line voltage,
shall be no greater than 65 milliseconds. The same maximum
allowable transfer time shall also apply when switching from
Backup Mode line voltage back to utility line voltage.
1.6 Operating Temperature
The operating temperature for the inverter/charger, power
transfer relay and manual bypass switch shall be –35°F to +165
°F. Additionally, all components and parts used shall, at the
very least, be rated for that temperature range.
1.7 AC Feedback
The BBS shall be equipped to prevent a malfunction feedback to
the cabinet or from feeding back to the utility service.
1.7.1 Feedback Level
In the event that the AC service feeding the BBS is severed, or
there is a utility black-out, the AC voltage measured at the AC
inputs to the BBS (Line to Neutral), shall be less than 1 VAC.
1.8 Surge Protection
The BBS shall have lightning surge protection compliant with
IEEE/ANSI C.62.41 and must be able to withstand 2000 volt surges
applied 50 times across line and neutral. These surges shall not
cause the BBS to transfer to Backup mode.
1. 9 Power & Control Connections
The BBS shall be easily installed, replaced, or removed by using
easily removable cables for AC input , AC output, DC input,
external transfer relay control and battery temperature sense.
1.9.1 AC Connection
The AC input and output shall be panel mounted plug /
receptacles that allow no possibility of accidental
exposure to dangerous voltages (male receptacle for AC
Input and female receptacle for AC Output). The receptacles
shall utilize some form of locking mechanism or hold down
clamps to in order to prevent any accidental disconnects.
1.9.2 DC Connection
The DC connection shall be a recessed one or two piece
Anderson style receptacle.
1.9.3 Relay / Temperature Probe Connections
Page | -227-
NYS TMES - October 2, 2014
The external power transfer relay control and the battery
temperature sense inputs shall be heavy duty panel-mounted
style connectors.
1.9.4
All connections shall provide mechanically and electrically
secure connections without the use of a screwdriver. The
only exception will be the 18-position Relay Terminal Block
which shall require a small screwdriver for holding down
the relay wires.
1.10 Relay / Switch Ratings
The Power Transfer Relay and Manual Bypass Switches shall be
rated at 240VAC/30 amps, minimum.
1.11 Unit Failure
In the event of inverter/charger failure, battery failure or
complete battery discharge, the power transfer relay shall
revert to the NC (and de-energized) state, where utility line
power is connected to the cabinet.
1.12 Overload
The BBS must be able to shutdown in order to protect against
internal damage in the event of an overload at the output.
1.13 Bypass
Placing the Manual Bypass Switch into “Bypass” shall cut AC
Utility power to the Inverter/Charger and route it directly to
the signal Cabinet. In this condition, if the inverter is then
disabled and the batteries disconnected from the system, the
Inverter/Charger unit shall be completely de-energized and shall
be safe to remove from the intersection system, while still
allowing the intersection to function normally.
2. FUNCTIONALITY, DISPLAYS AND CONTROLS
The BBS system shall be provided with three modes of operation:
Standby Mode, Buck/Boost “Line-Interactive” Mode and Backup
Mode.
2.1 Standby Mode
The BBS shall be provided with a STANDBY mode. In this mode, the
utility AC Voltage shall be passed directly to the output. The
system will transfer to Backup mode at factory default, low and
high cutoff voltage level transfer set points between 90 and 135
VAC (the default shall be 100 and 130 VAC). The BBS will
Page | -228-
NYS TMES - October 2, 2014
automatically apply a 5 VAC difference for the return transfer
points.
2.1.1 Low & High Cutoff
When the BBS is in “Standby” modes (Buck / Boost is
Disabled), the BBS shall bypass the utility line power
whenever the utility line voltage is outside of the
transfer set points (± 2 VAC).
2.1.2 Low Restore
In cases of low (below the low voltage transfer set point),
or absent utility line voltage, when the utility line
voltage has been restored at or above 5 VAC ± 2 VAC of the
low transfer set point for more than 30 seconds (or the
user configured line qualify time), the BBS shall transfer
from Backup Mode back to Utility Line Mode.
2.1.3 High Restore
In cases of high (above the high voltage transfer set
point) utility line voltage, when the utility line voltage
has been restored at or below 5 VAC ± 2 VAC of the high
transfer set point for more than 30 seconds (or the user
configured line qualify time), the BBS shall transfer from
Backup Mode back to Utility Line Mode.
2.2 Buck / Boost “Line-Interactive” Mode
The Buck / Boost mode of the BBS shall have a minimum range of
90 – 150 VAC. There shall not be any user configurable transfer
set point for the Buck / Boost mode. Whenever Buck / Boost mode
is selected, the output of the system shall be regulated between
100 – 130 VAC. When the output of the system can no longer be
maintained within that range, the BBS shall transfer to Backup
Mode.
2.3 Backup Mode
In Backup Mode the BBS shall provide regulated power to the
output of the system from its Batteries.
2.4 Line Qualify Time
The BBS shall have a user adjustable line qualify time. In
Backup Mode Line Qualify Time is the time required for the BBS
system to return to providing power from the utility line
voltage to the system when the utility line voltage returns to
acceptable levels. There will be a minimum of three (3) settings
possible. The minimum settings shall be 3 seconds, 10 seconds,
and 30 seconds. The default value shall be 30 seconds.
Page | -229-
NYS TMES - October 2, 2014
2.5 Display
The BBS shall have a backlit LCD type display that is easily
seen in both bright sunlight and in darkness. The screen shall
be large enough to display the following minimum information:
Operating Mode (Normal, Generator, Buck/Boost)
Utility Input Voltage
BBS Output Voltage
Charger Status
Percent Battery Charge
Battery Voltage
BBS Status (Standby, Backup, Buck, Boost)
Any Alarms and Faults
Relay Status information
Display backlight shall extinguish automatically when no key is
pressed for a specific time which is not more than 300 seconds.
2.6 Keypad
The BBS shall use a well defined keypad that includes arrow,
enter and escape keys so that the user can efficiently navigate
the menu system to make system programming changes and gather
other status information.
2.7 Status LED’s In addition to the LCD display the BBS shall be provided with
discrete status LED indicators. As a minimum, the Red "Fault"
LED indicator shall be provided. The purpose of the indicators
is to draw the user’s attention to the LCD.
2.7.1 Green “Output” LED
This LED will be ON any time that the output of the BBS is
modified, either by Backup Mode, or by Buck / Boost Modes.
2.7.2 Red “Fault” LED
This LED will be ON any time that there are any faults in
the system.
2.7.3 Yellow “Alarm” LED.
This LED will be ON any time that there are any alarms in
the system.
2.8 Event Log & Counters
The BBS shall keep track of the number of times that the unit
Page | -230-
NYS TMES - October 2, 2014
was in Standby, Backup, Buck and Boost modes and the total
number of hours and minutes that the unit has operated in those
modes since last reset. This information shall be displayed
through the LCD and shall be available for viewing via the EIA-
232 port and the Ethernet Interface. The BBS shall also keep a
running event log with a minimum of 100 latest events. For each
event, the log shall contain as a minimum, a date/time stamp,
the current operating mode, and what the event was.
2.9 Programmable Relay Contacts
The BBS shall provide the user with six (6) programmable dry
relay contacts. These relay contacts shall be rated for a
minimum of 1 amp @ 125 VAC. When any relay is energized, it
shall show up on the main screen of the LCD. As a minimum, the
programming options will be, On Battery, Low Battery, Timer,
Alarm, Fault, and Off.
2.9.1 On Battery Relay Contacts
The dry relay contacts that are configured for “On Battery”
shall only energize when the Inverter is operating in
Backup Mode.
2.9.2 Timer Relay Contacts
The BBS shall have a timer that will energize the dry relay
contacts (when configured for “Timer”) after the user
configured time has elapsed. This timer is started when the
BBS in the Backup mode. The user can configure the timer
from 0 to 480 minutes, in a minimum of 15 minute
increments. The default setting will be 120 minutes.
2.9.3 Low Battery Relay Contacts
The BBS shall have an adjustable low battery relay setting.
This setting shall be adjustable so that the user can set
the point at which the low battery relay energizes. This
setting applies to any dry contact relay that is configured
for “Low Battery”.
2.9.4 Relay Contact Terminals
The relay contacts shall be made available on the front
panel of the BBS via an 18-position, screw hold-down,
printed circuit board mounted terminal block. Additional
terminals are allowed so long as they are adequately
identified and labeled.
2.9.4.1 Terminal Type
The relay contact terminal blocks shall conform to On-Shore
Page | -231-
NYS TMES - October 2, 2014
Technology, type ED2200/22, or Phoenix Contact type FRONT
2,5-H/SA 5, or WECO type 180-A-111, or approved equal. The
spacing between each terminal shall be 0.197” (5 mm), with
the hold-down screw and wire entrance both on the same
face, facing forward and in the horizontal axis. See Figure
3 for additional information.
2.9.4.2 Contacts
Each relay shall have their own common and their own set of
normally open (NO) and normally closed (NC) terminals. The
terminals for each relay shall be oriented as NO-C-NC, on
the terminal block.
2.9.4.3 Labeling
The contacts of the terminal block shall be labeled 1…18,
left to right. Additionally, each set of contacts shall be
labeled with the NO-C-NC designation, as well as C1…C6,
again, from left to right. Any remaining contacts on the
terminal block shall be labeled as “Spare”, unless used for
some other purpose, in which case they shall be labeled as
to their actual use.
2.10 Ventilation
There shall be adequate clearance in front of all BBS intakes
and exhaust vents, and fans. Specifically, any venting on the
back panel must be able to maintain adequate airflow through the
Inverter/Charger, by utilizing a method to prevent the back
panel from being placed directly against the cabinet enclosure.
2.11 Battery Voltage Jacks
There shall be standard meter probe (0.08”) input jacks (+RED)
and (– BLACK) made available on the BBS front panel used to
measure battery voltage externally.
2.12 Circuit Breakers
The BBS shall be equipped with an input only breaker or both
input and output breaker and with either a DC circuit breaker or
fused battery harness.
2.13 Batteries
Battery Types supplied shall be Absorbed Glass Mat (AGM) or GEL
type.
2.13.1 Battery Charger
Page | -232-
NYS TMES - October 2, 2014
The BBS shall have an integral charger. The charger shall
be appropriate for AGM type batteries and a 3-step “Smart
Charger” utilizing bulk, absorption and float charging
techniques,. The charger must prevent destructive discharge
and overcharge. Recharge time for the battery, from
“protective low-cutoff” to 80% or more of full battery
charge capacity, shall not exceed twenty (20) hours.
2.13.2 Temperature Compensation
The integral 3-Step “Smart Charger” shall use temperature
compensation. The charging system shall compensate over a
range of 2.5 – 4.0 mV/cell/ºC.
2.13.3 Temperature Probe
A temperature sensor probe which plugs into the front panel
of the BBS shall be used to monitor the internal
temperature of the batteries. The temperature sensor wiring
shall be at least 6’6” in length. The sensor shall be
imbedded in a heavy duty 3/8” ring lug which can then be
attached to one of the battery terminal posts.
2.13.4 Battery Temperature
The batteries shall not be recharged whenever the battery
temperature exceeds 122+/- 5 ºF.
2.13.4 Battery Capacity and Temperature
Batteries shall be certified by the manufacturer to operate
over a temperature range of -35 ºF to 165 ºF. At -25 ºF
battery capacity (Ah) shall not go below 50% of the
battery’s ambient (70 ºF) capacity.
2.13.5 Battery String Voltage
Nominal string voltage of the batteries shall be 24VDC or
48VDC.
2.13.6 Battery Age. Batteries supplied with the system
shall have a date code showing that they are not more that
6 months old.
3.0 INTERCONNECTING WIRING
Interconnecting cabling shall be provided between the Power
Transfer Relay, Bypass Switch, and Inverter/Charger. Battery
interconnect cabling/harness shall be supplied to connect the
batteries to each other and to the Inverter/Charger
Page | -233-
NYS TMES - October 2, 2014
3.1 Battery Harness
3.1.1 Wiring Type
All battery harness interconnect wiring shall be via a two-part
modular harness consisting of UL Style 1015 CSA TEW or Welding
Style Cable, or equivalent. Wiring shall be of proper gauge with
respect to design current and with sufficient strand count for
flexibility and ease of handling.
3.1.2 Power Pole Connectors
The Harness assembly shall be equipped with insulated, mating,
one or two-piece Power Pole style connectors. When two-piece
Power Pole style connectors are used, the positive terminal (+)
shall be red, and the negative terminal (–) shall be black.
Additionally, the two-piece connectors shall us a locking pin to
prevent the connectors from separating.
3.1.3 Harness Construction
The Battery Harness and all Power Pole connectors shall be
assembled to ensure proper polarity and circuit configuration
throughout the entire harness.
3.1.4 Harness Part I – Battery Side
Part I of the harness shall consist of appropriate lengths of
appropriately colored (black for negative terminal, red for
positive terminal), cable with 3/8” ring lug terminals on one
end, for connecting to the battery terminals, and the
appropriately colored one or two-piece power pole connector on
the other side.
3.1.5 Harness Part II – BBS Side
Part II of the harness shall consist of multiple insulated power
pole connectors for mating to the battery side harness (Part I),
and a single insulated power pole connector for connecting to
the BBS unit.
3.1.6 Harness Length
The harness length shall be a minimum of 12 inches between
batteries and 72 inches between BBS unit and the first battery.
4.0 MOUNTING / CONFIGURATION
4.1 EIA 19” Rack
All references made to EIA rail or EIA 19” rack shall conform to
Electronic Industries Standards EIA-310-D, Racks, Panels, and
Page | -234-
NYS TMES - October 2, 2014
Associated Equipment with 10-32 “Universal Spacing” threaded
holes.
4.2 BBS Dimensions, Mounting Method and Space
The size of the entire Battery Backup system shall be that it
can fit into the inside of a NYS Specified Cabinet that has
it’s equipment rack removed and replaced with shelving for the
batteries and other components comprising the Battery Backup
System (Information regarding cabinets can be seen at Chapter
13 of this specification). The Inverter/Charger, Power Transfer
Relay and Bypass Switch Assembly shall be designed to be both
shelf mounted or rack mounted to the cabinet’s standard EIA
rails. The available space for Inverter/Charger, Power Transfer
Relay and Bypass Switch inside of the cabinet with its
equipment rack removed is 19”W x 14.5”D x 20” H. Batteries
supplied with the system shall have dimensions no greater than
7”W x 13.5”D x 9.5”H. See Figure 23.4 for the available space
inside of a cabinet for the complete BBS system.
4.4 Included Hardware
All necessary hardware for mounting shall be included. This
shall include EIA mounting brackets, bolt and washers.
4.4.1 Bolt and Washer Requirements
Bolts and washers shall meet the following requirements:
• Screw Type: Pan Head Phillips machine screw
• Size and Thread Pitch: 10-32
• Material: 18-8 stainless steel (Type 316 stainless
steel is acceptable as an alternate)
• Washer: Use one flat washer (18-8 stainless steel)
under the head of each 10-32 screw
4.5 Relay Contact Wiring
Three (3) sets of relay contact wiring shall be provided. Each
set shall be two twisted insulated conductors of UL Style 1015
CSA TEW 18 AWG wire, same ratings as above, except 16 strands of
30 AWG tinned copper.
5.0 COMMUNICATIONS
The BBS shall have RS-232 and Ethernet communications as
standard.
Page | -235-
NYS TMES - October 2, 2014
5.1 All BBS Configuration and System menus shall be accessible
and programmable from the RS-232 port and from the Ethernet
port. Additionally, all log files shall be available through
these ports.
5.2 The user serial port shall be an EIA-232 (DB9-Female)
connector.
5.3 The Ethernet Port shall be an RJ45, EIA 568B Pin Out
connector.
5.4 The Ethernet IP address shall be user configurable.
6.0 WARRANTY
Manufacturers shall provide a five (5) year factory-repair
warranty for parts and labor on the BBS from date of acceptance
by the State. Batteries shall be warranted for full replacement
for five (5) years from date of purchase, and shall be able to
deliver 80% of its original capacity during the full warranty
period. The warranty shall be included in the total bid price of
the BBS.
7.0 QUALITY ASSURANCE
7.1
Each BBS shall be manufactured in accordance with a manufacturer
Quality Assurance (QA) program. The QA program shall include two
Quality Assurance procedures: (1) Design QA (see 7.4 below) and
(2) Production QA. The Production QA shall include statistically
controlled routine tests to ensure minimum performance levels of
BBS units built to meet this specification and a documented
process of how problems are to be resolved.
7.2
QA process and test results documentation shall be kept on file
for a minimum period of seven years.
7.3
Battery Backup System designs not satisfying Design QA Testing
and Production QA Testing requirements shall not be labeled,
advertised, or sold as conforming to this specification.
Page | -236-
NYS TMES - October 2, 2014
7.4 DESIGN QUALIFICATION TESTING
7.4.1 Design Changes
The manufacturer, or an independent testing lab hired by
the manufacturer, shall perform Design Qualification
Testing on new BBS system(s) offered, and when any major
design change has been implemented on an existing design. A
major design change is defined as any modification, either
in material, electrical, physical or theoretical, that
changes any performance characteristics of the system, or
results in a different circuit configuration. Where a
dispute arises in determining if a system is a new design
or if the system has had a major design change, the State
will make the final determination if Design Qualification
Testing is required prior to production consideration.
7.4.2 Submittals
A quantity of two units for each design shall be submitted
for Design Qualification Testing.
7.4.2.1 Test Units
Test units shall be submitted to NYS DOTs Traffic Signal
Lab after the manufacturer’s testing is complete.
7.4.2.2 Test Data Submittal
Manufacturer’s testing data shall be submitted with test
units for NYSDOT’s verification Design Qualification
Testing.
7.4.3 Burn-In
The sample systems shall be energized for a minimum of 5
hours, at full rated load, at temperatures of 155 °F and –
25 °F, excluding batteries, before performing any design
qualification testing.
7.4.4 Rejection
Any failure of the BBS, which renders the unit non-
compliant with the specification after burn-in, shall be
cause for rejection.
7.4.5 Testing
For Design Qualification Testing, all specifications will
be measured including, but not limited to:
7.4.5.1 Run Time
Minimum of four hours of run time while operating in Backup
Page | -237-
NYS TMES - October 2, 2014
Mode, at full load at room temperature (70 ºF)
7.4.5.2 Relay Contact
Proper operations of all relay contacts
7.4.5.3 Output
Inverter output voltage, frequency, harmonic distortion,
and efficiency, when in Backup Mode.
7.4.5.4 Transfer Voltage
All power transfer voltage levels and all modes of
operation.
7.4.5.5 Transfer Time
Power transfer time from loss of utility line voltage to
stabilized inverter line voltage from batteries.
7.4.5.6 Backfeed Voltage
Backfeed voltage to utility when in Backup Mode.
7.4.5.7 Compliance
IEEE/ANSI C.62.41 compliance.
7.4.5.8 Charger
Battery charger operation.
7.4.5.9 Event Counter
Event counter and runtime meter accuracy.
7.4.5.10 Reports
Ability to control, monitor, get reports, and configure the
system through the standard RS-232 and Ethernet ports.
7.4.5.11 Physical Inspection
Complete physical inspection of the system for quality
workmanship.
7.5 PRODUCTION QUALITY CONTROL TESTING
7.5.1 Tests
Production Quality Control tests shall consist of all of the
above listed tests and shall be performed on each new system
prior to shipment. Failure to meet requirements of any of
these tests shall be cause for rejection. The manufacturer
shall retain test results for seven years.
Page | -238-
NYS TMES - October 2, 2014
7.5.2 Burn-in
Each BBS shall be given a minimum 100-hour burn-in period to
eliminate any premature failures. The burn-in period can be a
combination of running in Backup Mode with a full load and
running in Charger Mode.
7.5.3 Inspection
Each system shall be visually inspected for any exterior
physical damage or assembly anomalies. Any defects shall be
cause for rejection.
7.6 NYS DOT QUALITY ASSURANCE TESTING
7.6.1 Sample Procedure
NYS DOT will perform random sample testing on all shipments,
consistent with ANSI/ASQ Z1.4-2003 Sampling Procedures and
Tables for Inspection by Attributes.
7.6.2 Testing completion
Sample testing will normally be completed within 30 days after
delivery to the NYS DOT Laboratory, barring deficiencies in
the shipment, which would reset the clock.
7.6.3 Parameters
All parameters of the specification may be tested on the
shipment sample.
7.6.4 Conformance
The number of units tested (sample size) shall be determined
by the quantity in the shipment. The sample size and
acceptance or rejection of the shipment shall conform to
ANSI/ASQ Z1.4-2003.
Page | -239-
NYS TMES - October 2, 2014
Inverter/
ChargerBatteries
Power
Transfer
Relay*
Manual
Bypass
Switch*
Load
(Cabinet)
Note : Power
Transfer relay
may be internal
to the Inverter
NO/NC Relay Contacts – Six
(6) sets of user Programmable
relay contacts made available
on front panel terminal blocks
AC Voltage
Temperature
DC
DC Voltage
Battery Back Up System
Block Diagram
PTR Control (External PTR)
* Manual Bypass switch (must be external to Inverter),
and Power Transfer relay must be separate functional units,
but may share a common closure
UPS
BYPASS
Utility
PowerDOT
Supplied
Transfer
Switch
Fig 23.1 - BBS Block Diagram
Page | -240-
NYS TMES - October 2, 2014
BATTERY BACKUP SYSTEM
I nver ter / Power
Tr ansfer Relay
AC Line to
Tr ansfer Relay
and I nver ter
BBS Utility Power Connection Diagram
UTILITY SERVICE
Bypass Switch
(Typical)
AC Line fr om
Tr ansfer Relay
and I nver ter
Chassis GND
AC-
Line OutLine In
NCNC NO NO
AC+
DOT Supplied Transfer Switch
Chassis GND
AC+
AC -
LOAD
(Signal Cabinet)
Chassis GND
AC-
AC+
PDA-3 Plug Pin 4
for Cabinet Fan &
Light Circuit BBS
Cabinet GND
Bus Bar
2A Inline Fuse
BBS Cabinet Nutral
Bus Bar
BBS cabinet
AC+ AC -Note : BBS Cabinet (Modified 330 Cabinet Shelf) provided by NYS DOT
Fig 23.2- BBS Utility Power Connection Diagram
Page | - 241 -
NYS TMES – October 2, 2014
Relay Contact
0.73"
0.197"
NO C NC
1 2 3
NO C NC
4 5 6
NO C NC
7 8 9
NO C NC
10 11 12 NO C NC
13 14 15
NO C NC
16 17 18
C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6
Relay Contact Terminal Block:
o Available on Front Panel of Inverter /Charger
o 0.197" (5 mm) spacing
o Allows wire size 24-12 AWG
o Screw and wire entrance are on the same face
Fig 23.3 – Relay Contact
Page | - 242 -
NYS TMES – October 2, 2014
Figure 23.4- Internal available space of Cabinet Shell allowed for BBS
H =
42
"
W = 19"
22
"2
0"
D =
14.
5"
Available space for
Batteries
19"x14.5"x22"
Available space for
Inverter/Charger,
Power Transfer
Relay, Bypass
Switch Assembly
19"x14.5"x20"
Page | - 243 -
NYS TMES – October 2, 2014
CHAPTER 24 Specification For Double Conversion Battery Back-Up System for Traffic Signals Utilizing Light Emitting Diodes (LED)Traffic Signal Modules
GENERAL
This specification establishes the minimum requirements for a complete
emergency battery backup system for use with Light Emitting Diode (LED)
Traffic Signal Modules. The BBS shall provide reliable emergency power to
a traffic signal system (Vehicle and Pedestrian Traffic) in the event of a
power failure or interruption.
The Double Conversion Battery Backup System (BBS) shall include, but not
be limited to the following: Batteries, Inverter/Charger, Power Transfer
Relay (internal or external to the Inverter/Charger), a manually operated
non-electronic Bypass Switch that is external to the Inverter/Charger and
all necessary hardware and interconnect wiring. (See Figure 23.1 – BBS
Block Diagram) In addition, the manually operated non-electronic Bypass
Switch must also be a separate functional unit from the Power Transfer
Unit but both may share a common external enclosure.
The BBS shall be designed for outdoor applications, in accordance with
this current New York State Transportation Management Equipment
Specifications (TMES), Chapter 1 requirements.
Page | - 244 -
NYS TMES – October 2, 2014
This Page Intentionally Kept Blank
Page | - 245 -
NYS TMES – October 2, 2014
Glossary
Wherever in these specifications the following terms or abbreviations are
used, the intent and meaning shall be interpreted as follows:
A - Ampere
AC - Alternating Current
AC+ - 120 Volts AC, 60 hertz ungrounded power source
AC- - 120 Volts AC, 60 hertz grounded return to the power source
ACIA - Asynchronous Communications Interface Adapter
AGENCY - Purchasing Government Agency
ANSI - American National Standard Institute
ASCII - American Standard Code for Information Interchange
Assembly - A complete machine, structure or unit of a machine that was
manufactured by fitting together parts and/or modules
ASTM - American Society for Testing and Materials
AWG - American Wire Gage
BBS -Battery Backup System
Baud - Unit measurement of transmission speed usually equivalent to
bits per second (bps) and often used interchangeably.
(BPS) - Bits Per Second; A measure of data transmission speed; 1200
BPS equals approx. 120 characters transmitted each second.
Buffer - A temporary storage location for data. The buffer accumulates
backed-up information for later release.
Bus - A common channel between internal hardware devices, such as
between CPU and disk controller.
C - Celsius
C Language - The ANSI C Programming Language
Cabinet - An outdoor enclosure generally housing the controller unit and
associated equipment
Certificate of Compliance - A certificate signed by the manufacturer
of the material or the manufacturer of assembled materials
stating that the materials involved comply in all respects
with the requirements of the specifications.
Channel - An information path from a discrete input to a discrete output
Central - The chip that controls all computer operations and Processing
performs computations. Also may refer to the entire Unit (CPU)
physical unit housing the chip.
CMOS - Complementary Metal Oxide Semiconductor
Component - Any electrical or electronic device
Contractor - The person or persons, manufacturer, firm, partnership,
corporation, vendor or combination thereof, who have entered
into a contract with the AGENCY, as party(s) of the second
part or legal representative
Controller Unit - That portion of the controller assembly devoted to
the operational control of the logic decisions programmed into
the assembly
CR - Control Register
CPU - Central Processing Unit of a controller
Page | - 246 -
NYS TMES – October 2, 2014
CRC - Cyclic Redundancy Check
DAT Program - CALTRANS Diagnostic and Acceptance Test Program
dB - Decibel
DC - Direct Current
Detector Rack - Input File
DIN - Deutsche Industrie Norm
DMA - Direct Memory Access
Dollar Sign - "$" found preceding two (2) or four (4) characters means
the number represented is in hexadecimal notation; throughout
this entire text.
DTA - Down Time Accumulator
EG - Equipment Ground
EIA - Electronic Industries Association
EMI - Electro Magnetic Interference
Engineer - The AGENCY director, acting either directly or through
properly authorized agents, such agents acting within the
scope of the particular duties delegated to them
EPROM - Ultraviolet Erasable, Programmable, Read Only Memory Device
EEPROM - Electrically Erasable, Programmable, Read Only Memory Device
Equal - Connectors: comply with physical dimensions, contact material,
plating and method of connection. Devices: conforming to
function, pin out, electrical and operating parameter
requirements, access times and interface parameters of the
specified device
ETL - Electrical Testing Laboratories, Inc.
Fig - Figure
Firmware - A computer program or software stored permanently in PROM,
EPROM, ROM or semi-permanently in EEPROM
FIO - Field Input/output of a controller
FLASH - A +5 VDC powered IC Memory Device with nonvolatile,
electrically erasable, programmable, 100K read/write minimum
cycles and fast access time features
FPA - Front Panel Assembly
HEX - Hexadecimal
Hz - Hertz
IC - Integrated Circuit
I.D. - Identification
IEEE - Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
ISO - International Standards Organization
Jumper - A means of connecting or disconnecting two or more conductive
by soldering or de-soldering a conductive wire or by PCB post
jumper.
K - (KB) or kilobytes; 1 thousand bytes (actually 210 or 1,024
bytes). Computer RAM memories are usually defined in terms of
kilobytes. Thus when a computer has 128K of memory, it has
131,072 bytes of memory.
KB - Kilobytes
Page | - 247 -
NYS TMES – October 2, 2014
Laboratory - The established laboratory of the AGENCY or other
laboratories authorized by the AGENCY to test materials
involved in the contract
LED - Light Emitting Diode; lights usually produce a red glow. Found
on disk drives, modems, some calculator displays, etc.
LOGIC - Negative Logic Convention (Ground True) State
LSB - Least Significant Byte
Lsb - Least Significant Bit
MA or ma - Milliampere
MB - Megabyte
MSB - Most Significant Byte
msb - Most Significant Bit
m - Milli
MCU/MPU/IMP - Micro Controller Unit, Microprocessor Unit, or Integrated
Multiprotocol Processor
Megabyte (M, MB) - One million bytes (actually 220 or 1,048,576 bytes).
Used to define a large volume of data. Hard disk storage
capacity is measured in megabytes.
MIL - Military Specifications
MODEM - Modulation/Demodulation Unit
Module - A functional unit that plugs into an assembly
Motherboard - A printed circuit connector interface board with no
active or passive components
MOS - Metal-Oxide Semiconductor
MOV - Metal-Oxide Varistor
MS - Military Standards
N - Newton: SI unit of force
N.C. - Normally closed contact
N.O. - Normally open contact
NA - Presently Not Assigned. Cannot be used by the contractor for
other purposes
NEMA - National Electrical Manufacturer's Association
NETA - National Electrical Testing Association, Inc.
N - Nano
NLSB - Next Least Significant Byte
nlsb - Next Least Significant Bit
NMSB - Next Most Significant Byte
nmsb - Next Most Significant Bit
ns - Nanosecond
NYSDOT - New York State Department of Transportation
PCB - Printed Circuit Board
PLA/PAL - Programmable Array Logic Device
Port - A channel (outlet) that connects the computer to outside
sources. May be parallel or serial.
PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory
Page | - 248 -
NYS TMES – October 2, 2014
Power Failure - A Power Failure is said to have occurred when the
incoming line voltage falls below 92 +/- 2 VAC for 50 ms. See
Power Conditions.
Power Restoration - Power is said to be restored when the incoming line
voltage equals or exceeds 97 +/- 2 VAC for 50 ms. See Power
Conditions.
Power Conditions - 16.7 ms (one 60 Hz cycle) reaction period is allowed
to be included in the 50 ms timing or added to (67 ms
duration). The hysteresis between power failure and power
restoration voltage settings shall be a min. of 5 VAC with a
threshold drift of no more than 0.2 VAC.
ppm - Parts per million
PSU -Power Supply Unit
PTS -Power Transfer Switch
PWM - Pulse Width Modulation
QPL - New York State Qualified Products List.
RAM - Random Access Memory is the memory which is accessible by
the computer. The computer has the ability to change or
customize the information stored in the RAM. \
RDR - ACIA Receiver Data Register
RF - Radio Frequency
RMS - Root-Mean-Square
ROM - Read Only Memory Device
RTS - Request to Send
SCC - Serial Communications Controller
SCI - Serial Communications Interface
SDLC - Synchronous Data Link Control
S - Logic State
S - second
Second Sourced - Produced by more than one manufacturer.
Serial Interface - A device which processes information one (1) bit
at a time from the computer to a printer or other peripheral
units.
SR - Status Register
SRAM - Static Random Access Memory Device
State - State of New York
SW - Switch
Swpk -Switchpack
Swpks -Switchpacks
TOD - Time Of Day Clock
TDR - Transmit Data Register
TTL - Transistor-Transistor Logic
- Micro
UL - Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc.
VAC - Voltage Alternating Current
Page | - 249 -
NYS TMES – October 2, 2014
VDC - Voltage Direct Current
VME - Versa Module Eurocard, VMEbus Standard IEEE P1014/D1.2
X - Number Value
XX - Manufacturer's Option
WDT - Watchdog Timer: A monitoring circuit, external to the device
watched, which senses an Output Line from the device and
reacts.
Page | - 250 -
NYS TMES – October 2, 2014
The End